103146 3 Weg Variable Frequency Drive Programming Manual User

User Manual: Pump 103146 3 Weg Variable Frequency Drive Programming Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 254 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Summary
Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms
SAFETY NOTICES
- 1.1 SAFETY NOTICES IN THIS MANUAL
- 1.2 SAFETY NOTICES ON THE PRODUCT
- 1.3 PRELIMINARY RECOMMENDATIOTIONS
GENERAL INFORMATION
- 2.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL
- 2.2 TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS
ABOUT THE CFW-11
- 3.1 ABOUT THE CFW-11
KEYPAD (HMI)
- 4.1 KEYPAD (HMI)
PROGRAMMING BASIC INSTRUCTIONS
- 5.1 PARAMETER STRUCTURE
- 5.2 GROUPS ACCESSED IN THE OPTION MENU IN THE MONITORING MODE
- 5.3 PASSWORD SETTING IN P0000
- 5.4 HMI [30]
- 5.5 DATE AND TIME SETTING
- 5.6 DISPLAY INDICATIONS IN THE MONITORING MODE SETTINGS
- 5.7 INCOMPATIBILITY BETWEEN PARAMETERS
INVERTER MODEL AND ACCESSORIES IDENTIFICATION
- 6.1 INVERTER DATA [42]
STARTING-UP AND SETTINGS
- 7.1 BACKUP PARAMETERS [06]
AVAILABLE CONTROL TYPES
- 8.1 CONTROL TYPES
SCALAR CONTROL (V/f)
- 9.1 V/f CONTROL [23]
- 9.2 ADJUSTABLE V/f CURVE [24]
- 9.3 V/f CURRENT LIMITATION [26]
- 9.4 V/f DC VOLTAGE LIMITATION [27]
- 9.5 START-UP IN THE V/f CONTROL MODE
VVW CONTROL
- 10.1 VVW CONTROL [25]
- 10.2 MOTOR DATA [43]
- 10.3 VVW CONTROL MODE START-UP
VECTOR CONTROL
- 11.1 SENSORLESS CONTROL AND WITH ENCODER
- 11.2 I/F MODE (SENSORLESS)
- 11.3 SELF-TUNING
- 11.4 OPTIMAL FLUX FOR SENSORLESS VECTOR CONTROL
- 11.5 TORQUE CONTROL
- 11.6 OPTIMAL BRAKING
- 11.7 MOTOR DATA [43]
  - 11.7.1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet
- 11.8 VECTOR CONTROL [29]
- 11.9 START-UP IN THE VECTOR MODES SENSORLESS AND WITH ENCODER
FUNCTIONS COMMON TO ALL THE CONTROL MODES
- 12.1 RAMPS [20]
- 12.2 SPEED REFERENCES [21]
- 12.3 SPEED LIMITS [22]
- 12.4 MULTISPEED [36]
- 12.5 ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER [37]
- 12.6 ZERO SPEED LOGIC [35]
- 12.7 FLYING START/RIDE-THROUGH [44]
- 12.8 DC BRAKING [47]
- 12.9 SKIP SPEED [48]
- 12.10 SEARCH OF ZERO OF THE ENCODER
DIGITAL AND ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
- 13.1 I/O CONFIGURATION [07]
- 13.2 LOCAL COMMAND [31]
- 13.3 REMOTE COMMAND [32]
- 13.4 3-WIRE COMMAND [33]
- 13.5 FORWARD RUN/REVERSE RUN COMMANDS [34]
DYNAMIC BRAKING
- 14.1 DYNAMIC BRAKING [28]
FAULTS AND ALARMS
- 15.1 MOTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION
- 15.2 MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE PROTECTION
- 15.3 PROTECTIONS [45]
READ ONLY PARAMETERS [09]
- 16.1 FAULT HISTORY [08]
COMMUNICATION [49]
- 17.1 RS-232 AND RS-485 SERIAL INTERFACE
- 17.2 CAN INTERFACE - CANOPEN/DEVICENET
- 17.3 ANYBUS-CC INTERFACE
- 17.4 COMMUNICATION STATES AND COMMANDS
SOFTPLC [50]
- 18.1 SOFTPLC
TRACE FUNCTION [52]
- 19.1 TRACE FUNTION
PID REGULATOR [46]
- 20.1 DESCRIPTION AND DEFINITIONS
- 20.2 COMMISSIONING
- 20.3 SLEEP MODE
- 20.4 MONITORING MODE SCREENS
- 20.5 CONNECTION OF A 2-WIRE TRANSDUCER
- 20.6 PARAMETERS
- 20.7 ACADEMIC PID

Summary

Chapter 0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Quick Parameter Reference ...............................................................................................................0-1

Quick Fault and Alarm Reference .....................................................................................................0-26

Chapter 1

Safety Notices

1.1 Safety Notices in this Manual .......................................................................................................1-1

1.2 Safety Notices on the Product ......................................................................................................1-1

1.3 Preliminary Recommendations .....................................................................................................1-2

Chapter 2

General Information

2.1 About this Manual .....................................................................................................................2-1

2.2 Terminology and Definitions.........................................................................................................2-1

2.2.1 Terms and Definitions Used in the Manual ...........................................................................2-1

2.2.2 Numerical Representation ..................................................................................................2-3

2.2.3 Symbols for the Parameter Proprieties Description ................................................................2-3

Chapter 3

About the CFW-11

3.1 About the CFW-11 ....................................................................................................................3-1

Chapter 4

Keypad (HMI)

4.1 Keypad (HMI) .............................................................................................................................4-1

Chapter 5

Programming Basic Instructions

5.1 Parameter Structure .....................................................................................................................5-1

5.2 Groups Accessed in the Option Menu in the Monitoring Mode .......................................................5-2

5.3 Password Setting in P0000 ..........................................................................................................5-2

5.4 HMI [30] ...................................................................................................................................5-3

5.5 Date and Time Setting .................................................................................................................5-8

5.6 Display Indications in the Monitoring Mode Settings ......................................................................5-9

5.7 Incompatibility Between Parameters ............................................................................................5-11

Summary

Chapter 6

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

6.1 Inverter Data [42] .......................................................................................................................6-2

Chapter 7

Starting-Up and Settings

7.1 Backup Parameters [06] .............................................................................................................7-1

Chapter 8

Available Control Types

8.1 Control Types .............................................................................................................................8-1

Chapter 9

Scalar Control (V/f)

9.1 V/f Control [23] .........................................................................................................................9-2

9.2 Adjustable V/f Curve [24]............................................................................................................9-6

9.3 V/f Current Limitation [26] ..........................................................................................................9-7

9.4 V/f DC Voltage Limitation [27]...................................................................................................9-10

9.5 Start-up in the V/f Control Mode ................................................................................................9-13

Chapter 10

VVW Control

10.1 VVW Control [25] ...................................................................................................................10-3

10.2 Motor Data [43] .....................................................................................................................10-3

10.3 VVW Control Mode Start-up ....................................................................................................10-4

Chapter 11

Vector Control

11.1 Sensorless Control and with Encoder .......................................................................................11-1

11.2 I/f Mode (sensorless) ..............................................................................................................11-5

11.3 Self-Tuning .............................................................................................................................11-5

11.4 Optimal Flux for Sensorless Vector Control (only for constant torque loads) .................................11-6

11.5 Torque Control .......................................................................................................................11-7

11.6 Optimal Braking .....................................................................................................................11-8

11.7 Motor Data [43] ..................................................................................................................11-10

11.7.1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet .............11-14

11.8 Vector Control [29] ...............................................................................................................11-15

11.8.1 Speed Regulator [90] ................................................................................................11-15

11.8.2 Current Regulator [91] ..............................................................................................11-18

11.8.3 Flux Regulator [92] ...................................................................................................11-18

11.8.4 I/f Control [93] .........................................................................................................11-21

11.8.5 Self-Tuning [05] and [94] ..........................................................................................11-22

Summary

11.8.6 Torque Current Limitation [95] ...................................................................................11-26

11.8.7 DC Link Regulator [96] ..............................................................................................11-28

11.9 Start-up in the Vector Modes Sensorless and with Encoder .......................................................11-30

Chapter 12

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12.1 Ramps [20] ...........................................................................................................................12-1

12.2 Speed References [21] ............................................................................................................12-3

12.3 Speed Limits [22]....................................................................................................................12-5

12.4 Multispeed [36] .....................................................................................................................12-6

12.5 Electronic Potentiometer [37] ...................................................................................................12-9

12.6 Zero Speed Logic [35] ............................................................................................................12-9

12.7 Flying Start/Ride-Through [44] ...............................................................................................12-11

12.7.1 V/f Flying Start ..........................................................................................................12-12

12.7.2 Vector Flying Start .....................................................................................................12-12

12.7.2.1 P0202=3 ......................................................................................................12-12

12.7.2.2 P0202=4 ......................................................................................................12-13

12.7.3 V/f Ride-Through .......................................................................................................12-13

12.7.4 Vector Ride-Through ..................................................................................................12-15

12.8 DC Braking [47]..................................................................................................................12-18

12.9 Skip Speed [48] ..................................................................................................................12-21

12.10 Search of Zero of the Encoder .............................................................................................12-22

Chapter 13

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13.1 I/O Configuration [07] ...........................................................................................................13-1

13.1.1 Analog Inputs [38] ......................................................................................................13-1

13.1.2 Analog Outputs [39] ...................................................................................................13-6

13.1.3 Digital Inputs [40] .....................................................................................................13-11

13.1.4 Digital Outputs / Relays [41] .....................................................................................13-19

13.2 Local Command [31] ...........................................................................................................13-28

13.3 Remote Command [32] ........................................................................................................13-28

13.4 3-Wire Command [33] .........................................................................................................13-33

13.5 Forward Run/Reverse Run Commands [34] .............................................................................13-33

Chapter 14

Dynamic Braking

14.1 Dynamic Braking [28] .............................................................................................................14-1

Chapter 15

Faults and Alarms

15.1 Motor Overload Protection ......................................................................................................15-1

15.2 Motor Overtemperature Protection ...........................................................................................15-2

15.3 Protections [45] ......................................................................................................................15-4

Summary

Chapter 16

Read Only Parameters [09]

16.1 Fault History [08] ....................................................................................................................16-8

Chapter 17

Communication [49]

17.1 RS-232 and RS-485 Serial Interface .........................................................................................17-1

17.2 CAN Interface – CANopen/DeviceNet ......................................................................................17-1

17.3 Anybus-CC Interface ...............................................................................................................17-2

17.4 Communication States and Commands ....................................................................................17-3

Chapter 18

SoftPLC [50]

18.1 SoftPLC .................................................................................................................................18-1

Chapter 19

Trace Function [52]

19.1 Trace Function ........................................................................................................................19-1

Chapter 20

PID Regulator [46]

20.1 Description and Definitions .....................................................................................................20-1

20.2 Commissioning ......................................................................................................................20-3

20.3 Sleep Mode ...........................................................................................................................20-7

20.4 Monitoring Mode Screens .......................................................................................................20-7

20.5 Connection of a 2-Wire Transducer .........................................................................................20-8

20.6 Parameters .............................................................................................................................20-8

20.7 Academic PID ......................................................................................................................20-14

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-1

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0000 Access to Parameters 0 to 9999 0 - - 5-2

P0001 Speed Reference 0 to 18000 rpm - RO 09 16-1

P0002 Motor Speed 0 to 18000 rpm - RO 09 16-1

P0003 Motor Current 0.0 to 4500.0 A - RO 09 16-2

P0004 DC Link Voltage (Ud) 0 to 2000 V - RO 09 16-2

P0005 Motor Frequency 0.0 to 300.0 Hz - RO 09 16-2

P0006 VFD Status 0 = Ready

1 = Run

2 = Undervoltage

3 = Fault

4 = Self-Tuning

5 = Configuration

6 = DC-Braking

7 = STO

- RO 09 16-2

P0007 Motor Voltage 0 to 2000 V - RO 09 16-3

P0009 Motor Torque -1000.0 to 1000.0 % - RO 09 16-3

P0010 Output Power 0.0 to 6553.5 kW - RO 09 16-4

P0012 DI8 to DI1 Status Bit 0 = DI1

Bit 1 = DI2

Bit 2 = DI3

Bit 3 = DI4

Bit 4 = DI5

Bit 5 = DI6

Bit 6 = DI7

Bit 7 = DI8

- RO 09, 40 13-11

P0013 DO5 to DO1 Status Bit 0 = DO1

Bit 1 = DO2

Bit 2 = DO3

Bit 3 = DO4

Bit 4 = DO5

- RO 09, 41 13-19

P0014 AO1 Value 0.00 to 100.00 % - RO 09, 39 13-6

P0015 AO2 Value 0.00 to 100.00 % - RO 09, 39 13-6

P0016 AO3 Value -100.00 to 100.00 % - RO 09, 39 13-6

P0017 AO4 Value -100.00 to 100.00 % - RO 09, 39 13-6

P0018 AI1 Value -100.00 to 100.00 % - RO 09, 38, 95 13-1

P0019 AI2 Value -100.00 to 100.00 % - RO 09, 38, 95 13-1

P0020 AI3 Value -100.00 to 100.00 % - RO 09, 38, 95 13-1

P0021 AI4 Value -100.00 to 100.00 % - RO 09, 38, 95 13-1

P0023 Software Version 0.00 to 655.35 - RO 09, 42 6-2

P0027 Accessories Config. 1 0000h to FFFFh - RO 09, 42 6-2

P0028 Accessories Config. 2 0000h to FFFFh - RO 09, 42 6-2

P0029 Power Hardware Config Bit 0 to 5 = Rated

Current

Bit 6 and 7 = Rated

Voltage

Bit 8 = EMC Filter

Bit 9 = Safety Relay

Bit 10 = (0)24V/(1)DC

Link

Bit 11 = (0)RST/(1)DC

Link

Bit 12 = Dyn.Brak. IGBT

Bit 13 = Special

Bit 14 and 15 = Reserved

- RO 09, 42 6-4

P0030 IGBTs Temperature U -20.0 to 150.0 °C - RO 09, 45 15-4

P0031 IGBTs Temperature V -20.0 to 150.0 °C - RO 09, 45 15-4

P0032 IGBTs Temperature W -20.0 to 150.0 °C - RO 09, 45 15-4

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-2

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0033 Rectifier Temperature -20.0 to 150.0 °C - RO 09, 45 15-4

P0034 Internal Air Temp. -20.0 to 150.0 °C - RO 09, 45 15-4

P0036 Fan Heatsink Speed 0 to 15000 rpm - RO 09 16-5

P0037 Motor Overload Status 0 to 100 % - RO 09 16-5

P0038 Encoder Speed 0 to 65535 rpm - RO 09 16-6

P0039 Encoder Pulses Count 0 to 40000 0 RO 09 16-6

P0040 PID Process Variable 0.0 to 100.0 % - RO 09, 46 20-8

P0041 PID Setpoint Value 0.0 to 100.0 % - RO 09, 46 20-8

P0042 Time Powered 0 to 65535 h - RO 09 16-6

P0043 Time Enabled 0.0 to 6553.5 h - RO 09 16-7

P0044 kWh Output Energy 0 to 65535 kWh - RO 09 16-7

P0045 Fan Enabled Time 0 to 65535 h - RO 09 16-7

P0048 Present Alarm 0 to 999 - RO 09 16-8

P0049 Present Fault 0 to 999 - RO 09 16-8

P0050 Last Fault 0 to 999 - RO 08 16-8

P0051 Last Fault Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 08 16-9

P0052 Last Fault Year 00 to 99 - RO 08 16-10

P0053 Last Fault Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 08 16-10

P0054 Second Fault 0 to 999 - RO 08 16-8

P0055 Second Flt. Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 08 16-9

P0056 Second Fault Year 00 to 99 - RO 08 16-10

P0057 Second Fault Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 08 16-10

P0058 Third Fault 0 to 999 - RO 08 16-8

P0059 Third Fault Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 08 16-9

P0060 Third Fault Year 00 to 99 - RO 08 16-10

P0061 Third Fault Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 08 16-10

P0062 Fourth Fault 0 to 999 - RO 08 16-8

P0063 Fourth Flt. Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 08 16-9

P0064 Fourth Fault Year 00 to 99 - RO 08 16-10

P0065 Fourth Fault Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 08 16-10

P0066 Fifth Fault 0 to 999 - RO 08 16-8

P0067 Fifth Fault Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 08 16-9

P0068 Fifth Fault Year 00 to 99 - RO 08 16-10

P0069 Fifth Fault Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 08 16-10

P0070 Sixth Fault 0 to 999 - RO 08 16-8

P0071 Sixth Fault Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 08 16-9

P0072 Sixth Fault Year 00 to 99 - RO 08 16-10

P0073 Sixth Fault Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 08 16-10

P0074 Seventh Fault 0 to 999 - RO 08 16-8

P0075 Seventh Flt.Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 08 16-9

P0076 Seventh Fault Year 00 to 99 - RO 08 16-10

P0077 Seventh Fault Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 08 16-10

P0078 Eighth Fault 0 to 999 - RO 08 16-8

P0079 Eighth Flt. Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 08 16-9

P0080 Eighth Fault Year 00 to 99 - RO 08 16-10

P0081 Eighth Fault Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 08 16-10

P0082 Ninth Fault 0 to 999 - RO 08 16-9

P0083 Ninth Fault Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 08 16-9

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-3

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0084 Ninth Fault Year 00 to 99 - RO 08 16-10

P0085 Ninth Fault Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 08 16-10

P0086 Tenth Fault 0 to 999 - RO 08 16-9

P0087 Tenth Fault Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 08 16-9

P0088 Tenth Fault Year 00 to 99 - RO 08 16-10

P0089 Tenth Fault Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 08 16-11

P0090 Current At Last Fault 0.0 to 4000.0 A - RO 08 16-11

P0091 DC Link At Last Fault 0 to 2000 V - RO 08 16-11

P0092 Speed At Last Fault 0 to 18000 rpm - RO 08 16-11

P0093 Reference Last Fault 0 to 18000 rpm - RO 08 16-12

P0094 Frequency Last Fault 0.0 to 300.0 Hz - RO 08 16-12

P0095 Motor Volt.Last Fault 0 to 2000 V - RO 08 16-12

P0096 DIx Status Last Fault Bit 0 = DI1

Bit 1 = DI2

Bit 2 = DI3

Bit 3 = DI4

Bit 4 = DI5

Bit 5 = DI6

Bit 6 = DI7

Bit 7 = DI8

- RO 08 16-12

P0097 DOx Status Last Fault Bit 0 = DO1

Bit 1 = DO2

Bit 2 = DO3

Bit 3 = DO4

Bit 4 = DO5

- RO 08 16-13

P0100 Acceleration Time 0.0 to 999.0 s 20.0 s - 04, 20 12-1

P0101 Deceleration Time 0.0 to 999.0 s 20.0 s - 04, 20 12-1

P0102 Acceleration Time 2 0.0 to 999.0 s 20.0 s - 20 12-1

P0103 Deceleration Time 2 0.0 to 999.0 s 20.0 s - 20 12-1

P0104 S Ramp 0 = Off

1 = 50%

2 = 100%

0 = Off - 20 12-2

P0105 1st/2nd Ramp Select. 0 = 1st Ramp

1 = 2nd Ramp

2 = DIx

3 = Serial/USB

4 = Anybus-CC

5 = CANOpen/

DeviceNet

6 = SoftPLC

7 = PLC11

2 = DIx CFG 20 12-3

P0120 Speed Ref. Backup 0 = Off

1 = On

1 = On - 21 12-3

P0121 Keypad Reference 0 to 18000 rpm 90 rpm - 21 12-4

P0122 JOG/JOG+ Reference 0 to 18000 rpm 150 (125) rpm - 21 12-4

P0123 JOG- Reference 0 to 18000 rpm 150 (125) rpm Vector 21 12-5

P0124 Multispeed Ref. 1 0 to 18000 rpm 90 (75) rpm - 21, 36 12-7

P0125 Multispeed Ref. 2 0 to 18000 rpm 300 (250) rpm - 21, 36 12-7

P0126 Multispeed Ref. 3 0 to 18000 rpm 600 (500) rpm - 21, 36 12-7

P0127 Multispeed Ref. 4 0 to 18000 rpm 900 (750) rpm - 21, 36 12-7

P0128 Multispeed Ref. 5 0 to 18000 rpm 1200 (1000) rpm - 21, 36 12-7

P0129 Multispeed Ref. 6 0 to 18000 rpm 1500 (1250) rpm - 21, 36 12-7

P0130 Multispeed Ref. 7 0 to 18000 rpm 1800 (1500) rpm - 21, 36 12-7

P0131 Multispeed Ref. 8 0 to 18000 rpm 1650 (1375) rpm - 21, 36 12-7

P0132 Max. Overspeed Level 0 to 100 % 10 % CFG 22, 45 12-5

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-4

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0133 Minimum Speed 0 to 18000 rpm 90 (75) rpm - 04, 22 12-6

P0134 Maximum Speed 0 to 18000 rpm 1800 (1500) rpm - 04, 22 12-6

P0135 Max. Output Current 0.2 to 2xInom-HD 1.5xInom-HD V/f and VVW 04, 26 9-7

P0136 Manual Torque Boost 0 to 9 1 V/f 04, 23 9-2

P0137 Autom. Torque Boost 0.00 to 1.00 0.00 V/f 23 9-2

P0138 Slip Compensation -10.0 to 10.0 % 0.0 % V/f 23 9-3

P0139 Output Current Filter 0.0 to 16.0 s 0.2 s V/f and VVW 23, 25 9-4

P0140 Dwell Time At Start 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.0 s V/f and VVW 23, 25 9-5

P0141 Dwell Speed At Start 0 to 300 rpm 90 rpm V/f and VVW 23, 25 9-5

P0142 Max. Output Voltage 0.0 to 100.0 % 100.0 % CFG and Adj 24 9-6

P0143 Interm.Output Voltage 0.0 to 100.0 % 50.0 % CFG and Adj 24 9-6

P0144 3Hz Output Voltage 0.0 to 100.0 % 8.0 % CFG and Adj 24 9-6

P0145 Field Weakening Speed 0 to 18000 rpm 1800 rpm CFG and Adj 24 9-6

P0146 Intermediate Speed 0 to 18000 rpm 900 rpm CFG and Adj 24 9-6

P0150 DC Regul. Type V/f 0 = Ramp Hold

1 = Ramp Accel.

0 = Ramp Hold CFG, V/f

and VVW

27 9-12

P0151 DC Regul. Level V/f 339 to 400 V

585 to 800 V

809 to 1000 V

924 to 1200 V

400 V (P0296=0)

800 V (P0296=1)

800 V (P0296=2)

800 V (P0296=3)

800 V (P0296=4)

1000 V (P0296=5)

1000 V (P0296=6)

1000 V (P0296=7)

1200 V (P0296=8)

V/f and VVW 27 9-12

P0152 DC Link Regul. P Gain 0.00 to 9.99 1.50 V/f and VVW 27 9-13

P0153 Dyn. Braking Level 339 to 400 V

585 to 800 V

809 to 1000 V

924 to 1200 V

375 V (P0296=0)

618 V (P0296=1)

675 V (P0296=2)

748 V (P0296=3)

780 V (P0296=4)

893 V (P0296=5)

972 V (P0296=6)

972 V (P0296=7)

1174 V (P0296=8)

- 28 14-1

P0154 Dyn. Braking Resistor 0.0 to 500.0 ohm 0.0 ohm - 28 14-2

P0155 Dyn. B. Resist. Power 0.02 to 650.00 kW 2.60 kW - 28 14-3

P0156 Overl.Curr.100% Speed 0.1 to 1.5xInom-ND 1.05xInom-ND - 45 15-4

P0157 Overl.Curr. 50% Speed 0.1 to 1.5xInom-ND 0.9xInom-ND - 45 15-4

P0158 Overl.Curr. 5% Speed 0.1 to 1.5xInom-ND 0.5xInom-ND - 45 15-5

P0159 Motor Thermal Class 0 = Class 5

1 = Class 10

2 = Class 15

3 = Class 20

4 = Class 25

5 = Class 30

6 = Class 35

7 = Class 40

8 = Class 45

1 = Class 10 CFG 45 15-6

P0160 Speed Regul. Optimiz. 0 = Normal

1 = Saturated

0 = Normal CFG and

Vector

90 11-15

P0161 Speed Prop. Gain 0.0 to 63.9 7.4 Vector 90 11-16

P0162 Speed Integral Gain 0.000 to 9.999 0.023 Vector 90 11-16

P0163 LOC Reference Offset -999 to 999 0 Vector 90 11-17

P0164 REM Reference Offset -999 to 999 0 Vector 90 11-17

P0165 Speed Filter 0.012 to 1.000 s 0.012 s Vector 90 11-17

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-5

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0166 Speed Diff. Gain 0.00 to 7.99 0.00 Vector 90 11-17

P0167 Current Prop. Gain 0.00 to 1.99 0.50 Vector 91 11-18

P0168 Current Integral Gain 0.000 to 1.999 0.010 Vector 91 11-18

P0169 Max. CW Torque Curr. 0.0 to 650.0 % 125.0 % Vector 95 11-26

P0170 Max. CCW Torque Curr. 0.0 to 650.0 % 125.0 % Vector 95 11-26

P0171 CW Torque Cur at Nmax 0.0 to 650.0 % 125.0 % Vector 95 11-27

P0172 CCW TorqueCur at Nmax 0.0 to 650.0 % 125.0 % Vector 95 11-27

P0173 Max Torque Curve Type 0 = Ramp

1 = Step

0 = Ramp Vector 95 11-28

P0175 Flux Proport. Gain 0.0 to 31.9 2.0 Vector 92 11-18

P0176 Flux Integral Gain 0.000 to 9.999 0.020 Vector 92 11-19

P0178 Rated Flux 0 to 120 % 100 % Vector 92 11-19

P0179 Maximum Flux 0 to 120 % 120 % Vector 92 11-19

P0181 Magnetization Mode 0 = General Enable

1 = Run/Stop

0 = General

Enable

CFG and

Encoder

92 11-20

P0182 Speed for I/F Activ. 0 to 90 rpm 18 rpm Sless 93 11-21

P0183 Current in I/F Mode 0 to 9 1 Sless 93 11-21

P0184 DC Link Regul. Mode 0 = With losses

1 = Without losses

2 = Enab/Disab DIx

1 = Without losses CFG and

Vector

96 11-28

P0185 DC Link Regul. Level 339 to 400 V

585 to 800 V

809 to 1000 V

924 to 1200 V

400 V (P0296=0)

800 V (P0296=1)

800 V (P0296=2)

800 V (P0296=3)

800 V (P0296=4)

1000 V (P0296=5)

1000 V (P0296=6)

1000 V (P0296=7)

1200 V (P0296=8)

Vector 96 11-29

P0186 DC Link Prop. Gain 0.0 to 63.9 18.0 Vector 96 11-30

P0187 DC Link Integral Gain 0.000 to 9.999 0.002 Vector 96 11-30

P0188 Voltage Proport. Gain 0.000 to 7.999 0.200 Vector 92 11-20

P0189 Voltage Integral Gain 0.000 to 7.999 0.001 Vector 92 11-20

P0190 Max. Output Voltage 0 to 690 V

0 to 690 V

209 V (P0296=0)

361 V (P0296=1)

380 V (P0296=2)

418 V (P0296=3)

456 V (P0296=4)

499 V (P0296=5)

546 V (P0296=6)

570 V (P0296=7)

656 V (P0296=8)

Vector 92 11-20

P0191 Encoder Zero Search 0=Off

1=On

0=Off - 12-22

P0192 Status Encoder Zero

0=Off

1=Finished

0=Off RO 12-22

P0193 Day of the Week 0 = Sunday

1 = Monday

2 = Tuesday

3 = Wednesday

4 = Thursday

5 = Friday

6 = Saturday

0 = Sunday 30 5-3

P0194 Day 01 to 31 01 - 30 5-3

P0195 Month 01 to 12 01 - 30 5-3

P0196 Year 00 to 99 06 - 30 5-3

P0197 Hour 00 to 23 00 - 30 5-3

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-6

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0198 Minutes 00 to 59 00 - 30 5-3

P0199 Seconds 00 to 59 00 - 30 5-3

P0200 Password 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Change Pass.

1 = On - 30 5-4

P0201 Language 0 = Português

1 = English

2 = Español

3 = Deutsch

0 = Português - 30 5-4

P0202 Type of Control 0 = V/f 60 Hz

1 = V/f 50 Hz

2 = V/f Adjustable

3 = Sensorless

4 = Encoder

5 = VVW

0 = V/f 60 Hz CFG 05, 23, 24,

25, 90, 91,

92, 93, 94,

95, 96

9-5

P0203 Special Function Sel. 0 = None

1 = PID Regulator

0 = None CFG 46 20-9

P0204 Load/Save Parameters 0 = Not Used

1 = Not Used

2 = Reset P0045

3 = Reset P0043

4 = Reset P0044

5 = Load 60Hz

6 = Load 50Hz

7 = Load User 1

8 = Load User 2

9 = Load User 3

10 = Save User 1

11 = Save User 2

12 = Save User 3

0 = Not Used CFG 06 7-1

P0205 Read Parameter Sel. 1 0 = Not selected

1 = Speed Refer. #

2 = Motor Speed #

3 = MotorCurrent #

4 = DC Link Volt #

5 = Motor Freq. #

6 = MotorVoltage #

7 = Motor Torque #

8 = Output Power #

9 = Process Var. #

10 = Setpoint PID #

11 = Speed Refer. -

12 = Motor Speed -

13 = MotorCurrent -

14 = DC Link Volt -

15 = Motor Freq. -

16 = MotorVoltage -

17 = Motor Torque -

18 = Output Power -

19 = Process Var. -

20 = Setpoint PID -

2 = Motor Speed # - 30 5-4

P0206 Read Parameter Sel. 2 See options in P0205 3 = Motor Current # - 30 5-4

P0207 Read Parameter Sel. 3 See options in P0205 5 = Motor Freq. # - 30 5-4

P0208 Ref. Scale Factor 1 to 18000 1800 (1500) - 30 5-5

P0209 Ref. Eng. Unit 1 32 to 127 114 - 30 5-6

P0210 Ref. Eng. Unit 2 32 to 127 112 - 30 5-6

P0211 Ref. Eng. Unit 3 32 to 127 109 - 30 5-6

P0212 Ref. Decimal Point 0 = wxyz

1 = wxy.z

2 = wx.yz

3 = w.xyz

0 = wxyz - 30 5-5

P0213 Full Scale Read 1 0.0 to 200.0 % 100.0 % CFG 30 5-7

P0214 Full Scale Read 2 0.0 to 200.0 % 100.0 % CFG 30 5-7

P0215 Full Scale Read 3 0.0 to 200.0 % 100.0 % CFG 30 5-7

P0216 HMI Display Contrast 0 to 37 27 - 30 5-7

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-7

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0217 Zero Speed Disable 0 = Off

1 = On

0 = Off CFG 35, 46 12-10

P0218 Zero Speed Dis. Out 0 = Ref. or Speed

1 = Reference

0 = Ref. or Speed - 35, 46 12-10

P0219 Zero Speed Time 0 to 999 s 0 s - 35, 46 12-11

P0220 LOC/REM Selection Src 0 = Always LOC

1 = Always REM

2 = LR Key LOC

3 = LR Key REM

4 = DIx

5 = Serial/USB LOC

6 = Serial/USB REM

7 = Anybus-CC LOC

8 = Anybus-CC REM

9 = CANop/DNet LOC

10 = CANop/DNet REM

11 = SoftPLC LOC

12 = SoftPLC REM

13 = PLC11 LOC

14 = PLC11 REM

2 = LR Key LOC CFG 31, 32, 33,

110

13-28

P0221 LOC Reference Sel. 0 = Keypad

1 = AI1

2 = AI2

3 = AI3

4 = AI4

5 = Sum AIs > 0

6 = Sum AIs

7 = E.P.

8 = Multispeed

9 = Serial/USB

10 = Anybus-CC

11 = CANop/DNet

12 = SoftPLC

13 = PLC11

0 = Keypad CFG 31, 36, 37,

38, 110

13-28

P0222 REM Reference Sel. See options in P0221 1 = AI1 CFG 32, 36, 37,

38, 110

13-28

P0223 LOC FWD/REV Selection 0 = Always FWD

1 = Always REV

2 = FR Key FWD

3 = FR Key REV

4 = DIx

5 = Serial/USB FWD

6 = Serial/USB REV

7 = Anybus-CC FWD

8 = Anybus-CC REV

9 = CANop/DNet FWD

10 = CANop/DNet REV

11 = AI4 Polarity

12 = SoftPLC FWD

13 = SoftPLC REV

14 = AI2 Polarity

15 = PLC11 FWD

16 = PLC11 REV

2 = FR Key FWD CFG 31, 33, 110 13-29

P0224 LOC Run/Stop Sel. 0 = I,O Keys

1 = DIx

2 = Serial/USB

3 = Anybus-CC

4 = CANop/DNet

5 = SoftPLC

6 = PLC11

0 = I,O Keys CFG 31, 33, 110 13-30

P0225 LOC JOG Selection 0 = Disable

1 = JOG Key

2 = DIx

3 = Serial/USB

4 = Anybus-CC

5 = CANop/DNet

6 = SoftPLC

7 = PLC11

1 = JOG Key CFG 31, 110 13-30

P0226 REM FWD/REV Sel. See options in P0223 4 = DIx CFG 32, 33, 110 13-29

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-8

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0227 REM Run/Stop Sel. See options in P0224 1 = DIx CFG 32, 33, 110 13-30

P0228 REM JOG Selection See options in P0225 2 = DIx CFG 32, 110 13-30

P0229 Stop Mode Selection 0 = Ramp to Stop

1 = Coast to Stop

2 = Fast Stop

0 = Ramp to Stop CFG 31, 32, 33,

13-30

P0230 Dead Zone (AIs) 0 = Off

1 = On

0 = Off - 38 13-1

P0231 AI1 Signal Function 0 = Speed Ref.

1 = No Ramp Ref.

2 = Max.Torque Cur

3 = Process Var.

4 = PTC

5 = Not Used

6 = Not Used

7 = PLC Use

0 = Speed Ref. CFG 38, 95 13-2

P0232 AI1 Gain 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 - 38, 95 13-3

P0233 AI1 Signal Type 0 = 0 to 10V/20mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 10V/20mA to 0

3 = 20 to 4 mA

0 = 0 to

10V/20mA

CFG 38, 95 13-5

P0234 AI1 Offset -100.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % - 38, 95 13-4

P0235 AI1 Filter 0.00 to 16.00 s 0.00 s - 38, 95 13-4

P0236 AI2 Signal Function See options in P0231 0 = Speed Ref. CFG 38, 95 13-2

P0237 AI2 Gain 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 - 38, 95 13-3

P0238 AI2 Signal Type 0 = 0 to 10V/20mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 10V/20mA to 0

3 = 20 to 4 mA

4 = -10 to +10V

0 = 0 to

10V/20mA

CFG 38, 95 13-5

P0239 AI2 Offset -100.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % - 38, 95 13-4

P0240 AI2 Filter 0.00 to 16.00 s 0.00 s - 38, 95 13-4

P0241 AI3 Signal Function 0 = Speed Ref.

1 = No Ramp Ref.

2 = Max.Torque Cur

3 = Process Var.

4 = PTC

5 = Not Used

6 = Not Used

7 = PLC Use

0 = Speed Ref. CFG 38, 95 13-2

P0242 AI3 Gain 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 - 38, 95 13-4

P0243 AI3 Signal Type 0 = 0 to 10V/20mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 10V/20mA to 0

3 = 20 to 4 mA

0 = 0 to

10V/20mA

CFG 38, 95 13-5

P0244 AI3 Offset -100.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % - 38, 95 13-4

P0245 AI3 Filter 0.00 to 16.00 s 0.00 s - 38, 95 13-4

P0246 AI4 Signal Function 0 = Speed Ref.

1 = No Ramp Ref.

2 = Max.Torque Cur

3 = Process Var.

4 = Not Used

5 = Not Used

6 = Not Used

7 = PLC Use

0 = Speed Ref. CFG 38, 95 13-3

P0247 AI4 Gain 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 - 38, 95 13-4

P0248 AI4 Signal Type 0 = 0 to 10V/20mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 10V/20mA to 0

3 = 20 to 4 mA

4 = -10 to +10 V

0 = 0 to

10V/20mA

CFG 38, 95 13-5

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-9

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0249 AI4 Offset -100.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % - 38, 95 13-4

P0250 AI4 Filter 0.00 to 16.00 s 0.00 s - 38, 95 13-4

P0251 AO1 Function 0 = Speed Ref.

1 = Total Ref.

2 = Real Speed

3 = Torque Cur.Ref

4 = Torque Current

5 = Output Current

6 = Process Var.

7 = Active Current

8 = Output Power

9 = PID Setpoint

10 = Torque Cur.> 0

11 = Motor Torque

12 = SoftPLC

13 = PTC

14 = Not Used

15 = Not Used

16 = Motor Ixt

17 = Encoder Speed

18 = P0696 Value

19 = P0697 Value

20 = P0698 Value

21 = P0699 Value

22 = PLC11

23 = Id* Current

2 = Real Speed - 39 13-6

P0252 AO1 Gain 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 - 39 13-8

P0253 AO1 Signal Type 0 = 0 to 10V/20mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 10V/20mA to 0

3 = 20 to 4 mA

0 = 0 to

10V/20mA

CFG 39 13-10

P0254 AO2 Function See options in P0251 5 = Output Current - 39 13-6

P0255 AO2 Gain 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 - 39 13-8

P0256 AO2 Signal Type 0 = 0 to 10V/20mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 10V/20mA to 0

3 = 20 to 4 mA

0 = 0 to

10V/20mA

CFG 39 13-10

P0257 AO3 Function 0 = Speed Ref.

1 = Total Ref.

2 = Real Speed

3 = Torque Cur.Ref

4 = Torque Current

5 = Output Current

6 = Process Var.

7 = Active Current

8 = Output Power

9 = PID Setpoint

10 = Torque Cur.> 0

11 = Motor Torque

12 = SoftPLC

13 = Not Used

14 = Not Used

15 = Not Used

16 = Motor Ixt

17 = Encoder Speed

18 = P0696 Value

19 = P0697 Value

20 = P0698 Value

21 = P0699 Value

22 = Not Used

23 = Id* Current

24 to 71 = Exclusive

WEG Use

2 = Real Speed - 39 13-7

P0258 AO3 Gain 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 - 39 13-8

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-10

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0259 AO3 Signal Type 0 = 0 to 20 mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 20 to 0 mA

3 = 20 to 4 mA

4 = 0 to 10 V

5 = 10 to 0 V

6 = -10 to +10V

4 = 0 to 10 V CFG 39 13-10

P0260 AO4 Function See options in P0257 5 = Output Current - 39 13-7

P0261 AO4 Gain 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 - 39 13-8

P0262 AO4 Signal Type 0 = 0 to 20 mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 20 to 0 mA

3 = 20 to 4 mA

4 = 0 to 10 V

5 = 10 to 0 V

6 = -10 to +10V

4 = 0 to 10 V CFG 39 13-10

P0263 DI1 Function 0 = Not Used

1 = Run/Stop

2 = General Enable

3 = Fast Stop

4 = FWD Run

5 = REV Run

6 = 3-Wire Start

7 = 3-Wire Stop

8 = FWD/REV

9 = LOC/REM

10 = JOG

11 = Increase EP

12 = Decrease EP

13 = Not Used

14 = Ramp 2

15 = Speed/Torque

16 = JOG+

17 = JOG-

18 = No Ext. Alarm

19 = No Ext. Fault

20 = Reset

21 = PLC Use

22 = Manual/Auto

23 = Not Used

24 = Disab.FlyStart

25 = DC Link Regul.

26 = Progr. Off

27 = Load User 1/2

28 = Load User 3

29 = DO2 Timer

30 = DO3 Timer

31 = Trace Function

1 = Run/Stop CFG 20, 31, 32,

33, 34, 37,

40, 44, 46

13-12

P0264 DI2 Function See options in P0263 8 = FWD/REV CFG 20, 31, 32,

33, 34, 37,

40, 44, 46

13-12

P0265 DI3 Function See options in P0263 0 = Not Used CFG 20, 31, 32,

33, 34, 37,

40, 44, 45,

13-12

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-11

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0266 DI4 Function 0 = Not Used

1 = Run/Stop

2 = General Enable

3 = Fast Stop

4 = FWD Run

5 = REV Run

6 = 3-Wire Start

7 = 3-Wire Stop

8 = FWD/REV

9 = LOC/REM

10 = JOG

11 = Increase EP

12 = Decrease EP

13 = Multispeed

14 = Ramp 2

15 = Speed/Torque

16 = JOG+

17 = JOG-

18 = No Ext. Alarm

19 = No Ext. Fault

20 = Reset

21 = PLC Use

22 = Manual/Auto

23 = Not Used

24 = Disab.FlyStart

25 = DC Link Regul.

26 = Progr. Off

27 = Load User 1/2

28 = Load User 3

29 = DO2 Timer

30 = DO3 Timer

31 = Trace Function

0 = Not Used CFG 20, 31, 32,

33, 34, 36,

37, 40, 44,

45, 46

13-12

P0267 DI5 Function See options in P0266 10 = JOG CFG 20, 31, 32,

33, 34, 36,

37, 40, 44,

45, 46

13-12

P0268 DI6 Function See options in P0266 14 = Ramp 2 CFG 20, 31, 32,

33, 34, 36,

37, 40, 44,

45, 46

13-12

P0269 DI7 Function See options in P0263 0 = Not Used CFG 20, 31, 32,

33, 34, 37,

40, 44, 45,

13-12

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-12

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0270 DI8 Function 0 = Not Used

1 = Run/Stop

2 = General Enable

3 = Fast Stop

4 = FWD Run

5 = REV Run

6 = 3-Wire Start

7 = 3-Wire Stop

8 = FWD/REV

9 = LOC/REM

10 = JOG

11 = Increase EP

12 = Decrease EP

13 = Not Used

14 = Ramp 2

15 = Speed/Torque

16 = JOG+

17 = JOG-

18 = No Ext. Alarm

19 = No Ext. Fault

20 = Reset

21 = Not Used

22 = Manual/Auto

23 = Not Used

24 = Disab.FlyStart

25 = DC Link Regul.

26 = Parametriz.Off

27 = Load User 1/2

28 = Load User 3

29 = DO2 Timer

30 = DO3 Timer

31 = Trace Function

0 = Not Used CFG 20, 31, 32,

33, 34, 37,

40, 44, 45,

13-12

P0275 DO1 Function (RL1) 0 = Not Used

1 = N* > Nx

2 = N > Nx

3 = N < Ny

4 = N = N*

5 = Zero Speed

6 = Is > Ix

7 = Is < Ix

8 = Torque > Tx

9 = Torque < Tx

10 = Remote

11 = Run

12 = Ready

13 = No Fault

14 = No F070

15 = No F071

16 = No F006/21/22

17 = No F051/54/57

18 = No F072

19 = 4-20mA OK

20 = P0695 Value

21 = Forward

22 = Proc. V. > PVx

23 = Proc. V. < PVy

24 = Ride-Through

25 = Pre-Charge OK

26 = Fault

27 = Time Enab > Hx

28 = SoftPLC

29 = Not Used

30 = N>Nx/Nt>Nx

31 = F > Fx (1)

32 = F > Fx (2)

33 = STO

34 = No F160

35 = No Alarm

36 = No Fault and No

Alarm

37 = PLC11

13 = No Fault CFG 41 13-19

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-13

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0276 DO2 Function (RL2) 0 = Not Used

1 = N* > Nx

2 = N > Nx

3 = N < Ny

4 = N = N*

5 = Zero Speed

6 = Is > Ix

7 = Is < Ix

8 = Torque > Tx

9 = Torque < Tx

10 = Remote

11 = Run

12 = Ready

13 = No Fault

14 = No F070

15 = No F071

16 = No F006/21/22

17 = No F051/54/57

18 = No F072

19 = 4-20mA OK

20 = P0695 Value

21 = Forward

22 = Proc. V. > PVx

23 = Proc. V. < PVy

24 = Ride-Through

25 = Pre-Charge OK

26 = Fault

27 = Time Enab > Hx

28 = SoftPLC

29 = Timer

30 = N>Nx/Nt>Nx

31 = F > Fx (1)

32 = F > Fx (2)

33 = STO

34 = No F160

35 = No Alarm

36 = No Fault and No

Alarm

37 = PLC11

2 = N > Nx CFG 41 13-19

P0277 DO3 Function (RL3) See options in P0276 1 = N* > Nx CFG 41 13-19

P0278 DO4 Function 0 = Not Used

1 = N* > Nx

2 = N > Nx

3 = N < Ny

4 = N = N*

5 = Zero Speed

6 = Is > Ix

7 = Is < Ix

8 = Torque > Tx

9 = Torque < Tx

10 = Remote

11 = Run

12 = Ready

13 = No Fault

14 = No F070

15 = No F071

16 = No F006/21/22

17 = No F051/54/57

18 = No F072

19 = 4-20mA OK

20 = P0695 Value

21 = Forward

22 = Proc. V. > PVx

23 = Proc. V. < PVy

24 = Ride-Through

25 = Pre-Charge OK

26 = Fault

27 = Time Enab > Hx

28 = SoftPLC

29 = Not Used

30 = N>Nx/N>Nx

31 = F > Fx (1)

32 = F > Fx (2)

33 = STO

34 = No F160

35 = No Alarm

36 = No Fault/Alarm

37 = Not Used

0 = Not Used CFG 41 13-19

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-14

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0279 DO5 Function See options in P0278 0 = Not Used CFG 41 13-19

P0281 Fx Frequency 0.0 to 300.0 Hz 4.0 Hz - 41 13-25

P0282 Fx Hysteresis 0.0 to 15.0 Hz 2.0 Hz - 41 13-25

P0283 DO2 ON Time 0.0 to 300.0 s 0.0 s - 41 13-25

P0284 DO2 OFF Time 0.0 to 300.0 s 0.0 s - 41 13-25

P0285 DO3 ON Time 0.0 to 300.0 s 0.0 s - 41 13-25

P0286 DO3 OFF Time 0.0 to 300.0 s 0.0 s - 41 13-25

P0287 Nx/Ny Hysteresis 0 to 900 rpm 18 (15) rpm - 41 13-26

P0288 Nx Speed 0 to 18000 rpm 120 (100) rpm - 41 13-26

P0289 Ny Speed 0 to 18000 rpm 1800 (1500) rpm - 41 13-26

P0290 Ix Current 0 to 2xInom-ND 1.0xInom-ND - 41 13-26

P0291 Zero Speed Zone 0 to 18000 rpm 18 (15) rpm - 35, 41, 46 13-26

P0292 N = N* Band 0 to 18000 rpm 18 (15) rpm - 41 13-27

P0293 Tx Torque 0 to 200 % 100 % - 41 13-27

P0294 Hx Time 0 to 6553 h 4320 h - 41 13-27

P0295 ND/HD VFD Rated Curr. 0 = 3.6A / 3.6A

1 = 5A / 5A

2 = 6A / 5A

3 = 7A / 5.5A

4 = 7A / 7A

5 = 10A / 8A

6 = 10A / 10A

7 = 13A / 11A

8 = 13.5A / 11A

9 = 16A / 13A

10 = 17A / 13.5A

11 = 24A / 19A

12 = 24A / 20A

13 = 28A / 24A

14 = 31A / 25A

15 = 33.5A / 28A

16 = 38A / 33A

17 = 45A / 36A

18 = 45A / 38A

19 = 54A / 45A

20 = 58.5A / 47A

21 = 70A / 56A

22 = 70.5A / 61A

23 = 86A / 70A

24 = 88A / 73A

25 = 105A / 86A

26 = 427A / 427A

27 = 470A / 470A

28 = 811A / 811A

29 = 893A / 893A

30 = 1216A / 1216A

31 = 1339A / 1339A

32 = 1622A / 1622A

33 = 1786A / 1786A

34 = 2028A / 2028A

35 = 2232A / 2232A

36 = 2A / 2A

37 = 527A / 527A

38 = 1000A / 1000A

39 = 1500A / 1500A

40 = 2000A / 2000A

41 = 2500A / 2500A

42 = 600A / 515A

43 = 1140A / 979A

44 = 1710A / 1468A

45 = 2280A / 1957A

46 = 2850A / 2446A

47 = 105A / 88 A

48 = 142A / 115A

49 = 180A / 142A

50 = 211A / 180A

- RO 09, 42 6-6

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-15

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0296 Line Rated Voltage 0 = 200 - 240 V

1 = 380 V

2 = 400 - 415 V

3 = 440 - 460 V

4 = 480 V

5 = 500 - 525 V

6 = 550 - 575 V

7 = 600 V

8 = 660 - 690 V

According to

inverter model

CFG 42 6-7

P0297 Switching Frequency 0 = 1.25 kHz

1 = 2.5 kHz

2 = 5.0 kHz

3 = 10.0 kHz

2 = 5.0 kHz CFG 42 6-7

P0298 Application 0 = Normal Duty

1 = Heavy Duty

0 = Normal Duty CFG 42 6-8

P0299 DC-Braking Start Time 0.0 to 15.0 s 0.0 s V/f, VVW

and Sless

47 12-18

P0300 DC-Braking Stop Time 0.0 to 15.0 s 0.0 s V/f, VVW

and Sless

47 12-19

P0301 DC-Braking Speed 0 to 450 rpm 30 rpm V/f, VVW

and Sless

47 12-20

P0302 DC-Braking Voltage 0.0 to 10.0 % 2.0 % V/f and VVW 47 12-20

P0303 Skip Speed 1 0 to 18000 rpm 600 rpm - 48 12-21

P0304 Skip Speed 2 0 to 18000 rpm 900 rpm - 48 12-21

P0305 Skip Speed 3 0 to 18000 rpm 1200 rpm - 48 12-21

P0306 Skip Band 0 to 750 rpm 0 rpm - 48 12-21

P0308 Serial Address 1 to 247 1 CFG 113 17-1

P0310 Serial Baud Rate 0 = 9600 bits/s

1 = 19200 bits/s

2 = 38400 bits/s

3 = 57600 bits/s

0 = 9600 bits/s CFG 113 17-1

P0311 Serial Bytes Config. 0 = 8 bits, no, 1

1 = 8 bits, even,1

2 = 8 bits, odd, 1

3 = 8 bits, no, 2

4 = 8 bits, even,2

5 = 8 bits, odd, 2

3 = 8 bits, no, 2 CFG 113 17-1

P0312 Serial Protocol 1 = TP

2 = Modbus RTU

2 = Modbus RTU CFG 113 17-1

P0313 Comm. Error Action 0 = Off

1 = Ramp Stop

2 = General Disab.

3 = Go to LOC

4 = LOC Keep Enab.

5 = Cause Fault

0 = Off - 111 17-3

P0314 Serial Watchdog 0.0 to 999.0 s 0.0 s CFG 113 17-1

P0316 Serial Interf. Status 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Watchdog Error

- RO 09, 113 17-1

P0317 Oriented Start-up 0 = No

1 = Yes

0 = No CFG 02 10-5

P0318 Copy Function MemCard 0 = Off

1 = VFD -> MemCard

2 = MemCard -> VFD

1 = VFD ->

MemCard

CFG 06 7-2

P0319 Copy Function HMI 0 = Off

1 = VFD -> HMI

2 = HMI -> VFD

0 = Off CFG 06 7-3

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-16

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0320 FlyStart/Ride-Through 0 = Off

1 = Flying Start

2 = FS / RT

3 = Ride-Through

0 = Off CFG 44 12-11

P0321 DC Link Power Loss 178 to 282 V

308 to 616 V

425 to 737 V

486 to 885 V

252 V (P0296=0)

436 V (P0296=1)

459 V (P0296=2)

505 V (P0296=3)

551 V (P0296=4)

602 V (P0296=5)

660 V (P0296=6)

689 V (P0296=7)

792 V (P0296=8)

Vector 44 12-16

P0322 DC Link Ride-Through 178 to 282 V

308 to 616 V

425 to 737 V

486 to 885 V

245 V (P0296=0)

423 V (P0296=1)

446 V (P0296=2)

490 V (P0296=3)

535 V (P0296=4)

585 V (P0296=5)

640 V (P0296=6)

668 V (P0296=7)

768 V (P0296=8)

Vector 44 12-16

P0323 DC Link Power Back 178 to 282 V

308 to 616 V

425 to 737 V

486 to 885 V

267 V (P0296=0)

462 V (P0296=1)

486 V (P0296=2)

535 V (P0296=3)

583 V (P0296=4)

638 V (P0296=5)

699 V (P0296=6)

729 V (P0296=7)

838 V (P0296=8)

Vector 44 12-17

P0325 Ride-Through P Gain 0.0 to 63.9 22.8 Vector 44 12-17

P0326 Ride-Through I Gain 0.000 to 9.999 0.128 Vector 44 12-17

P0327 F.S. Current Ramp I/f 0.000 to 1.000 s 0.070 s Sless 44 12-12

P0328 Flying Start Filter 0.000 to 1.000 s 0.085 s Sless 44 12-12

P0329 Frequency Ramp F.S. 2.0 to 50.0 6.0 Sless 44 12-12

P0331 Voltage Ramp 0.2 to 60.0 s 2.0 s V/f and VVW 44 12-14

P0332 Dead Time 0.1 to 10.0 s 1.0 s V/f and VVW 44 12-14

P0340 Auto-Reset Time 0 to 255 s 0 s 45 15-8

P0342 Motor Unbal.Curr.Conf 0 = Off

1 = On

0 = Off CFG 45 15-9

P0343 Ground Fault Config. 0 = Off

1 = On

1 = On CFG 45 15-9

P0344 Current Lim. Conf. 0 = Hold - FL ON

1 = Decel. - FL ON

2 = Hold - FL OFF

3 = Decel.- FL OFF

1 = Decel. - FL ON CFG, V/f

and VVW

26 9-7

P0348 Motor Overload Conf. 0 = Off

1 = Fault/Alarm

2 = Fault

3 = Alarm

1 = Fault/Alarm CFG 45 15-9

P0349 Ixt Alarm Level 70 to 100 % 85 % CFG 45 15-10

P0350 IGBTs Overload Conf. 0 = F, w/ SF rd.

1 = F/A, w/ SF rd.

2 = F, no SF rd.

3 = F/A, no SF rd.

1 = F/A, w/ SF rd. CFG 45 15-10

P0351 Motor Overtemp. Conf. 0 = Off

1 = Fault/Alarm

2 = Fault

3 = Alarm

1 = Fault/Alarm CFG 45 15-11

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-17

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0352 Fan Control Config. 0 = HS-OFF,Int-OFF

1 = HS-ON,Int-ON

2 = HS-CT,Int-CT

3 = HS-CT,Int-OFF

4 = HS-CT,Int-ON

5 = HS-ON,Int-OFF

6 = HS-ON,Int-CT

7 = HS-OFF,Int-ON

8 = HS-OFF,Int-CT

2 = HS-CT,Int-CT CFG 45 15-12

P0353 IGBTs/Air Overtmp.Cfg 0 = HS-F/A,Air-F/A

1 = HS-F/A, Air-F

2 = HS-F, Air-F/A

3 = HS-F, Air-F

0 = HS-F/A,Air-F/A CFG 45 15-13

P0354 Fan Speed Config. 0 = Off

1 = Fault

1 = Fault CFG 45 15-13

P0356 Dead Time Compens. 0 = Off

1 = On

1 = On CFG 45 15-13

P0357 Line Phase Loss Time 0 to 60 s 3 s - 45 15-14

P0359 Motor Current Stabil. 0 = Off

1 = On

0 = Off V/f and VVW 45 15-14

P0372 DC-Braking Curr Sless 0.0 to 90.0 % 40.0 % Sless 47 12-20

P0397 Slip Compens. Regen. 0 = Off

1 = On

1 = On CFG and

VVW

25 10-3

P0398 Motor Service Factor 1.00 to 1.50 1.00 CFG 05, 43, 94 11-10

P0399 Motor Rated Eff. 50.0 to 99.9 % 67.0 % CFG and

VVW

05, 43, 94 10-3

P0400 Motor Rated Voltage 0 to 690 V

0 to 690 V

220 V (P0296=0)

440 V (P0296=1)

440 V (P0296=2)

440 V (P0296=3)

440 V (P0296=4)

575 V (P0296=5)

575 V (P0296=6)

690 V (P0296=7)

690 V (P0296=8)

CFG 05, 43, 94 11-11

P0401 Motor Rated Current 0 to 1.3xInom-ND 1.0xInom-ND CFG 05, 43, 94 11-11

P0402 Motor Rated Speed 0 to 18000 rpm 1750 (1458) rpm CFG 05, 43, 94 11-11

P0403 Motor Rated Frequency 0 to 300 Hz 60 (50) Hz CFG 05, 43, 94 11-12

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-18

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0404 Motor Rated Power 0 = 0.33hp 0.25kW

1 = 0.5hp 0.37kW

2 = 0.75hp 0.55kW

3 = 1hp 0.75kW

4 = 1.5hp 1.1kW

5 = 2hp 1.5kW

6 = 3hp 2.2kW

7 = 4hp 3kW

8 = 5hp 3.7kW

9 = 5.5hp 4kW

10 = 6hp 4.5kW

11 = 7.5hp 5.5kW

12 = 10hp 7.5kW

13 = 12.5hp 9kW

14 = 15hp 11kW

15 = 20hp 15kW

16 = 25hp 18.5kW

17 = 30hp 22kW

18 = 40hp 30kW

19 = 50hp 37kW

20 = 60hp 45kW

21 = 75hp 55kW

22 = 100hp 75kW

23 = 125hp 90kW

24 = 150hp 110kW

25 = 175hp 130kW

26 = 180hp 132kW

27 = 200hp 150kW

28 = 220hp 160kW

29 = 250hp 185kW

30 = 270hp 200kW

31 = 300hp 220kW

32 = 350hp 260kW

33 = 380hp 280kW

34 = 400hp 300kW

35 = 430hp 315kW

36 = 440hp 330kW

37 = 450hp 335kW

38 = 475hp 355kW

39 = 500hp 375kW

40 = 540hp 400kW

41 = 600hp 450kW

42 = 620hp 460kW

43 = 670hp 500kW

44 = 700hp 525kW

45 = 760hp 570kW

46 = 800hp 600kW

47 = 850hp 630kW

48 = 900hp 670kW

49 = 1000hp 736kW

50 = 1100hp 810kW

51 = 1250hp 920kW

52 = 1400hp 1030kW

53 = 1500hp 1110kW

54 = 1600hp 1180kW

55 = 1800hp 1330kW

56 = 2000hp 1480kW

57 = 2300hp 1700kW

58 = 2500hp 1840kW

Motormax-ND CFG 05, 43, 94 11-12

P0405 Encoder Pulses Number 100 to 9999 ppr 1024 ppr CFG 05, 43, 94 11-13

P0406 Motor Ventilation 0 = Self-Vent.

1 = Separate Vent.

2 = Optimal Flux

0 = Self-Vent. CFG 05, 43, 94 11-14

P0407 Motor Rated Power Fac 0.50 to 0.99 0.68 CFG and

VVW

05, 43, 94 10-4

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-19

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0408 Run Self-Tuning 0 = No

1 = No Rotation

2 = Run for Im

3 = Run for Tm

4 = Estimate Tm

0 = No CFG, VVW

and Vector

05, 43, 94 11-22

P0409 Stator Resistance 0.000 to 9.999 ohm 0.000 ohm CFG, VVW

and Vector

05, 43, 94 11-23

P0410 Magnetization Current 0 to 1.25xInom-ND Imag-ND - 05, 43, 94 11-24

P0411 Leakage Inductance 0.00 to 99.99 mH 0.00 mH CFG and

Vector

05, 43, 94 11-24

P0412 Tr Time Constant 0.000 to 9.999 s 0.000 s Vector 05, 43, 94 11-25

P0413 Tm Time Constant 0.00 to 99.99 s 0.00 s Vector 05, 43, 94 11-26

P0520 PID Proportional Gain 0.000 to 7.999 1.000 - 46 20-9

P0521 PID Integral Gain 0.000 to 7.999 0.043 - 46 20-9

P0522 PID Differential Gain 0.000 to 3.499 0.000 - 46 20-9

P0523 PID Ramp Time 0.0 to 999.0 s 3.0 s - 46 20-10

P0524 PID Feedback Sel. 0 = AI1 (P0231)

1 = AI2 (P0236)

2 = AI3 (P0241)

3 = AI4 (P0246)

1 = AI2 (P0236) CFG 38, 46 20-10

P0525 Keypad PID Setpoint 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0 % - 46 20-11

P0527 PID Action Type 0 = Direct

1 = Reverse

0 = Direct - 46 20-11

P0528 Proc. V. Scale Factor 1 to 9999 1000 - 46 20-11

P0529 Proc.V. Decimal Point 0 = wxyz

1 = wxy.z

2 = wx.yz

3 = w.xyz

1 = wxy.z - 46 20-12

P0530 Proc. V. Eng. Unit 1 32 to 127 37 - 46 20-12

P0531 Proc. V. Eng. Unit 2 32 to 127 32 - 46 20-12

P0532 Proc. V. Eng. Unit 3 32 to 127 32 - 46 20-13

P0533 PVx Value 0.0 to 100.0 % 90.0 % - 46 20-13

P0534 PVy Value 0.0 to 100.0 % 10.0 % - 46 20-13

P0535 Wake Up Band 0 to 100 % 0 % - 35, 46 20-13

P0536 P0525 Autom. Setting 0 = Off

1 = On

1 = On CFG 46 20-14

P0550 Trigger Signal Source 0 = Not selected

1 = Speed Refer.

2 = Motor Speed

3 = Motor Current

4 = DC Link Volt.

5 = Motor Freq.

6 = Motor Voltage

7 = Motor Torque

8 = Process Var.

9 = Setpoint PID

10 = AI1

11 = AI2

12 = AI3

13 = AI4

0 = Not selected - 52 19-1

P0551 Trigger Level -100.0 to 340.0 % 0.0 % - 52 19-1

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-20

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0552 Trigger Condition 0 = P0550* = P0551

1 = P0550* <>P0551

2 = P0550* > P0551

3 = P0550* < P0551

4 = Alarm

5 = Fault

6 = DIx

5 = Fault - 52 19-2

P0553 Trace Sampling Period 1 to 65535 1 - 52 19-3

P0554 Trace Pre-Trigger 0 to 100 % 0 % - 52 19-3

P0559 Trace Max. Memory 0 to 100 % 0 % - 52 19-3

P0560 Trace Avail. Memory 0 to 100 % - RO 52 19-4

P0561 Trace Channel 1 (CH1) 0 = Not selected

1 = Speed Refer.

2 = Motor Speed

3 = Motor Current

4 = DC Link Volt.

5 = Motor Freq.

6 = Motor Voltage

7 = Motor Torque

8 = Process Var.

9 = Setpoint PID

10 = AI1

11 = AI2

12 = AI3

13 = AI4

1 = Speed Refer. - 52 19-4

P0562 Trace Channel 2 (CH2) See options in P0561 2 = Motor Speed - 52 19-4

P0563 Trace Channel 3 (CH3) See options in P0561 3 = Motor Current - 52 19-4

P0564 Trace Channel 4 (CH4) See options in P0561 0 = Not selected - 52 19-4

P0571 Start Trace Function 0 = Off

1 = On

0 = Off - 52 19-5

P0572 Trace Trig. Day/Month 00/00 to 31/12 - RO 09, 52 19-5

P0573 Trace Trig. Year 00 to 99 - RO 09, 52 19-5

P0574 Trace Trig. Time 00:00 to 23:59 - RO 09, 52 19-5

P0575 Trace Trig. Seconds 00 to 59 - RO 09, 52 19-5

P0576 Trace Function Status 0 = Off

1 = Waiting

2 = Trigger

3 = Concluded

- RO 09, 52 19-6

P0680 Logical Status Bit 0 to 4 = Not Used

Bit 5 = 2nd Ramp

Bit 6 = Config. Mode

Bit 7 = Alarm

Bit 8 = Running

Bit 9 = Enabled

Bit 10 = Forward

Bit 11 = JOG

Bit 12 = Remote

Bit 13 = Subvoltage

Bit 14 = Automatic(PID)

Bit 15 = Fault

- RO 09, 111 17-3

P0681 Speed in 13 bits -32768 to 32767 - RO 09, 111 17-3

P0682 Serial/USB Control Bit 0 = Ramp Enable

Bit 1 = General Enable

Bit 2 = Run Forward

Bit 3 = JOG Enable

Bit 4 = Remote

Bit 5 = 2nd Ramp

Bit 6 = Reserved

Bit 7 = Fault Reset

Bit 8 to 15 = Reserved

- RO 09, 111 17-1

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-21

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0683 Serial/USB Speed Ref. -32768 to 32767 - RO 09, 111 17-1

P0684 CANopen/DNet Control See options in P0682 - RO 09, 111 17-1

P0685 CANop./DNet Speed Ref -32768 to 32767 - RO 09, 111 17-1

P0686 Anybus-CC Control See options in P0682 - RO 09, 111 17-2

P0687 Anybus-CC Speed Ref. -32768 to 32767 - RO 09, 111 17-2

P0692 Operation Mode Status Bit 0 = Orient.Startup

Bit 1 = Not Used

Bit 2 = Self Tuning

Bit 3 = AutoGuided

P318

Bit 4 = Copy Function

Bit 5 = Copying MMF

Bit 6 = Reprogram.Inv.

Bit 7 = Aux Supply 24V

Bit 8 = Incomp. Param.

Bit 9 to 15 = Incomp.

Code

- RO 09, 111 17-3

P0693 Operation Mode

Command

Bit 0 = Abort Startup

Bit 1 = Not Used

Bit 2 = Abort SelfTun.

Bit 3 = Abort P0318

Bit 4 = Reserved

Bit 5 = Abort MMF

Copy

Bit 6 and 7 = Reserved

Bit 8 = Update Depend.

Bit 9 to 15 = Reserved

- RO 09, 111 17-3

P0695 DOx Value Bit 0 = DO1

Bit 1 = DO2

Bit 2 = DO3

Bit 3 = DO4

Bit 4 = DO5

- RO 09, 111 17-3

P0696 AOx Value 1 -32768 to 32767 - RO 09, 111 17-3

P0697 AOx Value 2 -32768 to 32767 - RO 09, 111 17-3

P0698 AOx Value 3 -32768 to 32767 - RO 09, 111 17-3

P0699 AOx Value 4 -32768 to 32767 - RO 09, 111 17-4

P0700 CAN Protocol 1 = CANopen

2 = DeviceNet

1 = CANopen CFG 112 17-1

P0701 CAN Address 0 to 127 63 CFG 112 17-1

P0702 CAN Baud Rate 0 = 1 Mbit/s

1 = Reserved

2 = 500 Kbit/s

3 = 250 Kbit/s

4 = 125 Kbit/s

5 = 100 Kbit/s

6 = 50 Kbit/s

7 = 20 Kbit/s

8 = 10 Kbit/s

0 = 1 Mbit/s CFG 112 17-1

P0703 Bus Off Reset 0 = Manual

1 = Automatic

1 = Automatic CFG 112 17-1

P0705 CAN Controller Status 0 = Disabled

1 = Auto-baud

2 = CAN Enabled

3 = Warning

4 = Error Passive

5 = Bus Off

6 = No Bus Power

- RO 09, 112 17-1

P0706 RX CAN Telegrams 0 to 65535 - RO 09, 112 17-1

P0707 TX CAN Telegrams 0 to 65535 - RO 09, 112 17-2

P0708 Bus Off Counter 0 to 65535 - RO 09, 112 17-2

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-22

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0709 CAN Lost Messages 0 to 65535 - RO 09, 112 17-2

P0710 DNet I/O instances 0 = ODVA Basic 2W

1 = ODVA Extend 2W

2 = Manuf.Spec. 2W

3 = Manuf.Spec. 3W

4 = Manuf.Spec. 4W

5 = Manuf.Spec. 5W

6 = Manuf.Spec. 6W

0 = ODVA

Basic 2W

- 112 17-2

P0711 DNet Read Word #3 -1 to 1499 -1 - 112 17-2

P0712 DNet Read Word #4 -1 to 1499 -1 - 112 17-2

P0713 DNet Read Word #5 -1 to 1499 -1 - 112 17-2

P0714 DNet Read Word #6 -1 to 1499 -1 - 112 17-2

P0715 DNet Write Word #3 -1 to 1499 -1 - 112 17-2

P0716 DNet Write Word #4 -1 to 1499 -1 - 112 17-2

P0717 DNet Write Word #5 -1 to 1499 -1 - 112 17-2

P0718 DNet Write Word #6 -1 to 1499 -1 - 112 17-2

P0719 DNet Network Status 0 = Offline

1 = OnLine,NotConn

2 = OnLine,Conn

3 = Conn.Timed-out

4 = Link Failure

5 = Auto-Baud

- RO 09, 112 17-2

P0720 DNet Master Status 0 = Run

1 = Idle

- RO 09, 112 17-2

P0721 CANopen Comm. Status 0 = Disabled

1 = Reserved

2 = Comm. Enabled

3 = ErrorCtrl.Enab

4 = Guarding Error

5 = HeartbeatError

- RO 09, 112 17-2

P0722 CANopen Node State 0 = Disabled

1 = Initialization

2 = Stopped

3 = Operational

4 = PreOperational

- RO 09, 112 17-2

P0723 Anybus Identification 0 = Disabled

1 = RS232

2 = RS422

3 = USB

4 = Serial Server

5 = Bluetooth

6 = Zigbee

7 = Reserved

8 = Reserved

9 = Reserved

10 = RS485

11 = Reserved

12 = Reserved

13 = Reserved

14 = Reserved

15 = Reserved

16 = Profibus DP

17 = DeviceNet

18 = CANopen

19 = EtherNet/IP

20 = CC-Link

21 = Modbus-TCP

22 = Modbus-RTU

23 = Profinet IO

24 = Reserved

25 = Reserved

- RO 09, 114 17-2

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-23

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0724 Anybus Comm. Status 0 = Disabled

1 = Not Supported

2 = Access Error

3 = Offline

4 = Online

- RO 09, 114 17-2

P0725 Anybus Address 0 to 255 0 CFG 114 17-2

P0726 Anybus Baud Rate 0 to 3 0 CFG 114 17-2

P0727 Anybus I/O Words 2 = 2 Words

3 = 3 Words

4 = 4 Words

5 = 5 Words

6 = 6 Words

7 = 7 Words

8 = 8 Words

9 = PLC11 Board

2 = 2 Words CFG 114 17-3

P0728 Anybus Read Word #3 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0729 Anybus Read Word #4 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0730 Anybus Read Word #5 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0731 Anybus Read Word #6 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0732 Anybus Read Word #7 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0733 Anybus Read Word #8 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0734 Anybus Write Word #3 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0735 Anybus Write Word #4 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0736 Anybus Write Word #5 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0737 Anybus Write Word #6 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0738 Anybus Write Word #7 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0739 Anybus Write Word #8 0 to 1499 0 CFG 114 17-3

P0740 Profibus Comm. Status 0 = Disabled

1 = Not Supported

2 = Access Error

3 = Offline

4 = Online

- RO 09, 115 -

P0800 Phase U Book 1 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-13

P0801 Phase V Book 1 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-13

P0802 Phase W Book 1 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-13

P0803 Phase U Book 2 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-13

P0804 Phase V Book 2 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

P0805 Phase W Book 2 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

P0806 Phase U Book 3 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

P0807 Phase V Book 3 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

P0808 Phase W Book 3 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

P0809 Phase U Book 4 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

P0810 Phase V Book 4 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

P0811 Phase W Book 4 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-24

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P0812 Phase U Book 5 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

P0813 Phase V Book 5 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

P0814 Phase W Book 5 Temper -20.0 to 150.0 °C - CFW-11M

and RO

09, 45 16-14

P0832 DIM1 Function 0 = Not Used

1 = Extern Fault

2 = Refrig. Fault

3 = Overtemp. Brk

4 = Overtemp. Ret.

5 = High Temp. Ret

0 = Not Used CFW-11M 45, 40 15-15

P0833 DIM2 Function See options in P0832 0 = Not Used CFW-11M 45, 40 15-15

P0834 DIM1 DIM2 Status Bit 0 = DIM1

Bit 1 = DIM2

- CFW-11M

and RO

09, 40 16-14

P1000 SoftPLC Status 0 = No Application

1 = Install. App.

2 = Incompat. App.

3 = App. Stopped

4 = App. Running

0 = No Application RO 09, 50 18-1

P1001 SoftPLC Command 0 = Stop Program

1 = Run Program

2 = Delete Program

0 = Stop Program CFG 50 18-1

P1002 Scan Cycle Time 0 to 65535 ms - RO 09, 50 18-1

P1010 SoftPLC Parameter 1 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1011 SoftPLC Parameter 2 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1012 SoftPLC Parameter 3 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1013 SoftPLC Parameter 4 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1014 SoftPLC Parameter 5 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1015 SoftPLC Parameter 6 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1016 SoftPLC Parameter 7 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1017 SoftPLC Parameter 8 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1018 SoftPLC Parameter 9 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1019 SoftPLC Parameter 10 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1020 SoftPLC Parameter 11 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1021 SoftPLC Parameter 12 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1022 SoftPLC Parameter 13 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1023 SoftPLC Parameter 14 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1024 SoftPLC Parameter 15 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1025 SoftPLC Parameter 16 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1026 SoftPLC Parameter 17 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1027 SoftPLC Parameter 18 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1028 SoftPLC Parameter 19 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1029 SoftPLC Parameter 20 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1030 SoftPLC Parameter 21 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1031 SoftPLC Parameter 22 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1032 SoftPLC Parameter 23 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1033 SoftPLC Parameter 24 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1034 SoftPLC Parameter 25 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1035 SoftPLC Parameter 26 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1036 SoftPLC Parameter 27 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1037 SoftPLC Parameter 28 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1038 SoftPLC Parameter 29 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-25

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting User

Setting Proprieties Groups Pag.

P1039 SoftPLC Parameter 30 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1040 SoftPLC Parameter 31 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1041 SoftPLC Parameter 32 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1042 SoftPLC Parameter 33 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1043 SoftPLC Parameter 34 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1044 SoftPLC Parameter 35 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1045 SoftPLC Parameter 36 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1046 SoftPLC Parameter 37 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1047 SoftPLC Parameter 38 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1048 SoftPLC Parameter 39 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

P1049 SoftPLC Parameter 40 -32768 to 32767 0 CFG 50 18-1

Notes:

RO = Read only parameter

rw = Read/write parameter

CFG = Configuration parameter, value can be programmed only with motor stopped

V/f = Available when V/f control mode is chosen

Adj = Available when adjustable V/f control mode is chosen

VVW = Available when VVW control mode is chosen

Vector = Available when a vector control mode is chosen

Sless = Available when sensorless control mode is chosen

Encoder = Available when vector control with encoder is chosen

CFW-11M = Available for Modular Drive models

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-26

Fault/Alarm Description Possible Causes

F006:

Imbalance or

Input Phase Loss

Mains voltage imbalance too high or phase missing

in the input power supply.

Note:

- If the motor is unloaded or operating with reduced

load this fault may not occur.

- Fault delay is set at parameter P0357.

P0357=0 disables the fault.

Phase missing at the inverter's input power supply.

Input voltage imbalance >5 %.

A010:

Rectifier High

Temperature

A high temperature alarm was detected by the NTC

temperature sensors located in the rectifier modules.

Note (CFW-11):

- This is valid only for the following models:

CFW110086T2, CFW110105T2, CFW110045T4,

CFW110058T4, CFW110070T4 and

CFW110088T4.

- It may be disabled by setting P0353=2 or 3.

Note (CFW-11M):

These faults/alarms are associated to the configura-

tion of the parameters P0832 and P0833.

- Function of the DIM 1 input.

- Function of the DIM 2 input.

Surrounding air temperature is too high (>50 °C (122 °F))

and output current is too high.

Blocked or defective fan.

Inverter heatsink is completely covered with dust.

Note (CFW-11M):

Overtemperature (rectifier/braking).

Failure in the connection between the digital input and

the sensor.

Failure of the corresponding sensor.

Failure in the device being monitored by the sensor.

F011:

Rectifier

Overtemperature

An overtemperature fault was detected by the NTC

temperature sensors located in the rectifier modules.

Note:

- This is valid only for the following models:

CFW110086T2, CFW110105T2, CFW110045T4,

CFW110058T4, CFW110070T4 and

CFW110088T4.

Surrounding air temperature is too high (>50 °C (122 °F))

and output current is too high.

Blocked or defective fan.

Inverter heatsink is completely covered with dust.

F021:

DC Bus Undervoltage

DC bus undervoltage condition occurred. The input voltage is too low and the DC bus voltage

dropped below the minimum permitted value (monitor the

value at Parameter P0004):

Ud < 223 V - For a 200-240 V three-phase input voltage

Ud < 170 V - For a 200-240 V single-phase input

voltage (models CFW11MXXXXS2 or CFW11MXXXXB2)

(P0296=0);

Ud < 385 V - For a 380 V input voltage (P0296=1);

Ud < 405 V - For a 400-415 V input voltage

(P0296=2);

Ud < 446 V - For a 440-460 V input voltage

(P0296=3);

Ud < 487 V - For a 480 V input voltage (P0296=4).

Phase loss in the input power supply.

Pre-charge circuit failure.

Parameter P0296 was set to a value above of the power

supply rated voltage.

F022:

DC Bus Overvoltage

DC bus overvoltage condition occurred. The input voltage is too high and the DC bus voltage

surpassed the maximum permitted value:

Ud > 400 V - For 220-230 V input models (P0296=0);

Ud > 800 V - For 380-480 V input models (P0296=1,

2, 3, or 4).

Inertia of the driven-load is too high or deceleration time

is too short.

Wrong settings for parameters P0151, or P0153, or P0185.

F030(*):

Power Module U Fault

Desaturation of IGBT occured in Power Module U.

Note:

This protection is available only for frame D models.

Short-circuit between motor phases U and V or U and W. (2)

F034(*):

Power Module V Fault

Desaturation of IGBT occured in Power Module V.

Note:

This protection is available only for frame D models.

Short-circuit between motor phases V and U or V and W. (2)

F038(*):

Power Module W Fault

Desaturation of IGBT occured in Power Module W.

Note:

This protection is available only for frame D models.

Short-circuit between motor phases W and U or W and V. (2)

F042:

DB IGBT Fault

Desaturation of Dynamic Braking IGBT occured.

Note:

This protection is available only for frame D models.

Short-circuit between the connection cables of the

dynamic braking resistor.

(*) In the case of the modular drive, the book where the fault has occurred is not indicated on the HMI. Therefore, it is necessary to verify the

indication LEDs on the IPS1 board (refer to note (2)).

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-27

Fault/Alarm Description Possible Causes

A046:

High Load on Motor

Load is too high for the used motor.

Note:

It may be disabled by setting P0348=0 or 2.

Settings of P0156, P0157, and P0158 are too low for the

used motor.

Motor shaft load is excessive.

A047:

IGBT Overload Alarm

An IGBT overload alarm occurred.

Note:

It may be disabled by setting P0350=0 or 2.

Inverter output current is too high.

F048:

IGBT Overload Fault

An IGBT overload fault occurred.

Note:

It may be disabled by setting P0350=0 or 2.

Inverter output current is too high.

A050:

IGBT High Temperature U

A high temperature alarm was detected by the NTC

temperature sensors located on the IGBTs.

Note:

It may be disabled by setting P0353=2 or 3.

Surrounding air temperature is too high (>50 °C (122 °F))

and output current is too high.

Blocked or defective fan.

Inverter heatsink is completely covered with dust.

F051:

IGBT Overtemperature U

A high temperature fault was detected by the NTC

temperature sensors located on the IGBTs.

A053:

High Temperature on

IGBTs V

Alarm of high temperature measured at the

temperature sensors (NTC) of the IGBTs.

Note:

It can be disabled by setting P0353 = 2 or 3.

High ambient temperature around the inverter (>50 °C)

and high output current.

Blocked or defective fan.

Very dirty heatsink.

F054:

Overtemperature on

IGBTs V

Fault of overtemperature measured at the

temperature sensors (NTC) of the IGBTs.

A056:

High Temperature on

IGBTs W

Alarm of high temperature measured at the

temperature sensors (NTC) of the IGBTs.

Note:

It can be disabled by setting P0353 = 2 or 3.

High ambient temperature around the inverter (>50 °C)

and high output current.

Blocked or defective fan.

Very dirty heatsink.

F057:

Overtemperature on

IGBTs W

Fault of overtemperature measured at the

temperature sensors (NTC) of the IGBTs.

F067:

Incorrect Encoder/

Motor Wiring

Fault related to the phase relation of the encoder

signals.

Note:

- This fault can only happen during the self-tuning

routine.

- It is not possible to reset this fault.

- In this case, turn off the power supply, solve the

problem, and then turn it on again.

Output motor cables U, V, W are inverted.

Encoder channels A and B are inverted.

Encoder was not properly mounted.

F070:

Overcurrent /

Short-circuit

Overcurrent or short-circuit detected at the output,

in the DC bus, or at the braking resistor.

Note:

It is available only for models of frames A, B, and C.

Short-circuit between two motor phases.

Short-circuit between the connection cables of the

dynamic braking resistor.

IGBT modules are shorted.

F071:

Output Overcurrent

The inverter output current was too high for too long. Excessive load inertia or acceleration time too short.

Settings of P0135, P0169, P0170, P0171, and P0172

are too high.

F072:

Motor Overload

The motor overload protection operated.

Note:

It may be disabled by setting P0348=0 or 3.

Settings of P0156, P0157, and P0158 are too low for the

used motor.

Motor shaft load is excessive.

F074:

Ground Fault

A ground fault occured either in the cable between

the inverter and the motor or in the motor itself.

Note:

It may be disabled by setting P0343=0.

Shorted wiring in one or more of the output phases.

Motor cable capacitance is too large, resulting in current

peaks at the output. (1)

F076:

Motor Current

Imbalance

Fault of motor current unbalance.

Note:

It may be disabled by setting P0342=0.

Loose connection or broken wiring between the motor

and inverter connection.

Vector control with wrong orientation.

Vector control with encoder, encoder wiring or encoder

motor connection inverted.

F077:

DB Resistor Overload

The dynamic braking resistor overload protection

operated.

Excessive load inertia or desacceleration time too short.

Motor shaft load is excessive.

Wrong setttings for parameters P0154 and P0155.

F078:

Motor

Overtemperature

Fault related to the PTC temperature sensor installed

in the motor.

Note:

- It may be disabled by setting P0351=0 or 3.

- It is required to set the analog input / output to the

PTC function.

Excessive load at the motor shaft.

Excessive duty cycle (too many starts / stops per minute).

Surrounding air temperature too high.

 Looseconnectionorshort-circuit(resistance<100Ω)in

the wiring connected to the motor termistor.

Motor termistor is not installed.

Blocked motor shaft.

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-28

Fault/Alarm Description Possible Causes

F079:

Encoder Signal Fault

Lack of encoder signals. Broken wiring between motor encoder and option kit for

encoder interface.

Defective encoder.

F080:

CPU Watchdog

Microcontroller watchdog fault. Electrical noise.

F082:

Copy Function Fault

Fault while copying parameters. An attempt to copy the keypad parameters to an inverter

with a different firmware version.

F084:

Auto-diagnosis Fault

Auto-diagnosis fault. Defect in the inverter internal circuitry.

A088:

Keypad Comm. Fault

Indicates a problem between the keypad and control

board communication.

Loose keypad cable connection.

Electrical noise in the installation.

A090:

External Alarm

External alarm via digital input.

Note:

It is required to set a digital input to "No external

alarm".

Wiring was not connected to the digital input (DI1 to DI8)

set to “No external alarm”.

F091:

External Fault

External fault via digital input.

Note:

It is required to set a digital input to "No external

fault".

Wiring was not connected to the digital input (DI1 to DI8)

set to “No external fault”.

F099:

Invalid Current Offset

Current measurement circuit is measuring a wrong

value for null current.

Defect in the inverter internal circuitry.

A110:

High Motor

Temperature

Alarm related to the PTC temperature sensor installed

in the motor.

Note:

- It may be disabled by setting P0351=0 or 2.

- It is required to set the analog input / output to the

PTC function.

Excessive load at the motor shaft.

Excessive duty cycle (too many starts / stops per minute).

Surrounding air temperature too high.

 Looseconnectionorshort-circuit(resistance<100Ω)in

the wiring connected to the motor termistor.

Motor termistor is not installed.

Blocked motor shaft.

A128:

Timeout for Serial

Communication

Indicates that the inverter stopped receiving valid

messages within a certain time interval.

Note:

It may be disabled by setting P0314=0.0 s.

Check the wiring and grounding installation.

Make sure the inverter has sent a new message within the

time interval set at P0314.

A129:

Anybus is Offline

Alarm that indicates interruption of the Anybus-CC

communication.

PLC entered into the idle state.

Programming error. Master and slave set with a different

number of I/O words.

Communication with master has been lost (broken cable,

unplugged connector, etc.).

A130:

Anybus Access Error

Alarm that indicates an access error to the

Anybus-CC communication module.

Defective, unrecognized, or improperly installed Anybus-CC

module.

Conflict with a WEG option board.

A133:

CAN Not Powered

Alarm indicating that the power supply was not

connected to the CAN controller.

Broken or loose cable.

Power supply is off.

A134:

Bus Off

Inverter CAN interface has entered into the bus-off

state.

Incorrect communication baud-rate.

Two nodes configured with the same address in the network.

Wrong cable connection (inverted signals).

A135:

CANopen

Communication Error

Alarm that indicates a communication error. Communication problems.

Wrong master configuration/settings.

Incorrect configuration of the communication objects.

A136:

Idle Master

Network master has entered into the idle state. PLC in IDLE mode.

Bit of the PLC command register set to zero (0).

A137:

DNet Connection Timeout

I/O connection timeout - DeviceNet communication

alarm.

One or more allocated I/O connections have entered

into the timeout state.

F150:

Motor Overspeed

Overspeed fault.

It is activated when the real speed exceeds the value

of P0134+P0132 for more than 20 ms.

Wrong settings of P0161 and/or P0162.

Problem with the hoist-type load.

F151:

FLASH Memory Module

Fault

FLASH Memory Module fault (MMF-01). Defective FLASH memory module.

Check the connection of the FLASH memory module.

A152:

Internal Air High

Temperature

Alarm indicating that the internal air temperature is

too high.

Note:

It may be disabled by setting P0353=1 or 3.

Surrounding air temperature too high (>50 °C (122 °F))

and excessive output current.

Defective internal fan (if installed).

Note (CFW-11M):

High temperature inside the panel (>45 °C).

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-29

Fault/Alarm Description Possible Causes

F153:

Internal Air

Overtemperature

Internal air overtemperature fault. Surrounding air temperature too high (>50 °C (122 °F))

and excessive output current.

Defective internal fan (if installed).

F156:

Undertemperature

Undertemperature fault (below -30 °C (-22 °F)) in

the IGBT or rectifier measured by the temperature

sensors.

 Surroundingairtemperature≤-30°C(-22°F).

F161:

Timeout PLC11CFW-11

Refer to the PLC11-01 Module Programming Manual

A162:

Incompatible PLC

Firmware

A163

Break Detect AI1

It indicates that the AI1 current (4 20mA or 20-4mA)

reference is out of the 4 to 20mA range.

Broken AI1 cable;

Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip

A164

Break Detect AI2

It indicates that the AI2 current (4 20mA or 20-4mA)

reference is out of the 4 to 20mA range.

Broken AI2 cable;

Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip

A165

Break Detect AI3

It indicates that the AI3 current (4 20mA or 20-4mA)

reference is out of the 4 to 20mA range.

Broken AI3 cable;

Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip

A166

Break Detect AI4

It indicates that the AI4 current (4 20mA or 20-4mA)

reference is out of the 4 to 20mA range.

Broken AI4 cable;

Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip

A177:

Fan Replacement

Fan replacement alarm (P0045 > 50000 hours).

Note:

This function may be disabled by setting P0354=0.

Maximum number of operating hours for the heatsink fan

has been reached.

F179:

Heatsink Fan Speed Fault

This fault indicates a problem with the heatsink fan.

Note:

This function may be disabled by setting P0354=0.

Dust on fan blades and bearings.

Defective fan.

A181:

Invalid Clock Value

Invalid clock value alarm. It is necessary to set date and time at parameters P0194

to P0199.

Keypad battery is discharged, defective, or not installed.

F182:

Pulse Feedback Fault

Indicates a fault on the output pulses feedback. Defect in the inverter internal circuitry.

F183:

IGBT Overload +

Temperature

Overtemperature related to the IGBTs overload

protection.

Surrounding air temperature too high.

Operation with frequencies < 10 Hz under overload.

F185

Precharge Contac Fault

It indicates fault at the Pre charge Contactor Pre-charge contactor defect

F228

Serial Communication

Timeout

Refer to the RS-232 / RS-485 Serial Communication Manual

F229

Anybus Offline

Refer to the Anybus-CC Communication Manual

F230

Anybus Access Error

F233

CAN Bus Power Failure

Refer to the CANopen Communication Manual and/or the DeviceNet Communication Manual

F234

Bus Off

F235

CANopen Communication

Error

Refer to the CANopen Communication Manual

F236

Master Idle

Refer to the DeviceNet Communication Manual

F237

DeviceNet Connect

Timeout

A300:

High temperature at IGBT

U B1

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 1 U phase

IGBT

High ambient temperature (>45°C) and high output

current.

Blocked or defective fan.

Fins of the book heatsink too dirty, impairing the air flow.

F301:

Overtemperature at IGBT

U B1

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 1 U phase IGBT

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-30

Fault/Alarm Description Possible Causes

A303:

High Temperature at IGBT

V B1

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 1 V phase

IGBT

High ambient temperature (>45°C) and high output

current.

Blocked or defective fan.

Fins of the book heatsink too dirty, impairing the air flow.

F304:

Overtemperature at IGBT

V B1

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 1 V phase IGBT

A306:

High Temperature at IGBT

W B1

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 1 W phase

IGBT

F307:

Overtemperature at IGBT

W B1

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 1 W phase IGBT

A309:

High Temperature at IGBT

U B2

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 2 U phase

IGBT

F310:

Overtemperature at IGBT

U B2

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 2 U phase IGBT

A312:

High Temperature at IGBT

V B2

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 2 V phase

IGBT

F313:

Overtemperature at IGBT

V B2

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 2 V phase IGBT

A315:

High Temperature at IGBT

W B2

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 2 W phase

IGBT

F316:

Overtemperature at IGBT

W B2

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 2 W phase IGBT

A318:

High Temperature at IGBT

U B3

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 3 U phase

IGBT

F319:

Overtemperature at IGBT

U B3

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 3 U phase IGBT

A321:

High Temperature at IGBT

V B3

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 3 V phase

IGBT

F322:

Overtemperature at IGBT

V B3

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 3 V phase IGBT

A324:

High Temperature at IGBT

W B3

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 3 W phase

IGBT

F325:

Overtemperature at IGBT

W B3

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 3 W phase IGBT

A327:

High Temperature at IGBT

U B4

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 4 U phase

IGBT

F328:

Overtemperature at IGBT

U B4

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 4 U phase IGBT

A330:

High Temperature at IGBT

V B4

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 4 V phase

IGBT

F331:

Overtemperature at IGBT

V B4

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 4 V phase IGBT

A333:

High Temperature at IGBT

W B4

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 4 W phase

IGBT

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-31

Fault/Alarm Description Possible Causes

F334:

Overtemperature at IGBT

W B4

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 4 W phase IGBT

High ambient temperature (>45°C) and high output

current.

Blocked or defective fan.

Fins of the book heatsink too dirty, impairing the air flow.

A336:

High Temperature at IGBT

U B5

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 5 U phase

IGBT

F337:

Overtemperature at IGBT

U B5

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 5 U phase IGBT

A339:

High Temperature at IGBT

V B5

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 5 V phase

IGBT

F340:

Overtemperature at IGBT

V B5

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 5 V phase IGBT

A342:

High Temperature at IGBT

W B5

High temperature alarm measured with the

temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 5 W phase

IGBT

F343:

Overtemperature at IGBT

W B5

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature

sensor (NTC) of the book 5 W phase IGBT

A345:

High Load at IGBT U B1

Overload alarm at book 1 U phase IGBT

High current at the inverter output (see figure 8.1).

F346:

Overload at IGBT U B1

Overload fault at book 1 U phase IGBT

A348:

High Load at IGBT V B1

Overload alarm at book 1 V phase IGBT

F349:

Overload at IGBT V B1

Overload fault at book 1 V phase IGBT

A351:

High Load at IGBT W B1

Overload alarm at book 1 W phase IGBT

F352:

Overload at IGBT W B1

Overload fault at book 1 W phase IGBT

A354:

High Load at IGBT U B2

Overload alarm at book 2 U phase IGBT

F355:

Overload at IGBT U B2

Overload fault at book 2 U phase IGBT

A357:

High Load at IGBT V B2

Overload alarm at book 2 V phase IGBT

F358:

Overload at IGBT V B2

Overload fault at book 2 V phase IGBT

A360:

High Load at IGBT W B2

Overload alarm at book 2 W phase IGBT

F361:

Overload at IGBT W B2

Overload fault at book 2 W phase IGBT

A363:

High Load at IGBT U B3

Overload alarm at book 3 U phase IGBT

F364:

Overload at IGBT U B3

Overload fault at book 3 U phase IGBT

A366:

High Load at IGBT V B3

Overload alarm at book 3 V phase IGBT

F367:

Overload at IGBT V B3

Overload fault at book 3 V phase IGBT

A369:

High Load at IGBT W B3

Overload alarm at book 3 W phase IGBT

F370:

Overload at IGBT W B3

Overload fault at book 3 W phase IGBT

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-32

Fault/Alarm Description Possible Causes

A372:

High Load at IGBT U B4

Overload alarm at book 4 U phase IGBT

High current at the inverter output (see figure 8.1).

F373:

Overload at IGBT U B4

Overload fault at book 4 U phase IGBT

A375:

High Load at IGBT V B4

Overload alarm at book 4 V phase IGBT

F376:

Overload at IGBT V B4

Overload fault at book 4 V phase IGBT

A378:

High Load at IGBT W B4

Overload alarm at book 4 W phase IGBT

F379:

Overload at IGBT W B4

Overload fault at book 4 W phase IGBT

A381:

High Load at IGBT U B5

Overload alarm at book 5 U phase IGBT

F382:

Overload at IGBT U B5

Overload fault at book 5 U phase IGBT

A384:

High Load at IGBT V B5

Overload alarm at book 5 V phase IGBT

F385:

Overload at IGBT V B5

Overload fault at book 5 V phase IGBT

A387:

High Load at IGBT W B5

Overload alarm at book 5 W phase IGBT

F388:

Overload at IGBT W B5

Overload fault at book 5 W phase IGBT

A390:

Current Unbalance at

Phase U B1

Phase U book 1current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

Bad electric connection between the DC bus and the

power unit.

Bad electric connection between the power unit output

and the motor.

Note: In case of fast acceleration or braking, this alarm may

be indicated momentarily, disappearing after a few seconds.

This is not an indication of any anomaly in the inverter.

If this alarm persists when the motor is operating at a

constant speed, it is an indication of an anomaly in the

current distribution among the power units.

A391:

Current Unbalance at

Phase V B1

Phase V book 1current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A392:

Current Unbalance at

Phase W B1

Phase W book 1current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A393:

Current Unbalance at

Phase U B2

Phase U book 2 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A394:

Current Unbalance at

Phase V B2

Phase V book 2 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A395:

Current Unbalance at

Phase W B2

Phase W book 2 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-33

Fault/Alarm Description Possible Causes

A396:

Current Unbalance at

Phase U B3

Phase U book 3 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

Bad electric connection between the DC bus and the

power unit.

Bad electric connection between the power unit output

and the motor.

Note: In case of fast acceleration or braking, this alarm may

be indicated momentarily, disappearing after a few seconds.

This is not an indication of any anomaly in the inverter.

If this alarm persists when the motor is operating at a

constant speed, it is an indication of an anomaly in the

current distribution among the power units.

A397:

Current Unbalance at

Phase V B3

Phase V book 3 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A398:

Current Unbalance at

Phase W B3

Phase W book 3 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A399:

Current Unbalance at

Phase U B4

Phase U book 4 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A400:

Current Unbalance at

Phase V B4

Phase V book 4 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A401:

Current Unbalance at

Phase W B4

Phase W book 4 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A402:

Current Unbalance at

Phase U B5

Phase U book 5 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A403:

Current Unbalance at

Phase V B5

Phase V book 5 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

A404:

Current Unbalance at

Phase W B5

Phase W book 5 current unbalance alarm.

It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current

distribution between this phase and the smallest

current of the same phase in other book, only when

the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its

nominal value.

F406:

Overtemperature at the

Braking Module

These faults/alarms are associated to the

configuration of the parameters P0832 and P0833.

- Function of the DIM1 input.

- Function of the DIM2 input.

Overtemperature (rectifier/braking).

Failure in the connection between the digital input and

the sensor.

Failure of the corresponding sensor.

Failure in the device being monitored by the sensor.

F408:

Failure in the Cooling

System

F410:

External Fault

F412:

Overtemperature at the

Rectifier

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0-34

0Fault/Alarm Description Possible Causes

A700

Detached HMI

Refer to the SoftPLC Manual

F701

Detached HMI

A702

Inverter Disabled

A704

Two Movements Enabled

A706

Not Programmed

Reference SoftPLC

Note:

(1) Long motor cables (with more than 100 meters) will have a high leakage capacitance to the ground. The

circulation of leakage currents through these capacitances may activate the ground fault protection after

the inverter is enabled, and consequently, the occurrence of fault F074.

POSSIBLE SOLUTION:

- Decrease the carrier frequency (P0297).

(2) In case of F030 (Arm U Fault), F034 (Arm V Fault) and F038 (Arm W Fault) faults, there is an indication at

the IPS1 board that signalizes which of the power units is presenting the fault. The indication is done through

LEDs that remain on when the fault occurs. When a reset is performed, the LED that indicates the fault goes

off (refer to the figure 0.1).

Figure 0.1 - LEDs that indicates the fault

Safety Notices

1-1

SAFETY NOTICES

This Manual contains the information necessary for the correct use of the CFW-11 Frequency Inverter.

It has been developed to be used by qualified personnel with suitable training or technical qualification for

operating this type of equipment.

1.1 SAFETY NOTICES IN THIS MANUAL

The following safety notices are used in this manual:

DANGER!

The nonobservance of the procedures recommended in this warning can lead to death, serious

injuries or considerable material damage.

ATTENTION!

The nonobservance of the procedures recommended in this warning can lead to material damage.

NOTE!

The text intents to supply important information for the correct understanding and good operation

of the product.

1.2 SAFETY NOTICES ON THE PRODUCT

The following symbols are attached to the product, serving as safety notices:

High voltages are present.

Components sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

Do not touch them.

Mandatory connection to the protective earth (PE).

Connection of the shield to the ground.

Hot surface.

Safety Notices

1-2

1.3 PRELIMINARY RECOMMENDATIONS

DANGER!

Only qualified personnel familiar with the CFW-11 Frequency Inverter and associated equipment

should plan or implement the installation, start-up and subsequent maintenance of this equipment

These personnel must follow all the safety instructions included in this Manual and/or defined by

local regulations.

Failure to comply with these instructions may result in life threatening and/or equipment damage.

NOTE!

For the purposes of this manual, qualified personnel are those trained to be able to:

1. Install, ground, energize and operate the CFW-11 according to this manual and the effective

legal safety procedures;

2. Use protection equipment according to the established standards;

3. Give first aid services.

DANGER!

Always disconnect the input power before touching any electrical component associated to the

inverter.

Many components can remain charged with high voltages or remain in movement (fans) even after

that AC power is disconnected or switched off.

Wait at least 10 minutes to assure a total discharge of the capacitors.

Always connect the equipment frame to the protection earth (PE) at the suitable connection point.

ATTENTION!

Electronic boards have components sensitive to electrostatic discharges. Do not touch directly on

components or connectors. If necessary, touch the grounded metallic frame before or use an adequate

grounded wrist strap.

Do not perform any high pot tests with the inverter!

If it is necessary consult WEG.

NOTE!

Frequency Inverter may interfere with other electronic equipment. In order to reduce these effects,

take the precautions recommended in the chapter 3 - Installation and Connections, of the User

Manual.

NOTE!

Read the User Manual completely before installing or operating the inverter.

General Information

2-1

GENERAL INFORMATION

2.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual presents the necessary information for the configuration of all of the functions and parameters of

the CFW-11 Frequency Inverter. This manual must be used together with the CFW-11 User Manual.

The text intents to supply additional information to facilitate the use and programming of the CFW-11 in

specific applications.

2.2 TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS

2.2.1 Terms and Definitions Used in the Manual

Normal Duty Cycle (ND): It is the inverter operation regimen that defines the maximum current value for

continuous operation I nom-ND and overload of 110 % during 1 minute. It is selected by programming P0298

(Application)=0 (Normal Duty – ND). It must be used for driving motors that are not subject in that application

to high torques in relation to their rated torque, when operating in permanent regimen, during start, acceleration

or deceleration.

I nom-ND: Inverter rated current for use with normal overload regimen (ND=Normal Duty).

Overload: 1.1 x I nom-ND / 1 minute.

Heavy Duty Cycle (HD): It is the inverter operation regimen that defines the maximum current value for

continuous operation I nom-HD and overload of 150 % during 1 minute. It is selected by programming P0298

(Application)=1 (Heavy Duty (HD)). It must be used for driving motors that are subject in that application to high

overload torques in relation to their rated torque, when operating in constant speed, during start, acceleration

or deceleration.

I nom-HD: Inverter rated current for use with heavy overload regimen (HD=Heavy Duty).

Overload: 1.5 x I nom-HD / 1 minute.

Rectifier: The input circuit of the inverters that converts the input AC voltage into DC. It is formed by power

diodes.

Pre-charge Circuit: It charges the DC Link capacitors with a limited current, thus avoiding current peaks when

powering the inverter.

DC Link: This is the inverter intermediate circuit, with DC voltage and current, obtained from the rectification

of the AC supply voltage, or from an external source; it supplies the output IGBTs inverter bridge.

U, V and W Arm: It is a set of two IGBTs of the phases U, V and W at the inverter output.

IGBT: “Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor”; It is the basic component of the output inverter bridge. It operates

like an electronic switch in the saturated (closed switch) and cut (open switch) modes.

2-2

General Information

Braking IGBT: Operates as a switch for the activation of the braking resistor. It is commanded by the DC Link

level.

PTC: It’s a resistor whose resistance value in ohms increases proportionally to the increase of the temperature;

it is used as a temperature sensor in motors.

NTC: It’s a resistor whose resistance value in ohms decreases proportionally to the temperature increase; it is

used as a temperature sensor in power modules.

Keypad (HMI): Human-Machine Interface; It is the device that allows the control of the motor, the visualization

and the modification of the inverter parameters. It presents keys for commanding the motor, navigation keys

and a graphic LCD display.

MMF (Flash Memory Module): It is the nonvolatile memory that can be electrically written and erased.

RAM Memory: Random Access Memory (volatile).

USB: “Universal Serial Bus”; it is a type of connection in the perspective of the “Plug and Play” concept.

PE: “Protective Earth”.

RFI Filter: “Radio Frequency Interference Filter”. It is a filter that avoids interference in the radiofrequency

range.

PWM: “Pulse Width Modulation”. It is a pulsing voltage that supplies the motor.

Switching Frequency: It is the inverter bridge IGBTs commutation frequency, specified normally in kHz.

General Enable: When activated, it accelerates the motor with the acceleration ramp provided Run/Stop=Run.

When deactivated, the PWM pulses are immediately blocked. It can be commanded through digital input

programmed for that function or via serial.

Run/Stop: Inverter function that when activated (Run) accelerates the motor with the acceleration ramp until

reaching the speed reference, and when deactivated (Stop) decelerates the motor with the deceleration ramp

down to stop. It can be commanded through digital input programmed for that function or via serial. The HMI

keys and work in a similar manner:

=Run, =Stop.

Heatsink: It is a metal part designed for dissipating the heat generated by the power semiconductors.

Amp, A: Ampere.

°C: Degrees Celsius.

AC: Alternating Current.

DC: Direct Current.

General Information

2-3

CFM: “cubic feet per minute”; it is a flow measurement unit.

hp: “Horse Power”=746 Watts (power measurement unit, normally used to indicate the mechanical power of

electric motors).

Hz: Hertz.

l/s: liters per second.

kg: kilogram=1000 gram.

kHz: kilohertz=1000 Hz.

mA: milliamp=0.001 Amp.

min: minute.

ms: millisecond=0.001 second.

Nm: Newton meter; torque measurement unit.

rms: “Root mean square”; effective value.

rpm: revolutions per minute: speed measurement unit.

s: second.

V: volt.

Ω: ohm.

2.2.2 Numerical Representation

The decimal numbers are represented by means of digits without suffix. Hexadecimal numbers are represented

with the letter “h” after the number.

2.2.3 Symbols for the Parameter Proprieties Description

RO Reading only parameter.

CFG Parameter that can be changed only with a stopped motor.

V/f Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the V/f mode: P0202=0, 1 or 2.

Adj Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the V/f adjustable mode: P0202=2.

Vector Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the vector modes with encoder or sensorless: P0202=3 or 4.

VVW Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the VVW mode: P0202=5.

Sless Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the vector sensorless mode: P0202=3.

Encoder Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the vector with encoder mode: P0202=4.

CFW-11M Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only when available in the Modular Drive.

2-4

General Information

About the CFW-11

3-1

ABOUT THE CFW-11

3.1 ABOUT THE CFW-11

The CFW-11 is a high performance Frequency Inverter that makes it possible the control of speed and torque

of three-phase AC induction motors. The principal characteristic of this product is the “Vectrue” technology,

which presents the following advantages:

Scalar Control (V/f), VVW or vector control programmable in the same product;

The Vector control can be programmed as “sensorless” (which means that standard motors, without the

need of encoder) or vector control with motor encoder;

The “sensorless” vector control allows high torque and fast response, even at very slow speeds or during

starting;

The “Optimal Braking” function for the vector control allows a controlled motor braking, eliminating in some

applications the braking resistor;

The vector control “Self-Tuning” function allows the automatic setting of the regulators and control parameters,

from the identification (also automatic) of the motor and load parameters.

About the CFW-11

3-2

Analog Inputs

(AI1 and AI2)

FLASH

Memory

Module

(Slot 5)

Digital Inputs

(DI1 to DI6)

Power supplies for electronics and for interface

between power and control

USB

POWER

CONTROL

Three-phase

rectifier

Motor

IGBT inverter

Power

Supply

 = DC link connection

= Dynamic braking resistor connection



Pre-

charge

SuperDrive G2 software

WLP software

Capacitor

Bank

RFI filter

HMI

CC11

Control

Board with

32-bit

“RISC”

CPU

Analog Outputs

(AO1 and AO2)

Digital Outputs

DO1(RL1) to

DO3 (RL3)

HMI (remote)

DC LINK Feedbacks:

- voltage

- current

COMM 2

(Anybus) (Slot 4)

COMM 1

(Slot 3 – green)

Encoder Interface

(Slot 2 – yellow)

I/O Expansion

(Slot 1 – white)

Accessories

=Human-Machine Interface

Figure 3.1 - CFW-11 block diagram

About the CFW-11

3-3

A – Mounting Supports

(for surface mounting)

B – Heatsink

C – Top cover

D – Fan with fixing support

E – COMM 2 module (Anybus)

F – Accessory board module

G – FLASH memory module

H – Front cover

I – Keypad (HMI)

Figure 3.2 - CFW-11 main components

USB connector

USB LED

Off: without USB connection

On/blinking: USB communication active

Status LED

Green: Normal operation without fault or alarm

Yellow: In the alarm condition

Blinking red: In the fault condition

Figure 3.3 - LEDs and USB connector

About the CFW-11

3-4

Keypad (HMI)

4-1

KEYPAD (HMI)

4.1 KEYPAD (HMI)

Through the keypad (HMI) it is possible to command the inverter, visualize and adjust all the parameters. It

presents a navigation manner similar to the one used in cell phones, with options to access the parameters

sequentially or by means of groups (menu).

"Left “Soft key”: Function defined by the text

directly above on the display.

1. Increases the parameter contents.

2. Increases the speed.

3. Selects the previous group of the Parameter

Group list.

Controls the motor speed direction.

Active when:

P0223=2 or 3 in LOC and /or

P0226=2 or 3 in REM.

Selects between LOCAL or REMOTE

situation.

Active when:

P0220=2 or 3.

It accelerates the motor following the acceleration ramp up to

the speed defined in P0122.

It keeps the motor at this speed as long as pressed.

When released it decelerates the motor following the

deceleration ramp down to stop.

Active when al the conditions below were fulfilled:

1. Run/Stop=Stop

2. General Enable=Active

3. P0225=1 in LOC and/or P0228=1 in REM.

Decelerates the motor following the deceleration

ramp, down to stop.

Active when:

P0224=0 in LOC or

P0227=0 in REM.

Accelerates the motor following the acceleration

ramp.

Active when:

P0224=0 in LOC or

P0227=0 in REM.

1. Decreases the parameter contents.

2. Decreases the speed.

3. Selects the next group of the Parameter

Group list.

Right “Soft key”: Function defined by the text

directly above on the display.

Figure 4.1 - HMI keys

Battery:

The battery located inside the keypad (HMI) is used to keep the clock operation while the inverter is not powered.

Its location is showed in the figure 4.2.

The life expectation of the battery is of approximately 10 years. In order to remove it rotate the cover located at

the back of the keypad (HMI). Replace the battery, when necessary, by another of the CR2032 type.

NOTE!

The battery is necessary only for clock-related functions. In the event of the battery being discharged

or not installed in the keypad (HMI), the clock time becomes incorrect and the alarm A181 – “Invalid

clock value” will be indicated every time the inverter is powered.

Keypad (HMI)

4-2

4Figure 4.2 - Keypad (HMI) back part

Installation:

The Keypad (HMI) can be installed or removed from the inverter while it is with or without power.

Cover for access to the battery

Programming Basic Instructions

5-1

PROGRAMMING BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

5.1 PARAMETER STRUCTURE

When the right “soft key” in the monitoring mode (“Menu”) is pressed, the first 4 parameter groups are showed

on the display. An example of the parameter group structure is presented in the table 5.1. The number and the

name of the groups may change depending on the used software version.

NOTE!

The inverter leaves the factory with the keypad (HMI) language, frequency (V/f 50/60 Hz mode) and

voltage adjusted according to the market.

The reset to the factory default may change the content of the parameters related to the frequency

(50 Hz/60 Hz). In the detailed description, some parameters present values in parentheses, which

must be adjusted in the inverter for using the 50 Hz frequency.

Table 5.1 - CFW-11 parameter groups structure

Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Monitoring 00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS 20 Ramps

21 Speed References

22 Speed Limits

23 V/f Control

24 Adjust. V/f Curve

25 VVW Control

26 V/f Current Limit.

27 V/f DC Volt.Limit.

28 Dynamic Braking

Vector Control 90 Speed Regulator

91 Current Regulator

92 Flux Regulator

93 I/F Control

94 Self-Tuning

95 Torque Curr.Limit.

96 DC Link Regulator

30 HMI

31 Local Command

32 Remote Command

33 3-Wire Command

34 FWD/REV Run Comm.

35 Zero Speed Logic

36 Multispeed

37 Electr. Potentiom.

38 Analog Inputs

39 Analog Outputs

40 Digital Inputs

41 Digital Outputs

42 Inverter Data

43 Motor Data

44 FlyStart/RideThru

45 Protections

46 PID Regulator

47 DC Braking

48 Skip Speed

Communication 110 Local/Rem Config.

111 Status/Commands

112 CANopen/DeviceNet

113 Serial RS232/485

114 Anybus

115 Profibus DP

50 SoftPLC

51 PLC

52 Trace Function

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

04 BASIC APPLICATION

05 SELF-TUNING

06 BACKUP PARAMETERS

I/O CONFIGURATION 38 Analog Inputs

39 Analog Outputs

40 Digital Inputs

41 Digital Outputs

08 FAULT HISTORY

09 READ ONLY PARAMS.

Programming Basic Instructions

5-2

5.2 GROUPS ACCESSED IN THE OPTION MENU IN THE MONITORING MODE

In the monitoring mode access the groups of the option “Menu” by pressing the right "soft key".

Table 5.2 - Parameter groups accessed in the option menu of the monitoring mode

Group Contained parameters or groups

00 ALL PARAMETERS All the parameters

01 PARAMETER GROUPS Access to groups divided by functions

02 ORIENTED START-UP Parameter for entering the “Oriented Start-up” mode

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS Only parameters whose contents are different from the factory settings

04 BASIC APPLICATION Parameters for simple applications: ramps, minimum and maximum speed, maximum current and

torque boost. Presented in details in the CFW-11 User Manual at section 5.2.3

05 SELF-TUNING Access parameter (P0408) and estimated parameters

06 BACKUP PARAMETERS Parameters related to functions of parameter copy via FLASH Memory Module, keypad (HMI) and

software update

07 I/O CONFIGURATION Groups related to digital and analog, inputs and outputs

08 FAULT HISTORY Parameters with information on the 10 last faults

09 READ ONLY PARAMS. Parameters used only for reading

5.3 PASSWORD SETTING IN P0000

In order to be able to change the content of the parameters, it is necessary to set correctly the password in

P0000, as indicated below. Otherwise the content of the parameters can only be visualized.

It is possible to customize the password by means of P0200. Refer to the description of this parameter in the

section 5.4 of this manual.

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- Monitoring Mode.

- Press “ Menu”

(right "soft key").

Ready LOC 0rpm

15:45 Menu

0 rpm

0.0 A

0.0 Hz

- The group “00 ALL

PARAMETERS” is already

selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 15:45 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The parameter

“Access to Parameters

P0000: 0” is already

selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 15:45 Select

Access to Parameters

P0000: 0

Speed Reference

P0001: 90 rpm

- In order to set the

password, press

until the number 5 appears

on the display.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 15:45 Save

P0000

Access to Parameters

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

-When the number 5

appears, press “Save”. Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 15:45 Save

P0000

Access to Parameters

- If the setting was

performed correctly, the

display must show “Access

to Parameters

P0000: 5”.

- Press “Return”

(left "soft key").

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 15:45 Select

Access to Parameters

P0000: 5

Speed Reference

P0001: 90 rpm

- Press “Return". Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 15:45 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The display returns to the

Monitoring Mode. Ready LOC 0rpm

15:45 Menu

0 rpm

0.0 A

0.0 Hz

Figure 5.1 - Sequence for allowing parameter changes via P0000

Programming Basic Instructions

5-3

5.4 HMI [30]

In the group “30 HMI” are the parameters related to the presentation of information on the keypad (HMI)

display. See next the detailed description of the possible settings for those parameters.

P0193 – Day of the Week

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Sunday

1 = Monday

2 = Tuesday

3 = Wednesday

4 = Thursday

5 = Friday

6 = Saturday

Factory

Setting:

P0194 – Day

Adjustable

Range:

1 to 31 Factory

Setting:

P0195 – Month

Adjustable

Range:

1 to 12 Factory

Setting:

P0196 – Year

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 99 Factory

Setting:

P0197 – Hour

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 23 Factory

Setting:

P0198 – Minutes

P0199 – Seconds

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 59 Factory

Setting:

P0198=0

P0199=0

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

30 HMI

Description:

Those parameters set the date and time of the CFW-11 real time clock. It is important to configure them with the

correct date and time so that the fault and alarm record occurs with actual date and time information.

Programming Basic Instructions

5-4

P0200 – Password

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Change Password

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

30 HMI

Description:

It allows changing the password and/or setting its status, configuring it as active or inactive. For more details on

each option, refer to the table 5.3 described next.

Table 5.3 - Options for the parameter P0000

P0200 Kind of Action

0 (Inactive) It allows parameter changes regardless of P0000

1 (Active) It does only allow parameter changes when the content of P0000 is equal

to the password

2 (Changed Password) It opens a window for changing the password

When the option 2 is selected (Change password), the inverter opens a window for changing the password, allowing

the selection of a new value for it.

P0201 – Language

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Português

1 = English

2 = Español

3 = Deutsch

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

30 HMI

Description:

It determines the language in which information will be presented on the keypad (HMI).

P0205 – Reading Parameter Selection 1

P0206 – Reading Parameter Selection 2

P0207 – Reading Parameter Selection 3

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Not selected

1 = Speed Reference #

2 = Motor Speed #

3 = Motor Current #

4 = DC Link Voltage #

5 = Motor Frequency #

6 = Motor Voltage #

7 = Motor Torque #

8 = Output Power #

Factory

Setting:

P0205=2

P0206=3

P0207=5

Programming Basic Instructions

5-5

9 = Process Variable #

10 = Setpoint PID #

11 = Speed Reference -

12 = Motor Speed -

13 = Motor Current -

14 = DC Link Voltage -

15 = Motor Frequency -

16 = Motor Voltage -

17 = Motor Torque -

18 = Output Power -

19 = Process Variable -

20 = Setpoint PID -

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

30 HMI

Description:

Those parameters define which variables, and in what manner they will be shown on the keypad (HMI) display in

the monitoring mode.

The options that present the symbol “#” at the end indicate that the variable will be displayed in absolute numerical

values. The options ended with the symbol “–“, configure the variable to be displayed as a bar graph, in percentage

values. More details on this programming can be seen in the section 5.6 next.

P0208 – Reference Scale Factor

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 Factory

Setting:

1800

(1500)

P0212 – Reference Decimal Point

Adjustable

Range:

0 = wxyz

1 = wxy.z

2 = wx.yz

3 = w.xyz

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

30 HMI

Description:

They define how the Speed Reference (P0001) and the Motor Speed (P0002) will be presented when the motor runs

at the synchronous speed.

In order to indicate the value in rpm, P0208 must be adjusted at the motor synchronous speed according to the

next table:

Table 5.4 - Synchronous speed reference in rpm

Frequency Number of Motor Poles Synchronous Speed in rpm

50Hz

2 3000

4 1500

6 1000

8 750

60Hz

2 3600

4 1800

6 1200

8 900

Programming Basic Instructions

5-6

In order to indicate values in other units, use the following formulas:

P0002 = Speed x P0208

Synchronous Speed x (10)P0212

P0001 = Reference x P0208

Synchronous Speed x (10)P0212

Where,

Reference = Speed reference, in rpm;

Speed = Actual speed, in rpm;

Synchronous Speed = 120 x Motor Rated Frequency (P0403)/Nr. of Poles;

Nr. of Poles = 120 x P0403/ Motor Rated Speed (P0402), and can be equal to 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10.

Example:

If Speed = Synchronous Speed = 1800,

P0208 = 900,

P0212 = 1 (wxy.z), then

P0002 = 1800 x 900 = 90.0

1800 x (10)1

P0209 – Reference Engineering Unit 1

P0210 – Reference Engineering Unit 2

P0211 – Reference Engineering Unit 3

Adjustable

Range:

32 to 127 Factory

Setting:

P0209=114 (r)

P0210=112 (p)

P0211=109 (m)

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

30 HMI

Description:

Those parameters are used to adjust the unit of the variable one wants to indicate at parameters P0001 and P0002.

The characters “rpm” can be replaced by those wanted by the user, for instance, L/s (length/second), CFM (cubic

feet per minute), etc.

The reference engineering unit is composed by 3 characters: P0209 defines the leftmost, P0210 the center and

P0211 the rightmost character.

The available characters correspond to the ASCII code from 32 to 127.

Programming Basic Instructions

5-7

Examples:

A, B, ..., Y, Z, a, b, ..., y, z, 0, 1, ..., 9, #, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...

- To indicate “L/s”: - To indicate “CFM”:

P0209=”L” (76) P0209=”C” (67)

P0210=”/” (47) P0210=”F” (70)

P0211=”s” (115) P0211=”M” (77)

P0213 – Full Scale Reading Parameter 1

P0214 – Full Scale Reading Parameter 2

P0215 – Full Scale Reading Parameter 3

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 200.0 % Factory

Setting:

100.0 %

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

30 HMI

Description:

Those parameters configure the full scale of the reading variables 1, 2 and 3 (selected through P0205, P0206 and

P0207), when they were programmed to be presented as bar graphs.

P0216 – HMI Display Contrast

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 37 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

30 HMI

Description:

It allows setting the keypad (HMI) display contrast level. Higher values configure a higher contrast level.

Programming Basic Instructions

5-8

5.5 DATE AND TIME SETTING

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- Monitoring Mode.

- Press “Menu”

(right "soft key").

Ready LOC 0rpm

16:10 Menu

0 rpm

0.0 A

0.0 Hz

- The group “00 ALL

PARAMETERS” is already

selected.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The group “01

PARAMETER GROUPS” is

selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- A new list of groups is

showed on the display, with

the group “20 Ramps”

selected.

- Press until

the group “30 HMI” is

selected.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

20 Ramps

21 Speed References

22 Speed Limits

23 V/f Control

- The group “30 HMI” is

selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

27 V/f DC Volt.Limit.

28 Dynamic Braking

29 Vector Control

30 HMI

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- The parameter “Day

P0194” is already selected.

- If necessary, set P0194

according to the actual day.

Therefore, press “Select”.

- For changing P0194

contents or

- Proceed in the same way

for adjusting the parameters

from “Month P0195” to

“Seconds P0199”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

Day

P0194: 06

Month

P0195: 10

- When P0199 is finished,

the Real Time Clock will be

adjusted.

- Press “Return”

(left "soft key").

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 18:11 Select

Minutes

P0198: 11

Seconds

P0199: 34

- Press “Return”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 18:11 Select

27 V/f DC Volt.Limit.

28 Dynamic Braking

29 Vector Control

30 HMI

- Press “Return”. Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 18:11 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The display returns to the

Monitoring Mode. Ready LOC 0rpm

18:11 Menu

0 rpm

0.0 A

0.0 Hz

Figure 5.2 - Date and time adjustment

Programming Basic Instructions

5-9

5.6 DISPLAY INDICATIONS IN THE MONITORING MODE SETTINGS

Every time the inverter is powered the display goes to the Monitoring Mode. In order to make it easier the

reading of the motor main parameters, the keypad (HMI) display can be configured to show them in 3

different modes.

Content of the 3 parameters in numerical form:

Selection of the parameters via P0205, P0206 and P0207. That mode can be seen in the figure 5.3.

Run LOC 1800rpm

12:35 Menu

1800 rpm

1.0 A

60.0 Hz

Inverter status:

- Run

- Ready

- Configuration

- Self tuning

- Last fault: FXXX

- Last alarm: AXXX

- etc.

Motor speed direction

indication.

Loc./Rem. indication

- LOC: Local situation;

- REM: Remote situation. Motor speed indication

in rpm.

Monitoring parameters:

- Motor speed in rpm;

- Motor current in Amps;

- Output frequency in Hz (default).

P0205, P0206 and P0207: selection of the

parameters to be shown in the Monitoring Mode.

P0208 to P0212: Engineering unit for the speed

indication.

Right "soft key" function.

Indication of the time.

Adjusted in:

P0197, P0198 and P0199.

Left "soft key" function.

Figure 5.3 - Monitoring Mode screen at the factory setting

Content of the 3 parameters in form of a bar graph:

Selection of the parameters via P0205, P0206 and/or P0207. The values are showed in percentage by means

of horizontal bars. This mode is illustrated in the figure 5.4.

Run LOC 1800rpm

12:35 Menu

rpm

Monitoring parameters:

- Motor speed in rpm;

- Motor current in Amps;

- Output frequency in Hz (default).

P0205, P0206 and P0207: selection of the parameters

to be shown in the Monitoring Mode.

P0208 to P0212: Engineering unit for the speed

indication.

100%

10%

100%

Figure 5.4 - Monitoring Mode screen with bar graphs

In order to configure the bar graph monitoring mode, access the parameters P0205, P0206 and/or P0207

and select the options ended with the symbol “–“ (values in the range from 11 to 20). Thus, the respective

variable is configured to be shown as a bar graph.

The figure 5.5, presented next, illustrates the procedure for the modification of the display of one variable

to the graph mode.

Programming Basic Instructions

5-10

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- Monitoring Mode.

- Press “Menu”

(right "soft key").

Ready LOC 0rpm

16:10 Menu

0 rpm

0.0 A

0.0 Hz

- The group “00 ALL

PARAMETERS” is already

selected .

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The group “01

PARAMETER GROUPS” is

selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- A new list of groups is

showed on the display,

with the group “20

Ramps” selected.

- Press until

the group “30 HMI” is

selected.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

20 Ramps

21 Speed References

22 Speed Limits

23 V/f Control

- The group “30 HMI” is

selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

27 V/f DC Volt. Limit.

28 Dynamic Braking

29 Vector Control

30 HMI

- The parameter “Day

P0194” is already

selected.

- Press

until selecting “Read

Parameter Sel. 1

P0205".

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

Day

P0194: 06

Month

P0195: 10

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- The “Read Parameter

Sel. 1 P0205" is selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

Language

P0201 : English

Read Parameter Sel. 1

P0205 : Motor Speed #

- Press until

selecting the option “ [11]

Speed Refer. – “.

- Press “Save”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Save

P0205

Read Parameter Sel. 1

[011] Speed Refer. -

9- Press “Return”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

Language

P0201 : English

Read Parameter Sel. 1

P0205 : Speed Refer. -

10 - Press “Return”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 16:10 Select

27 V/f DC Volt. Limit.

28 Dynamic Braking

29 Vector Control

30 HMI

11 - Press “Return”.

Return 16:10 Select

Ready LOC 0rpm

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The display returns to the

Monitoring Mode with the

speed indicated by a bar

graph.

Ready LOC 0rpm

16:10 Menu

rpm 5%

0.0 A

0.0 Hz

Figure 5.5 - Monitoring with bar graph configuration

In order to return to the standard Monitoring Mode (numerical), you only have to select the options ended with

“#” (values from 1 to 10) in the parameters P0205, P0206 and/or P0207.

Content of the parameter P0205 in numerical form with bigger characters:

Program the reading parameters (P0206 and P0207) in zero (inactive) and P0205 as numerical value (one

option ended with “#”). Thus, P0205 starts being displayed in bigger characters. The figure 5.6 illustrates this

monitoring mode.

Run LOC 1800rpm

11:23 Menu

Content of the parameter P0205, with bigger characters.

The other parameters must be programmed in 0, at

P0206 and P0207.

rpm

1800

Figure 5.6 - Example of the screen in the Monitoring Mode with P0205 programmed with bigger characters

Programming Basic Instructions

5-11

5.7 INCOMPATIBILITY BETWEEN PARAMETERS

If any of the combinations listed below occur, the CFW-11 goes to the “Config” state.

1) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (4=FWD Run);

2) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (5=REV Run);

3) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (6=3-Wire Start);

4) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (7=3-Wire Stop);

5) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (8=FWD/REV);

6) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (9=LOC/REM);

7) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (11=Increase E.P.);

8) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (12=Decrease E.P.);

9) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (14=Ramp 2);

10) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (15=Speed/Torque);

11) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (22=Manual/Automatic);

12) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (24=Disable Flying Start);

13) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (25=DC Link Regulator);

14) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (26=Programming Off);

15) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (27=Load User 1/2);

16) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (28=Load User 3);

17) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (29=DO2 Timer);

18) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (30=DO3 Timer);

19) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (4=FWD Run) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for

(5=REV Run);

20) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (5=REV Run) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for

(4=FWD Run);

21) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (6=3-Wire Start) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for

(7=3-Wire Stop);

22) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (7=3-Wire Stop) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for

(6=3-Wire Start);

23) P0221 or P0222 programmed for (8=Multispeed) without DIx (P0266...P0268) programmed for

(13=Multispeed);

24) P0221 or P0222 not programmed for (8=Multispeed) with DIx (P0266...P0268) programmed for

(13=Multispeed);

Programming Basic Instructions

5-12

25) [P0221 or P0222 programmed for (7=E.P.)] AND [without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for

(11=Increase E.P.) OR without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (12=Decrease E.P.)];

26) [P0221 and P0222 not programmed for (7=E.P.)] AND [with DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for

(11=Increase E.P.) OR with DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (12=Decrease E.P.)];

27) [P0202 programmed for (0=V/f 60Hz) OR (1=V/f 50Hz) OR (2=Adjustable V/f) OR (5=VVW)] AND

[P0231=1(No Ramp Ref.) OR P0231=2 (Max.Torque Cur) OR P0236=1 (No Ramp Ref.) OR P0236=2

(Max.Torque Cur) OR P0241=1 (No Ramp Ref.) OR P0241=2 (Max.Torque Cur) OR P0246=1 (No Ramp

Ref.) OR P0246=2 (Max.Torque Cur)];

28) [P0202 programmed for (0=V/f 60Hz) OR (1=V/f 50Hz) OR (2=Adjustable V/f) OR (5=VVW)] AND [DIx

(P0263...P0270) programmed for (16=JOG+) OR (17=JOG-);

29) P0203 programmed for (1=PID Regulator) AND P0217 for (1=On) AND [P0224 programmed for

(0= , Keys) OR P0227 programmed for (0= , Keys)];

30) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (29=DO2 Timer) without DO2 (P0276) programmed for

(29=Timer);

31) DO2 (P0276) programmed for (29=Timer) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (29=DO2

Timer);

32) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (30=DO3 Timer) without DO3 (P0277) programmed for

(29=Timer);

33) DO3 (P0277) programmed for (29=Timer) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (30=DO3

Timer);

34) [P0224 programmed for (1=DIx) OR P0227 programmed for (1=DIx)] AND [without DIx (P0263...P0270)

programmed for (1=Run/Stop) AND without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (2=General Enable)

AND without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (3=Fast Stop) AND without DIx (P0263...P0270)

programmed for (4=FWD Run) AND without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (5=REV Run) AND

without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (6=3-Wire Start) AND without (P0263...P0270) programmed

for (7=3-Wire Stop)].

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

6-1

INVERTER MODEL AND ACCESSORIES IDENTIFICATION

In order to identify the model of the inverter, verify the code existent on the product identification labels: the

complete one, located at the side of the inverter, or the abbreviated one, under the keypad (HMI). The figures

below show examples of those labels.

Output rated data (voltage, number of phases,

rated currents for normal overload regimen

(ND) and heavy overload regimen (HD), over-

load currents for 1 min and 3 s, and frequency

range)

Input rated data ( voltage, number of phases,

rated currents for operation with ND) and HD

overload regimens, and frequency)

Maximum environment temperature

Software Version

Current specifications for operation with

heavy overload regimen (HD)

Current specifications for operation with

normal overload regimen (ND)

Manufacturing date

CFW11 model Serial Number

WEG part number

Inverter net weight

a) Identification label at the side of the inverter for the models in cabinet (CFW-11)

Output rated data (voltage, number of phases,

rated currents for normal overload regimen

(ND) and heavy overload regimen (HD), over-

load currents for 1 min and 3 s, and frequency

range)

Maximum environment temperature

Manufacturing date

Serial Number

Input rated data ( voltage, number of phases,

rated currents for operation with ND) and HD

overload regimens, and frequency)

Current specifications for operation with

heavy overload regimen (HD)

Current specifications for operation with

normal overload regimen (ND)

CFW11M model

WEG part number

Software Version

b) CFW-11M identification label which is attached inside the panel where the inverter is installed

CFW110016T2SZ

12345678

SERIAL#:

99/99/9999

1234567980

WEG part number

CFW11 model

Serial number

Manufacturing date

c) Identification label under the keypad (HMI)

Figure 6.1 - Identification labels

Once the inverter model identification code is verified, one must interpret it in order to understand its meaning.

Refer to the table present in the section 2.4 of the CFW-11 User Manual and in the section 2.6 of the CFW-11M

User Manual.

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

6-2

6.1 INVERTER DATA [42]

In this group are the parameters related to the inverter information and characteristics, such as inverter model,

accessories identified by the control circuit, software version, switching frequency, etc.

P0023 – Software Version

Adjustable

Range:

0.00 to 655.35 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

42 Inverter Data

Description:

It indicates the software version contained in the FLASH memory of the microcontroller located on the control board.

P0027 – Accessories Configuration 1

P0028 – Accessories Configuration 2

Adjustable

Range:

0000h to FFFFh Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

42 Inverter Data

Description:

Those parameters identify by means of a hexadecimal code the accessories that were found installed on the control

module.

For the accessories installed in the slots 1 and 2 the identification code is informed at the parameter P0027. In case

of modules connected in the slots 3, 4 or 5, the code will be shown through the parameter P0028.

The next table shows the codes shown in those parameters, regarding the main CFW-11 accessories.

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

6-3

Table 6.1 - CFW-11 accessory identification codes

Name Description Slot Identification Code

P0027 P0028

IOA-01 Module with 2 14-bit analog inputs, 2 digital inputs, 2 14-bit analog

outputs in voltage or current, 2 open collector digital outputs 1 FD-- ----

IOB-01 Module with 2 isolated analog inputs, 2 digital inputs, 2 isolated analog

outputs in voltage or current, 2 open collector digital outputs 1 FA-- ----

ENC-01 Incremental encoder module 5 to 12 Vdc, 100 kHz, with encoder signal

repeater 2 --C2 ----

ENC-02 Incremental encoder module 5 to 12 Vdc, 100 kHz 2 --C2 ----

RS-485-01 RS-485 serial communication module 3 ---- CE--

RS-232-01 RS-232C serial communication module 3 ---- CC--

RS-232-02 RS-232C serial communication module with keys for programming the

microcontroller FLASH memory 3 ---- CC--

CAN/RS-485-01 CAN and RS-485 interface module 3 ---- CA--

CAN-01 CAN interface module 3 ---- CD--

PLC11-01 PLC module 1, 2 and 3 ---- ----(1)

PROFIBUS DP-05 Profibus-DP interface module 4 ---- ----(3)

DEVICENET-05 DeviceNet interface module 4 ---- ----(3)

ETHERNET IP-05 Ethernet interface module 4 ---- ----(3)

RS-232-05 RS-232 interface module 4 ---- ----(3)

RS-485-05 RS-485 interface module 4 ---- ----(3)

MMF-01 FLASH Memory Module 5 ---- ----(2)

For Anybus-CC communication modules (slot 4), PLC11 module and for the FLASH memory module, the P028

identification code will depend on the combination of these accessories, as presented in the next table.

Table 6.2 - Formation of the two first codes for P0028 parameter

Bits

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PLC module

FLASH Memory Module

Anybus-CC modules

01 = Active Module

10 = Passive Module

0 0 0 0

2nd Hexadecimal Code 1st Hexadecimal Code

(1) Bit 7: indicates the presence of the PLC module (0=without PLC module, 1=with PLC module).

(2) Bit 6: indicates the presence of the FLASH memory module (0=without memory module, 1=with memory

module).

(3) Bits 5 and 4: indicate the presence of Anybus-CC modules, as follows.

Table 6.3 - Module types

Bits

5 4 Type of Module Name

0 1 Active PROFIBUS DP-05, DEVICENET-05, ETHERNET IP-05

1 0 Passive RS-232-05, RS-485-05

Bits 3, 2, 1 and 0 are fixed in 0000, and form always the code “0” in hexadecimal.

Example: For An inverter equipped with the IOA-01, ENC-02, RS-485-01, PROFIBUS DP-05 modules, and the FLASH

memory module, the hexadecimal code presented in the parameters P0027 and P0028 is respectively FDC2 and

CE50 (table 6.4).

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

6-4

Table 6.4 - Example of the two first characters of the code showed in P0028 for

PROFIBUS DP-05 and FLASH memory module

76543210

01010000

5 0

P0029 – Power Hardware Configuration

Adjustable

Range:

Bit 0 to 5 = Rated Current

Bit 6 and 7 = Rated Voltage

Bit 8 = EMC Filter

Bit 9 = Safety Relay

Bit 10 = (0)24V/(1)DC Link

Bit 11 = (0)RST/(1)DC Link

Bit 12 = Dyn.Brak. IGBT

Bit 13 = Special

Bit 14 and 15 = Reserved

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

42 Inverter Data

Description:

In a similar way than parameters P0027 and P0028, the parameter P0029 identifies the inverter model and the

present accessories. The codification is formed by the combination of binary digits, and presented in the keypad

(HMI) in hexadecimal format.

The bits that compose the code are explained in the next table.

Table 6.5 - Parameter P0029 code constitution

Bits

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

110

With

braking

IGBT

with 24V supply

with safety relay

with RFI filter

Voltage

00 = 200...240 V

01 = 380...480 V

Current

4th Hexadecimal Code 3rd Hexadecimal Code 2nd Hexadecimal Code 1st Hexadecimal Code

Bits 15, 14 and 13: are fixed in 110;

Bit 12: it indicates the presence of the dynamic braking IGBT (0 = with braking IGBT, 1 = without braking IGBT);

Bit 11: always 0;

Bit 10: indicates if the inverter has the DC/DC converter for receiving external 24 V electronics power supply

(0=with DC/DC converter, 1=without DC/DC 24 V converter);

Bit 9: indicates the presence of the safety relay (0=without safety relay, 1=with safety relay);

Bit 8: indicates if the inverter is equipped with RFI suppressor filter (0=without RFI filter, 1=with RFI filter);

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

6-5

Bits 7 and 6: indicate the inverter power supply voltage (00=200...240 V, 01=380/480 V);

Bits 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 and 0: together with the voltage indication bits (7 and 6), they indicate the inverter rated current

(ND). The next table presents the combinations available for those bits.

Table 6.6 - Current codification for the parameter P0029

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

200 V...240 V

0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 2 A*

380 V...480 V

0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 3.6 A

0 0 0 0 0 1 6 A* 0 0 0 0 0 1 5 A

0 0 0 0 1 0 7 A* 0 0 0 0 1 0 7 A

0 0 0 0 1 1 10 A* 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 A

0 0 0 1 0 0 7 A 0 0 0 1 0 1 13.5 A

0 0 0 1 0 1 10 A 0 0 1 0 0 0 17 A

0 0 0 1 1 0 13 A 0 0 0 1 1 0 24 A

0 0 0 1 1 1 16 A 0 0 0 1 1 1 31 A

0 0 1 0 0 0 24 A 0 0 0 0 1 1 38 A

0 0 1 0 0 1 28 A 0 0 1 0 1 0 45 A

0 0 1 0 1 0 33.5 A 0 0 1 0 1 1 58.5 A

0 0 1 1 0 0 45 A 0 0 1 1 0 0 70.5 A

0 0 1 1 0 1 54 A 0 0 1 1 0 1 88 A

0 0 1 1 1 0 70 A

0 1 0 0 0 0 86 A

0 1 0 0 0 1 105 A

* Models with single-phase/three-phase power supply.

Example: For a 10 V, 380...480 V CFW-11, with RFI suppressor filter, without safety relay and without external 24 V

supply, the hexadecimal code presented in the keypad (HMI) for the parameter P0029 is C544 (refer to the table

6.7).

Table 6.7 - Example of the code at P0029 for a specific inverter model

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

C 5 4 4

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

6-6

P0295 – ND/HD VFD Rated Current

Adjustable

Range:

0 = 3.6 A / 3.6 A

1 = 5 A / 5 A

2 = 6 A / 5 A

3 = 7 A / 5.5 A

4 = 7 A / 7 A

5 = 10 A / 8 A

6 = 10 A / 10 A

7 = 13 A / 11 A

8 = 13.5 A / 11 A

9 = 16 A / 13 A

10 = 17 A / 13.5 A

11 = 24 A / 19 A

12 = 24 A / 20 A

13 = 28 A / 24 A

14 = 31 A / 25 A

15 = 33.5 A / 28 A

16 = 38 A / 33 A

17 = 45 A / 36 A

18 = 45 A / 38 A

19 = 54 A / 45 A

20 = 58.5 A / 47 A

21 = 70 A / 56 A

22 = 70.5 A / 61 A

23 = 86 A / 70 A

24 = 88 A / 73 A

25 = 105 A / 86 A

26 = 427 A / 340 A

27 = 470 A / 418 A

28 = 811 A / 646 A

29 = 893 A / 794 A

30 = 1217 A / 969 A

31 = 1340 A / 1191 A

32 = 1622 A / 1292 A

33 = 1786 A / 1600 A

34 = 2028 A / 1615 A

35 = 2232 A / 1985 A

36 = 2 A / 2 A

37 = 527 A / 527 A

38 = 1000 A / 1000 A

39 = 1500 A / 1500 A

40 = 2000 A / 2000 A

41 = 2500 A / 2500 A

42 = 600 A / 515 A

43 = 1140 A / 979 A

44 = 1710 A / 1468 A

45 = 2280 A / 1957 A

46 = 2850 A / 2446 A

47 = 105 A / 88 A

48 = 142 A / 115 A

49 = 180 A / 142 A

50 = 211 A / 180 A

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

42 Inverter Data

Description:

This parameter presents the inverter rated current for the normal overload regimen (ND) and for the heavy overload

regimen (HD). The inverter operation mode, if it is ND or HD, is defined by the content of P0298.

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

6-7

P0296 – Line Rated Voltage

Adjustable

Range:

0 = 200 ... 240 V

1 = 380 V

2 = 400 / 415 V

3 = 440 / 460 V

4 = 480 V

5 = 500 / 525 V

6 = 550 / 575 V

7 = 600 V

8 = 660 / 690 V

Factory

Setting:

According to

the inverter

model

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

42 Inverter Data

Description:

Setting according to the inverter power supply voltage.

The adjustable range depends on the inverter model, according to the table 6.8, which also presents the factory

default value.

NOTE!

When adjusted via the keypad (HMI), this parameter may change automatically the following

parameters: P0151, P0153, P0185, P0321, P0322 and P0323.

Table 6.8 - P0296 setting according to the CFW-11 inverter model

Inverter Model Adjustable Range Factory Setting

200-240 V 0 = 200...240 V 0

380-480 V

1 = 380 V

2 = 400 / 415 V

3 = 440 / 460 V

4 = 480 V

500-600 V

5 = 500 / 525 V

6 = 550 / 575 V

7 = 600 V

660-690 V 8 = 660 / 690 V 8

P0297 – Switching Frequency

Adjustable

Range:

0 = 1.25 kHz

1 = 2.5 kHz

2 = 5.0 kHz

3 = 10.0 kHz

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

42 Inverter Data

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

6-8

Description:

Refer to the allowed current for switching frequencies different from the default, in the tables available in chapter 8

of the CFW-11 User Manual.

The inverter switching frequency can be adjusted according to the needs of the application.

Higher switching frequencies imply in lower motor acoustic noise, however, the selection of the switching frequency

results in a compromise between the motor acoustic noises, the losses in the inverter IGBTs and the maximum

allowed currents.

The reduction of the switching frequency reduces effects related to motor instability, which occur in specific application

conditions. It also reduces the earth leakage current, being able to avoid the actuation of the faults F074 (Ground

Fault) or F070 (Output Overcurrent/Short Circuit).

Note: The option 0 (1.25 kHz) is only allowed for the V/f or VVW control (P0202=0, 1, 2 or 5).

P0298 – Application

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Normal Duty (ND)

1 = Heavy Duty (HD)

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

42 Inverter Data

Description:

Set the content of this parameter according to the application.

The Normal Duty Regimen (ND) defines the maximum current for continuous operation (Inom-ND) and an overload

of 110 % during 1 minute. It must be used for driving motors that are not subject in that application to high torques

in relation to their rated torque, when operating in permanent regimen, during start, acceleration or deceleration.

The Heavy Duty Regimen (HD) defines the maximum current for continuous operation (Inom-HD) and an overload

of 150 % during 1 minute. It must be used for driving motors that are subject in that application to high

overload torques in relation to their rated torque, when operating in constant speed, during start, acceleration or

deceleration.

The Inom-ND and Inom-HD are presented in P0295. Refer to the CFW-11 User Manual chapter 8 for more details

regarding these operation regimens.

Starting-up and Settings

7-1

STARTING-UP AND SETTINGS

In order to start-up in the several types of controls, beginning from the factory settings, consult the following

sections:

- 9.5 - V/f Control;

- 10.1 - VVW Control;

- 11.9 - Sensorless and Encoder Vector Control.

In order to use previously loaded parameters, refer to the section 7.1, described next.

7.1 BACKUP PARAMETERS [06]

The CFW-11 BACKUP functions allow saving the content of the current inverter parameters in a specific memory,

or vice-versa (overwrite the contents of the current parameters with the memory contents). Besides, there is a

function exclusive for software update, by means of the FLASH Memory Module.

P0204 – Load/Save Parameters

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Not Used

1 = Not Used

2 = Reset P0045

3 = Reset P0043

4 = Reset P0044

5 = Load 60 Hz

6 = Load 50 Hz

7 = Load User 1

8 = Load User 2

9 = Load User 3

10 = Save User 1

11 = Save User 2

12 = Save User 3

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

06 BACKUP PARAMETERS

Description:

It makes it possible to save the actual inverter parameters in an area of the control module EEPROM memory or the

other way around, to load the contents of that area into the parameters. It also allows resetting the Time Enabled

(P0043), kWh (P0044) and Fan Enabled Time (P0045) counters. The table 7.1 describes the actions performed by

each option.

Starting-up and Settings

7-2

Table 7.1 - Parameter P0204 options

P0204 Action

0, 1 Not Used: no action

2Reset P0045: resets the enabled fan hour counter

3Reset P0043: resets the enabled hours counter

4Reset P0044: resets the kWh counter

5Load 60 Hz: loads the 60 Hz factory settings into the inverter parameters

6Load 50 Hz: loads the 50 Hz factory settings into the inverter parameters

7Load User 1: loads the User 1 parameters into the current inverter parameters

8Load User 2: loads the User 2 parameters into the current inverter parameters

9Load User 3: loads the User 3 parameters into the current inverter parameters

10 Save User 1: saves the current inverter parameters into the User 1 parameter memory

11 Save User 2: saves the current inverter parameters into the User 2 parameter memory

12 Save User 3: saves the current inverter parameters into the User 3 parameter memory

User

Memory 3

User

Memory 1

User

Memory 2

Factory

Setting

Current

inverter

parameters

P0204=10

P0204=7

P0204=11

P0204=12

P0204=9

P0204=8

P0204=5 or 6

Figure 7.1 - Parameter transfer

In order to load parameters from User 1, User 2 and/or User 3 to the CFW-11 operation area (P0204=7, 8 or 9),

it is necessary that these areas had been saved previously.

The operation of loading one of those memories can also be performed via digital inputs (DIx). Refer to the section

13.8 for more details regarding this programming (P0204=10, 11 or 12).

NOTE!

When P0204=5 or 6, the parameters P0296 (Line Rated Voltage), P0297 (Switching Frequency),

P0308 (Serial Address) and P0201 (Language), are not changed by the factory settings.

P0318 – Copy Function MemCard

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = VFD → MemCard

2 = MemCard → VFD

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

06 BACKUP PARAMETERS

Starting-up and Settings

7-3

Description:

This function allows saving the contents of the inverter writing parameters in the FLASH Memory Module (MMF), or

vice-versa, and can be used to transfer the contents of the parameters from one inverter to another.

Table 7.2 - Parameter P0318 options

P0318 Action

0 Inactive: no action

1 Inverter → MemCard: transfers the inverter current parameters contents to the MMF

2 MemCard → Inverter: transfers the contents of the parameters stored in the MMF to the inverter control board

After storing the parameters of one inverter in a FLASH memory module, it is possible to pass them to another inverter

with this function. However, if the inverters are form different models or with incompatible software versions, the

keypad (HMI) will exhibit the message “Flash Mem. Module with invalid parameters” and will not allow the copy.

NOTE!

During the inverter operation the modified parameters are saved in the FLASH memory module,

regardless of a user command. This assures that the MMF will always have an updated copy of the

inverter parameters.

NOTE!

When the inverter is powered and the memory module is present, the current parameter contents are

compared with the contents of the parameters saved in the MMF and, in case they are different, the

keypad (HMI) will exhibit the message “Flash Mem.Module with different parameters”, after 3 seconds

the message is replaced by the parameter P0318 menu. The user has the option to overwrite the

contents of the memory module (choosing P0318=1), or overwrite the inverter parameters (choosing

P0318=2), or even ignore the message by programming P0318=0.

NOTE!

When using the network communication board, the SoftPLC function or the PLC11 board, it is

recommended to set the parameter P0318 = 0.

P0319 – Copy Function HMI

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = VFD → HMI

2 = HMI → VFD

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

06 BACKUP PARAMETERS

Description:

The Copy Function HMI is similar to the previous, and it is also used to transfer the contents of the parameters

from one inverter to another (others). The inverters must be of the same model (voltage/current) and have the same

software version.

Table 7.3 - Parameter P0319 options

P0319 Action

0Inactive: no action

1Inverter → HMI: transfers the inverter current parameters and the user memories 1, 2 and 3 contents to the keypad (HMI)

nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). The inverter current parameters remain unchanged

2HMI → Inverter: transfers the content of the keypad (HMI) nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) to the current inverter parameters

and to the user memories 1, 2 and 3

Starting-up and Settings

7-4

NOTE!

In case the keypad (HMI) had been previously loaded with parameters from a version “different” from

that of the inverter where one is trying to copy the parameters, the operation will not be carried out

and the keypad (HMI) will indicate the fault F082 (Copy Function Fault). It is understood as “different”

versions, those that differ in the “x” and “y” digits, assuming that the software version numbers be

described as Vx.yz.

Example: Version V1.60 → (x=1, y=6 and z=0) previously stored in the keypad (HMI)

Inverter version: V1.75 → (x’=1, y’=7 and z’=5)

P0319=2 → F082 [(y=6) → (y’=7)]

Inverter version: V1.62 → (x’=1, y’=6 and z’=2)

P0319=2 → normal copy [(y=6) = (y’=6)] and [(x=1) = (x’=1)]

In order to copy parameters from one inverter to another, one must proceed in the following manner:

1. Connect the keypad (HMI) to the inverter from which one wants to copy the parameters (Inverter A);

2. Set P0319=1 (VFD → HMI) to transfer the parameters from the Inverter A to the keypad (HMI);

3. Press the right “soft key” “Save”. P0319 returns automatically to 0 (inactive) as soon as the transfer is

finished;

4. Disconnect the keypad (HMI) from the inverter;

5. Connect the same keypad (HMI) to the invert to which one wants to transfer the parameters (Inverter B);

6. Set P0319=2 (HMI → VFD) to transfer the contents of the keypad (HMI) nonvolatile memory (EEPROM with

the Inverter A parameters) to the Inverter B;

7. Press the right “soft key” “Save”. When P0319 returns to 0 the transfer of the parameters has been

finished.

From that moment on the Inverters A and B will have the parameters with the same contents.

Notes:

In case that inverters A and B are not from the same model, verify the values of P0296 (Line Rated

Voltage) and P0297 (Switching Frequency) at the Inverter B;

If inverters A and B drive different motors, verify the Inverter B motor parameters.

Starting-up and Settings

7-5

8. In order to copy the contents of the Inverter A parameters to other inverters, repeat the same procedures 5

to 7 described previously.

INVERTER

Parameters

EEPROM

HMI

INV → HMI HMI → INV

EEPROM

HMI

INVERTER

Parameters

Figure 7.2 - Parameter copy from “Inverter A” to the “Inverter B”

NOTE!

As long as the keypad (HMI) is performing the reading or the writing procedure, it will not be possible

to operate it.

Starting-up and Settings

7-6

8-1

Available Control Types

AVAILABLE CONTROL TYPES

8.1 CONTROL TYPES

The inverter feeds the motor with variable voltage, current and frequency, by means of whose the control of

the motor speed is obtained. The values applied to the motor follow a control strategy, which depends on the

selected type of control and on the inverter parameter settings.

Choose the control type in function of the static and dynamic, torque and speed requirements of the driven

load.

Control modes and their main characteristics:

V/f: scalar control; it is the simplest control mode, by imposed voltage/frequency; with an open loop speed

regulation or with slip compensation (programmable); it allows multimotor operation.

VVW: Voltage Vector WEG; it allows a static speed control more accurate than the V/f mode; it adjusts

itself automatically to the line variations, and also to the load variations, however it does not present fast

dynamic response.

Sensorless Vector: it is a field oriented control; without motor speed sensor; able to drive any standard

motor; speed control range of 1:100; speed control static precision of 0.5 % of the rated speed; high

control dynamics.

Vector with Encoder: it is a field oriented control; it needs motor encoder and inverter encoder interface

module (ENC1 or ENC2); speed control down to 0 rpm; speed control static precision of 0.01 % of the

rated speed; high static and dynamic performance of the speed and torque control.

All these control modes are described in details in the chapters 9, 10 and 11, the related parameters and

orientations regarding the use of each of these modes.

Available Control Types

8-2

9-1

Scalar Control (V/f)

SCALAR CONTROL (V/f)

It consists of a simple control based on a curve that links output voltage and frequency. The inverter operates

as a voltage source, generating frequency and voltage values according to that curve. It is possible to adjust

this curve to standard 50 Hz or 60 Hz motors or to special ones through the adjustable V/f curve. Refer to the

block diagram at the figure 9.1.

The advantage of the V/f control is that due to its simplicity just a few settings are necessary. The start-up is fast

and simple, and the factory settings require generally few or no modifications.

Reference

PWM

Speed

P0202=2=Adjustable V/f

P0202=Type of Control

Total Reference

(Refer to figure 13.8)

Is = Output Current

TRANSF.

I active

P0139

P0202=0 or 1=V/f

P0142

P0143

P0144

P0138

P0137

Speed Speed

Speed

P0146 P0145

Automatic Torque

BOOST

Slip Compensation

P0136

Figure 9.1 - V/f control block diagram

The V/f or scalar control is recommended for the following cases:

Operation of several motors with the same inverter (multimotor operation);

The motor rated current is less than 1/3 of the inverter rated current;

The inverter is, for test purposes, enabled without motor or with a small motor and no load.

The scalar control can also be used in applications that do neither require fast dynamic response, nor accuracy

in the speed regulation, and also do not require high starting torque (the speed error is a function of the motor

slip, and by programming the parameter P0138 – Slip Compensation – it is possible to get a accuracy of

approximately 1 % at the rated speed with the load variation).

Scalar Control (V/f)

9-2

9.1 V/f CONTROL [23]

P0136 – Manual Torque Boost

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 9 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: V/f

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

23 V/f Control

Description:

It acts at low speeds, increasing the inverter output voltage in order to compensate the voltage drop across the

motor stator resistance, with the purpose of keeping the torque constant.

The optimum setting is the lowest value of P0136 that allows a satisfactory starting of the motor. Values higher than

the necessary will increase the motor current at low speeds, being able to lead the inverter to a fault (F048, F051,

F071, F072, F078 or F183) or alarm (A046, A047, A050 or A110) condition.

Output Voltage

Nominal

1/2 Nominal

Speed

Nnom/2 Nnom

P0136=9

P0136=0

Figure 9.2 - Effect of P0136 on the V/f curve (P0202=0 or 1)

P0137 – Automatic Torque Boost

Adjustable

Range:

0.00 to 1.00 Factory

Setting:

0.00

Proprieties: V/f

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

23 V/f Control

Description:

The Automatic Torque Boost compensates the voltage drop on the stator resistance in function of the motor active

current.

The criteria for adjusting P0137 are the same as for the parameter P0136.

9-3

Scalar Control (V/f)

P0136

I x R

P0137

Automatic

I x R

Voltage Applied to

the Motor

P0007

P0139

Active Output

Current

Speed Reference

Figure 9.3 - Torque Boost block diagram

Output Voltage

Nominal

1/2 Nominal

Compensation

Zone

Nnom/2 Nnom

Speed

Figure 9.4 - Effect of P0137 on the V/f curve (P0202=0…2)

P0138 – Slip Compensation

Adjustable

Range:

-10.0 to +10.0 % Factory

Setting:

0.0 %

Proprieties: V/f

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

23 V/f Control

Description:

The parameter P0138 is used in the motor slip compensation function, when adjusted to positive values. In this

case it compensates the drop in the speed due to the application of load to the motor shaft. It increases the output

frequency in function of the increase in the motor active current.

The setting of P0138 allows regulating the slip compensation precisely. Once P0138 is adjusted the inverter will

keep the speed constant even with load variations by adjusting the voltage and frequency automatically.

Negative values are used in special applications where one wants to reduce the output speed in function of the

increase in the motor current.

E.g.: Load distribution in motors operated in parallel.

Scalar Control (V/f)

9-4

Speed

Total Reference

(Refer to figure 9.1)

Slip Compensation ∆ F

Output

Active

Current

P0139 P0138

Figure 9.5 - Slip compensation block diagram

Output Voltage

(function of

the motor

load)

Speed

Nnom

Vnom

∆V

∆F

Figure 9.6 - V/f curve with slip compensation

For the adjustment of the parameter P0138 to compensate the motor slip:

a) Run the motor with no load at approximately half the working speed;

b) Measure the motor or equipment speed with a tachometer;

c) Apply rated load to the equipment;

d) Increase the content of P0138 until the speed reaches the value measured before with no load.

P0139 – Output Current Filter (Active)

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 16.0 s Factory

Setting:

0.2 s

Proprieties: V/f and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

23 V/f Control

Description:

It sets the active current filter time constant.

It is used in the Automatic Torque Boost and Slip Compensation functions. Refer to the figures 9.3 and 9.5.

It sets the response time of the Slip Compensation and of the Automatic Torque Boost. Refer to the figures 9.3

and 9.5

9-5

Scalar Control (V/f)

P0140 – Dwell Time at Start

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 10.0 s Factory

Setting:

0.0 s

P0141 – Dwell Speed at Start

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 300 rpm Factory

Setting:

90 rpm

Proprieties: V/f and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

23 V/f Control

Description:

P0140 sets the time during which the speed is kept constant during the acceleration. Refer to the figure 9.7.

P0141 sets the speed step during the acceleration. Refer to the figure 9.7.

By means of these parameters it is possible to introduce a speed step during the acceleration, helping the starting of

high torque loads.

Speed

Time

P0140

P0141

Figure 9.7 - Acceleration speed profile as a function of P0140 and P0141

NOTE!

The accommodation time will be considered null when the Flying Start function is active

(P0320 = 1 or 2).

P0202 – Type of Control

Adjustable

Range:

0=V/f 60 Hz

1=V/f 50 Hz

2=V/f Adjustable

3=Sensorless

4=Encoder

5=VVW (Voltage Vector WEG)

Factory

Setting:

(1)

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

23 V/f Control

Scalar Control (V/f)

9-6

Description:

In order to get an overview of the control types, as well as orientation to choose the most suitable type for the

application, refer to the chapter 8 of the CFW-11 User Manual.

For the V/f mode, select P0202=0, 1 or 2:

Parameter P0202 setting for the V/f mode:

P0202=0 for motors with rated frequency=60 Hz;

P0202=1 for motors with rated frequency=50 Hz.

Notes:

The correct setting of P0400 assures the application of the correct V/f ratio at the output, in case of

50 Hz or 60 Hz motors with voltage different from the inverter input voltage.

P0202=2: for special motors with rated frequency different from 50 Hz or 60 Hz, or for the adjustment

of special V/f curve profiles. Example: the approximation of a quadratic V/f curve for energy saving in

variable torque loads like centrifuge pumps and fans.

9.2 ADJUSTABLE V/f CURVE [24]

P0142 – Maximum Output Voltage

P0143 – Intermediate Output Voltage

P0144 – 3Hz Output Voltage

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 100.0 % Factory

Setting:

P0142=100.0 %

P0143=50.0 %

P0144=8.0 %

P0145 – Field Weakening Speed

P0146 – Intermediate Speed

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

P0145=1800 rpm

P0146=900 rpm

Proprieties: Adj and CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

24 Adjust. V/f Curve

Description:

This function allows the adjustment of the curve that links output voltage and frequency by means of parameters, as

presented by the figure 9.8, in V/f mode.

It is necessary when the used motor has a rated frequency different from 50 Hz or 60 Hz, or when a quadratic V/f

curve, for energy saving in the operation of centrifuge pumps and fans, is desired, or even in special applications,

such as, for instance, when a transformer is used at the inverter output, between it and the motor.

9-7

Scalar Control (V/f)

The function is activated with P0202=2 (Adjustable V/f).

The factory setting of P0144 (8.0 %) is adequate for standard motors with rated frequency of 60 Hz. When using

a motor with rated frequency (adjusted in P0403) different from 60 Hz, the default value for P0144 may become

inadequate, being able to cause difficulties in the motor starting. A good approximation for the setting of P0144 is

given by the formula:

P0144 = 3 x P0142

P0403

If it is necessary to increase the starting torque, increase gradually the value of P0144.

Output

Voltage Line rated voltage

100 %

P0142

P0143

P0144

0.1 Hz 3 Hz P0146 P0145 P0134

P0202=2

Speed/Frequency

Figure 9.8 - V/f curve in function of P0142 to P0146

9.3 V/f CURRENT LIMITATION [26]

P0135 – Maximum Output Current

Adjustable

Range:

0.2 to 2xInom-HD Factory

Setting:

1.5xInom-HD

Proprieties: V/f e VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

26 V/f Current Limit

P0344 – Current Limitation Configuration

Adjustable

Range:

0=Hold -FL ON

1=Decel. -FL ON

2=Hold -FL OFF

3=Decel. -FL OFF

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: V/f, CFG and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

26 V/f Current Limit

Scalar Control (V/f)

9-8

Description:

It is the current limitation for the V/f control with actuation mode defined by P0344 (refer to the table 9.1) and the

current limit defined by P0135.

Table 9.1 - Current limitation configuration

P0344 Function Description

0 = Hold - FL ON Current limitation of the “Ramp Hold” type

Active fast current limitation

Current limitation according to the figure 9.9(a)

Fast current limitation at the value 1.9 x InomHD active

1 = Decel. - FL ON Current limitation of the “Ramp Deceleration” type

Active fast current limitation

Current limitation according to the figure 9.9(b)

Fast current limitation at the value 1.9 x InomHD active

2 = Hold - FL OFF Current limitation of the “Ramp Hold” type

Inactive fast current limitation Current limitation according to the figure 9.9(a)

3 = Decel.- FL OFF Current limitation of the “Ramp Deceleration” type

Inactive fast current limitation Current limitation according to the figure 9.9(b)

Current limitation of the “Ramp Hold” type:

 It avoids the stalling of the motor during a torque overload at the acceleration or at the deceleration.

 Working: if the motor current exceeds the value adjusted in P0135 during the acceleration or the

deceleration, the speed will no longer be increased (acceleration) or decreased (deceleration). When the

motor current reaches a value below P0135 the motor will again accelerate or decelerate. Refer to the

figure 9.9(a).

 It acts faster than the “Ramp Deceleration” mode.

 It acts in the motorization and braking modes.

Current limitation of the “Ramp Deceleration” type:

 It avoids the stalling of the motor during a torque overload at the acceleration or at constant speed.

 Working: if the motor current exceeds the value adjusted in P0135, the input of the speed ramp is set

to zero forcing a deceleration. When the motor current reaches a value below P0135 the motor will

accelerate again. Refer to the figure 9.9(b).

Fast current limitation:

 It reduces the inverter output voltage instantaneously when the motor current reaches the value of

1.9xInomHD.

9-9

Scalar Control (V/f)

Motor current

P0135

Speed

Acceleration

via ramp

(P0100)

Deceleration

via ramp

(P0101)

During acceleration During deceleration

Time

Motor current

Time

(a) “Ramp Hold”

Motor current

P0135 Time

Time

Decelerates

via ramp P0101

Speed

(b) “Ramp Deceleration”

Figure 9.9 - Current limitation via P0135 working modes

Scalar Control (V/f)

9-10

9.4 V/f DC VOLTAGE LIMITATION [27]

There are two functions in the inverter for limiting the DC link voltage during the motor braking. They act limiting

the braking torque and power, avoiding therefore the tripping of the inverter by overvoltage (F022).

The overvoltage on the DC link is more common when a load with high inertia is driven or when a short

deceleration time is programmed.

NOTE!

When using the dynamic braking the function "Ramp Hold" or "Ramp Acceleration" must be disabled.

Refer to the P0151 description.

In the V/f mode, there are two types of function to limit the DC link voltage:

1 – “Ramp Hold”:

It is effective only during the deceleration.

Working: When the DC link voltage reaches the level adjusted in P0151, a command is sent to the “ramp”

block, which inhibits the motor speed variation (“ramp hold”). Refer to the figures 9.10 and 9.11.

With this function an optimized deceleration time (minimum possible) for the driven load is obtained.

The use is recommended for loads running with high inertia moment referenced to the motor shaft, or loads

with medium inertia, which require short deceleration ramps.

Error < 0: Ramp Hold =inactive

Error≥0:RampHold=active

Ramp Hold

Output

Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp

DC link

Voltage (Ud)

Error

Input

P0151

Figure 9.10 - Limitation of the DC link voltage using Ramp Hold function block diagram

9-11

Scalar Control (V/f)

DC Link Voltage (P0004)

F022 – Overvoltage

Time

DC Link Regulation

Output

Speed

Time

P0151

Nominal Ud

Figure 9.11 - Example of the DC link voltage limitation working with the Ramp Hold function

2 - Ramp Acceleration:

It is effective in any situation, regardless of the motor speed condition, accelerating, decelerating or at

constant speed.

Working: the DC link voltage is compared with the value adjusted in P0151, the difference between these

signals is multiplied by the proportional gain (P0152) and the result is added to the ramp output. Refer to

the figures 9.12 and 9.13.

In a similar manner as the Ramp Hold, with this function an optimized deceleration time (minimum possible)

for the driven load is also obtained.

The use is recommended for loads that require braking torques in constant speed situation. Example: driving

of loads with eccentric shafts such as the existent in pumpjacks.

DC Link

Voltage (Ud)

P0152

P0151

Speed

Ramp Output

Figure 9.12 - Limitation of the DC link voltage using Ramp Hold function block diagram

Scalar Control (V/f)

9-12

DC Link Voltage (P0004)

F022-Overvoltage

Time

DC Link Regulation

Output

Speed

Time

P0151

Nominal Ud

Voltage Ud

(P0004)

Figure 9.13 - Example of the DC link voltage limitation working with the Ramp Acceleration function

P0150 – DC Regulator Type (V/f)

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Ramp Hold

1 = Ramp Acceleration

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: V/f, CFG and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

27 V/f DC Volt. Limit.

Description:

It selects the DC link voltage limitation function type in the V/f mode.

P0151 – DC Link Voltage Regulation Acting Level (V/f)

Adjustable

Range:

339 to 400 V (P0296=0)

585 to 800 V (P0296=1)

585 to 800 V (P0296=2)

585 to 800 V (P0296=3)

585 to 800 V (P0296=4)

809 to 1000 V (P0296=5)

809 to 1000 V (P0296=6)

924 to 1200 V (P0296=7)

924 to 1200 V (P0296=8)

Factory

Setting:

400 V

800 V

1000 V

1200 V

Proprieties: V/f and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

27 V/f DC Volt. Limit.

9-13

Scalar Control (V/f)

Description:

It is the actuation level of the DC link voltage limitation function for the V/f mode.

Setting of P0151 value:

a) The P0151 factory setting leaves inactive the DC link voltage limitation function for the V/f mode. In order

to activate it, one must reduce the value of P0151 as suggested in the table 9.2.

Table 9.2 - Recommended actuation levels for the DC link regulation

Inverter

Vnom

220/230 V 380 V 400/415 V 440/460 V 480 V 500/525 V 550/575 V 600 V 660/690 V

P0296 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P0151 375 V 618 V 675 V 748 V 780 V 893 V 972 V 972 V 1174 V

b) In case DC link overvoltage (F022) keeps happening during the deceleration, reduce the value of P0151

gradually or increase the deceleration ramp time (P0101 and/or P0103).

c) If the supply line is permanently at a voltage level that results in a DC link voltage higher than the P0151

setting, it will not be possible to decelerate the motor. In this case, reduce the line voltage or increase

the value of the P0151 setting.

d) If, even with the procedures above, it is not possible to decelerate the motor in the necessary time, use

the dynamic braking (Refer to the section 14).

P0152 – DC Link Voltage Regulator Proportional Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.00 to 9.99 Factory

Setting:

1.50

Proprieties: V/f and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

27 V/f DC Volt. Limit.

Description:

It defines the DC Link Voltage Regulator proportional gain (refer to the figure 9.12).

P0152 multiplies the DC link voltage error, i.e., Error = actual DC link voltage – (P0151), and it is normally used

to prevent overvoltage in applications with eccentric loads.

9.5 START-UP IN THE V/f CONTROL MODE

NOTE!

Read the whole CFW-11 User Manual before installing, powering or operating the inverter.

Sequence for installation, verification, powering and start-up:

a) Install the inverter: according to the chapter 3 – Installation and Connection of the CFW-11 User Manual,

wiring all the power and control connections.

Scalar Control (V/f)

9-14

b) Prepare the inverter and apply power: according to the section 5.1 of the CFW-11 User Manual.

c) Adjust the password P0000=5: according to the section 5.3 of this manual.

d) Adjust the inverter to operate with the application line and motor: execute the Oriented Start-up

routine according to the section 5.2.2 of the CFW-11 User Manual. Refer to the section 11.7 (Motor Data)

of this manual.

e) Setting of specific parameters and functions for the application: program the digital and analog

inputs and outputs, HMI keys, etc., according to the application needs.

For applications:

- That are simple, which can use the factory settings programming for the digital and analog inputs and

outputs, use the Menu “Basic Application”. Refer to the section 5.2.3 of the CFW-11 User Manual.

- That require only the digital and analog inputs and outputs with programming different from the factory

settings, use the Menu “I/O Configuration”.

- That need functions as Flying Start, Ride-Through, DC Braking, Dynamic Braking, etc., access and modify

those functions parameters by means of the Menu “Parameter Groups”.

10-1

VVW Control

VVW CONTROL

The VVW (Voltage Vector WEG) control mode uses a control method with intermediate performance between

V/f and Sensorless Vector. Refer to the figure 10.1 block diagram.

The main advantage compared to the V/f control is the better speed regulation with higher torque capability at

low speeds (frequencies below 5 Hz), allowing a sensible improvement of the inverter performance in permanent

regimen. Comparing to the Sensorless Vector, the settings are simpler and easier.

The VVW control uses the stator current measurement, the stator resistance value (that can be obtained with the

self-tuning routine) and the induction motor nameplate data to perform automatically the torque estimation, the

output voltage compensation and consequently the slip compensation, replacing the function of the parameters

P0137 and P0138.

In order to obtain a good speed regulation in permanent regimen, the slip frequency is calculated based on

the load estimated torque, which considers the existent motor data.

VVW Control

10-2

P0202=5 (VVW Control)

P0151 Ud

DC Voltage

Regulation

Hold

P0100-P0104

Filter

Reference

(Refer to

Figure 13.9)

P0134

P0133

P0403

fslip

Fslip Calculation fo

TL/TR, sRfo

Torque Estimation

P0404, P0399,

P0401, P0409,

P0402, P0403

Io Calculation iv , iw

P0295

iv , iw

Ia Calculation

P0295

mPWM

iv , iw

Space Vector

Modulation

PWM

Speed Direction

folalo

Flux Control m*

Line

Output Voltage

Compensation

P0400, P0403,

P0401, P0407,

P0409, P0178

M I

3Ø

P0151

Figure 10.1 - VVW control block diagram

10-3

VVW Control

10.1 VVW CONTROL [25]

The parameter group [25] – VVW Control – contains only 5 parameters related to that function: P0139, P0140,

P0141, P0202 and P0397.

However, since the parameters P0139, P0140, P0141 and P0202 were already presented in the section 9.1,

only the parameter P0397 will be described next.

P0397 – Slip Compensation During Regeneration

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Inactive

1 = Active

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

25 VVW Control

Description:

It enables or disables the slip compensation during the regeneration in the VVW control mode. Refer to the parameter

P0138 in the section 9.1 for more details on the slip compensation.

10.2 MOTOR DATA [43]

The parameters for the used motor data setting are listed in this group. They must be adjusted according to

the motor nameplate data (P0398 to P0406, except P0405) and by means of the Self-Tuning or from data

of the motor data sheet (other parameters).

In this section only the parameters P0399 and P0407 will be presented, the others are presented in the

section 11.7.

P0398 – Motor Service Factor

Refer to the section 11.7 for more information.

P0399 – Motor Rated Efficiency

Adjustable

Range:

50.0 to 99.9 % Factory

Setting:

67.0 %

Proprieties: CFG and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

43 Motor Data

Description:

It sets the motor rated efficiency.

This parameter is important for the VVW control precise operation. The inaccurate setting implies in incorrect

calculation of the slip compensation and consequently an imprecise speed control.

VVW Control

10-4

P0400 – Motor Rated Voltage

P0401 – Motor Rated Current

P0402 – Motor Rated Speed

P0403 – Motor Rated Frequency

P0404 – Motor Rated Power

P0406 – Motor Ventilation

Refer to the section 11.7 for more information.

P0407 – Motor Rated Power Factor

Adjustable

Range:

0.50 to 0.99 % Factory

Setting:

0.68 %

Proprieties: CFG and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

43 Motor Data

Description:

It is the motor power factor setting, according to the motor nameplate data (cos Ø).

This parameter is important for the VVW control operation. The inaccurate setting will imply in incorrect calculation

of the slip compensation.

The default value of this parameter is adjusted automatically when the parameter P0404 is changed. The suggested

value is valid for three-phase, IV pole WEG motors. For other motor types the setting must be done manually.

P0408– Run Self-Tuning

P0409 – Motor Stator Resistance (Rs)

P0410 – Motor Magnetizing Current (Im)

Refer to the section 11.8.5 for more information.

10.3 VVW CONTROL MODE START-UP

NOTE!

Read the whole CFW-11 User Manual before installing, powering or operating the inverter.

Sequence for installation, verification, powering and start-up:

a) Install the inverter: according to the chapter 3 – Installation and Connection of the CFW-11 User Manual,

wiring all the power and control connections.

10-5

VVW Control

b) Prepare the inverter and apply power: according to the section 5.1 of the CFW-11 User Manual.

c) Adjust the password P0000=5: according to the section 5.3 of this manual.

d) Adjust the inverter to operate with the application line and motor: by means of the “Oriented Start-up”

Menu access P0317 and change its content to 1, which makes the inverter initiate the “Oriented Start-up”

routine.

The “Oriented Start-up” routine presents on the keypad (HMI) the main parameters in a logical sequence. The

setting of these parameters prepares the inverter for operation with the application line and motor. Verify the

step by step sequence in the figure 10.2.

The setting of the parameters presented in this operation mode results in the automatic modification of the

content of other inverter parameters and/or internal variables, as indicated in the figure 10.2. In this way one

gets a stable operation of the control circuit with adequate values to obtain the best motor performance.

During the “Oriented Start-up” routine the “Config” (Configuration) status will be indicated on the top left part

of the keypad (HMI).

Parameters related to the motor:

- Program the contents of parameters from P0398 to P0407 directly with the motor nameplate data. Refer

to the section 11.7 (Motor Data).

- Options for the setting of parameter P0409:

I – Automatic by the inverter, performing the self-tuning routine selected in P0408.

II – From the motor test data sheet, supplied by the manufacturer. Refer to the section 11.7.1 in this

manual.

III – Manually, copying the parameters content of another CFW-11 that runs an identical motor.

e) Setting of specific parameters and functions for the application: program the digital and analog

inputs and outputs, HMI keys, etc., according to the application needs.

For applications:

- That are simple, which can use the factory settings programming for the digital and analog inputs and

outputs, use the Menu “Basic Application”. Refer to the section 5.2.3 of the CFW-11 User Manual.

- That require only the digital and analog inputs and outputs with programming different from the factory

settings, use the Menu “I/O Configuration”.

-That need functions as Flying Start, Ride-Through, DC Braking, Dynamic Braking, etc., access and modify

those function parameters by means of the Menu “Parameter Groups”.

VVW Control

10-6

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- Monitoring Mode.

- Press “ Menu ”

(right "soft key").

Ready LOC 0rpm

13:48 Menu

0 rpm

0.0 A

0.0 Hz

- The group “00 ALL

PARAMETERS” is already

selected.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The group “01

PARAMETER GROUPS” is

selected.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The group “02

ORIENTED START-UP” is

then selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The parameter

“Oriented Start-up

P0317:No” is already

selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Select

Oriented Start-up

P0317: No

- The content of

“P0317 = [000] No” is

showed.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Save

P0317

Oriented Start-up

[000] No

- The content of the

parameter is changed to

“P0317 = [001] Yes”

- Press “Save”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Save

P0317

Oriented Start-up

[001] Yes

- In this moment the

Oriented Start-up routine is

initiated and the “Config”

status is indicated at the

top left part of the keypad

(HMI).

- The parameter

“Language P0201:

English” is already

selected.

- If necessary, change

the language by pressing

“Select”, next e

to select the language and

then press “Save”.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Language

P0201: English

Type of Control

P0202: V/f 60Hz

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- Set the content of P0202

pressing “Select”.

- Next press until

selecting the option "[005]

VVW", and then press

“Save”.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Language

P0201: English

Type of Control

P0202: V/f 60Hz

Config LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Save

P0202

Type of Control

[005] VVW

- If necessary, change the

content of P0296 according

to the used line voltage.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect

P0151, P0153, P0185,

P0321, P0322, P0323 and

P0400.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Type of Control

P0202: VVW

Line Rated Voltage

P0296: 440 - 460 V

- If necessary, change the

content of P0298 according

to the inverter application.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect

P0156, P0157, P0158,

P0401 and P0404. The

actuation time and level

of the IGBTs overload

protection will be affected.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Line Rated Voltage

P0296: 440 - 460 V

Application

P0298: Normal Duty

- If necessary, change the

content of P0398 according

to the motor service factor.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect the

value of the current and the

time for the actuation of the

motor overload protection.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Application

P0298: Normal Duty

Motor Service Factor

P0398: 1.15

- If necessary, change the

content of P0399 according

to the rated motor

efficiency. Therefore press

“Select”.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Motor Service Factor

P0398: 1.15

Motor Rated Eff.

P0399: 67.0 %

Figure 10.2 - VVW mode Oriented Start-up

10-7

VVW Control

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- If necessary, change the

content of P0400 according

to the motor rated voltage.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change corrects the

output voltage by the factor

x = P0400/P0296.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Motor Rated Eff.

P0399: 67.0 %

Motor Rated Voltage

P0400: 440 V

- If necessary, change the

content of P0401 according

to the motor rated current.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect

P0156, P0157, P0158 and

P0410.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Motor Rated Voltage

P0400: 440V

Motor Rated Current

P0401: 13.5 A

- If necessary, change the

content of P0402 according

to the motor rated speed.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect

P0122 to P0131, P0133,

P0134, P0182, P0208,

P0288 and P0289.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Motor Rated Current

P0401: 13.5A

Motor Rated Speed

P0402: 1750 rpm

- If necessary, change the

content of P0403 according

to the motor rated

frequency. Therefore press

“Select”. This change will

affect P0402.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:08 Select

Motor Rated Speed

P0402: 1750 rpm

Motor Rated Frequency

P0403: 60 Hz

- If necessary, change the

content of P0404 according

to the motor rated power.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect

P0410.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Motor Rated Frequency

P0403: 60 Hz

Motor Rated Power

P0404: 7.5 hp

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- If necessary, change the

content of P0406 according

to the motor ventilation

type. Therefore press

“Select”.

This change will affect

P0156, P0157, P0158,

P0399, and P0407.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Motor Rated Power

P0404: 7.5 hp

Motor Ventilation

P0406: Self-Vent.

If necessary, change the

content of P0407 according

to the motor rated power

factor. Therefore press

“Select”.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Motor Ventilation

P0406: Self-Vent.

Motor Rated Power Fac

P0407: 0.68

- At this point the keypad

(HMI) presents the option

for running the “Self-

tuning”. Whenever it is

possible, one must run the

Self-tuning.

- Thus, press “Select”

to access the parameter

P0408 and then

to select the option “[001]

No Rotation”. Refer to the

section 11.8.5 for more

details.

- Next press “Save”.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:09 Select

Motor Rated Power Fac

P0407: 0.68

Run Self-Tuning

P0408: No

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Save

P0408

Run Self-Tuning

[001] No Rotation

- After this the Self-tuning

routine is initiated and the

“SelfTun” status is indicated

at the top left part of the

keypad (HMI).

- The keypad (HMI)

will initiate the routine

presenting “P0409

Estimating Rs”. Wait until

the end of the Self-tuning

routine.

SelfTun LOC 0rpm

13:48

P0409

Estimating Rs

- Once the Self-tuning

routine has finished, the

inverter returns to the

Monitoring Mode and it is

ready to operate.

Ready LOC 0rpm

13:48 Menu

0 rpm

0.0 A

0.0 Hz

Figure 10.2 - VVW mode Oriented Start-up (cont.)

VVW Control

10-8

11-1

Vector Control

VECTOR CONTROL

It consists in the control type based on the separation of the motor current into two components:

Flux producing current Id (oriented with the motor electromagnetic flux);

Torque producing current Iq (perpendicular to the motor flux vector).

The Id current is related to the motor electromagnetic flux, while the Iq current is directly related to the torque

produced at the motor shaft. With this strategy one gets the so called decoupling, i.e., one can control the

motor flux and torque independently by controlling the Id and Iq currents respectively.

Since these currents are represented by vectors that rotate at the synchronous speed, when observed from a

stationary referential, a referential transformation is done so that they are changed to the synchronous referential.

In the synchronous referential these values become DC values proportional the respective vector amplitudes.

This simplifies considerably the control circuit.

When the Id vector is aligned with the motor flux, it can be said that the vector control is orientated. Therefore it

is necessary that the motor parameters be correctly adjusted. Some of those parameters must be programmed

with the motor nameplate data and others obtained automatically through self-tuning or from the motor data

sheet supplied by the manufacturer.

The figure 11.2 presents the block diagram for the vector control with encoder and the figure 11.1 for the

sensorless vector control. The information of the speed, as well as of the currents measured by the inverter, will

be used to obtain the correct vector orientation. In the vector with encoder control case, the speed is obtained

directly from the encoder signal, while in the sensorless vector control there is an algorithm which estimates the

speed, based in the output currents and voltages.

The vector control measures the current, separates the flux and torque portions and transforms these variables to

the synchronous referential. The motor control is accomplished by imposing the desired currents and comparing

them with the actual values.

11.1 SENSORLESS CONTROL AND WITH ENCODER

The Sensorless Vector Control is recommended for the majority of the applications, because it allows the

operation in a speed variation range of 1:100, accuracy in the speed control of 0.5 % of the rated speed, high

starting torque and fast dynamic response.

Another advantage of this control type is the greater robustness against sudden line voltage and load changes,

avoiding unnecessary overcurrent trips.

The necessary settings for the good operation of the sensorless vector control are done automatically. Therefore

the used motor must be connected to the CFW-11 inverter.

Vector Control

11-2

Speed Regulator

DC Link Regulator

Flux Regulator

Maximum Output

Voltage Regulator

Total Reference

(refer to the

figure 13.8)

Gp = P0161

Gi = P0162 Gp = P0167

Gi = P0168

Usd*

Stator

Network

Flux

Current

AIx = 2 – Max. Torque Current

P0185<Default Value

P0185=Default Value

M I

Torque

Current

PWM

Usq*

Current Regulator

Iq*

Id*

P0179

Gp = P0175

Gi = P0176

Gp = P0188

Gi = P0189

Gp = P0186

Gi = P0187

Usd, Usq

P0190

P0185

Gd = P0166

Gp = 1.00

Gi = 0.00

DIx = 15 (Speed/Torque)

R.T.=OFF

R.T. = On

(refer to the

figure 12.8) Max FW = P0169

Max REV = P0170

N Estimated Speed

Usd, Usq

lv, lw

MOTOR

MODEL

Speed

Torque

ψ Stator Flux

ψ*

Figure 11.1 - Sensorless vector control block diagram

11-3

Vector Control

The Vector Control with Encoder presents the same advantages of the sensorless control previously described,

with the following additional benefits:

Torque and speed control down to 0 (zero) rpm;

Speed control accuracy of 0.01 % (if the 14-bit analog speed reference via optional board IOA-01 is

used, or if digital references are used, for instance via keypad (HMI), Profibus DP, DeviceNet, etc.).

The vector control with encoder needs the accessory for the incremental encoder interface ENC-01 or ENC-02.

For more details on the installation and connection, refer to the optional board manual.

Vector Control

11-4

DC Link Regulator

Maximum Output

Voltage Regulator

AIx = 2 – Max. Torque Current

P0185<Default Value

P0185=Default Value

Gp = P0186

Gi = P0187

P0185

Speed Regulator

Flux Regulator

Total

Reference

(refer to the

figure 13.8)

Gp = P0161

Gi = P0162 Gp = P0167

Gi = P0168

Usd*

Flux Current

Torque Current

PWM

Usq*

Current Regulator

Iq*

Id*

P0179

Gp = P0175

Gi = P0176

Gd = P0166

Gp = 1.00

Gi = 0.00

DIx = 15 (Speed/Torque)

R.T.=OFF

R.T. = On

(refer to the

figure 12.8)

MaxCW = P0169

MaxCCW = P0170

Iv, Iw

TRANSF.

Gp = P0188

Gi = P0189

Usq ,Usd

P0190 Imr*

12ms

P0405 = PPRP0165

Measured Speed

PPR

Encorder

Im: magnetizing

current

Imr

Torque

Speed

Figure 11.2 - Vector with encoder control block diagram

11-5

Vector Control

11.2 I/F MODE (SENSORLESS)

NOTE!

It is activated automatically at low speeds if P0182>3 and when the Control Mode is Sensorless

Vector (P0202=3).

The operation at the low speed region may present instability. In this region the motor operation voltage is also

very low, being difficult to be measured accurately.

In order to keep a stable operation of the inverter in that region, the automatic commutation occurs, from

sensorless mode to the so called I/f mode, which is a scalar control with imposed current. Scalar control with

imposed current means a current control with a constant reference value, adjusted in a parameter and controlling

only the frequency in an open loop.

The parameter P0182 defines the speed below which the transition to I/f mode occurs and the parameter P0183

defines the value of the current to be applied to the motor.

The minimum speed recommended for the operation of the Sensorless Vector Mode is 18 rpm for 60 Hz IV pole

motors,and15rpmfor50HzIVpolemotors.IfP0182≤3rpmtheinverterwillalwaysoperateinSensorless

Vector mode, i.e., the I/f function will be disabled.

11.3 SELF-TUNING

Some motor parameters that are not available on the motor nameplate, necessary for the operation of the

sensorless vector or vector with encoder control, are estimated: stator resistance, motor flux leakage inductance,

rotor time constant Tr , the rated magnetizing current of the motor and the mechanic time constant of the motor and

the driven load. These parameters are estimated with the application of voltages and currents to the motor.

The parameters related to the regulators used by the vector control, as well as other control parameters, are

adjusted automatically in function of the motor parameters estimated through the self-tuning routine. The best

self-tuning results are obtained with a preheated motor.

The parameter P0408 controls the self-tuning routine. Depending on the chosen option some parameters can

be obtained from tables that are valid for WEG motors.

In the option P0408=1 (No Rotation) the motor remains stopped throughout the self-tuning. The magnetizing

current value (P0410) is obtained from a table, valid for WEG motors up to 12 poles.

In the option P0408=2 (Run for Im) the value of P0410 is estimated with the motor rotating and the load

decoupled from the motor shaft.

In the option P0408=3 (Run for Tm) the value of P0413 (Mechanic time constant – Tm) is estimated with the

motor rotating. It must be done, preferably, with the load coupled to the motor.

Vector Control

11-6

NOTE!

Every time that P0408=1 or 2 the parameter P0413 (Mechanic time constant – Tm) will be adjusted

for a value close to the motor rotor mechanic time constant. Therefore, the motor rotor inertia (table

data valid for WEG motors), the inverter rated voltage and current, are taken into consideration

P0408=2 (Run for Im) in the vector with encoder mode (P0202=4): After finishing the self-tuning

routine, couple the load to the motor and set P0408=4 (Estimate Tm). In this case P0413 will be

estimated taking into account also the driven load.

If the option P0408=2 (Run for Im) is executed with the load coupled to the motor, an incorrect value

of P0410 (Im) may be estimated. This will implicate in estimation error for P0412 (rotor time constant

- Tr) and for P0413 (mechanic time constant – Tm). Overcurrent fault (F071) may also occur during

the inverter operation.

Note: The term “load” includes everything that might be coupled to the motor shaft, for instance,

gearbox, inertia disk, etc.

In the option P0408=4 (Estimate Tm) the self-tuning routine estimates only the P0413 (Mechanic

time constant – Tm) value, with the motor rotating. It must be done, preferably, with the load coupled

to the motor.

During its execution, the self-tuning routine can be canceled by pressing the key, provided that

the values of P0409 through P0413 be all different from zero.

For more details on the self-tuning parameters, refer to the section 11.8.5 in this manual.

Alternatives for the acquisition of the motor parameters:

Instead of running the self-tuning, it is possible to obtain the values for P0409 to P0412 in the following

manner:

- From the motor test data sheet that can be supplied by its manufacturer. Refer to the section 11.7 of this

manual.

- Manually, by copying the contents of the parameters from another CFW-11 inverter that uses an identical

motor.

11.4 OPTIMAL FLUX FOR SENSORLESS VECTOR CONTROL

NOTE!

Active function only on the Sensorless Vector mode (P0202=3), if P0406=2.

The Optimal Flux function can be used for driving some types of WEG motors (*) making it possible the operation

at low speed with rated torque without the need of forced ventilation on the motor. The frequency range for

operation is 12:1, i.e., from 5 Hz to 60 Hz for 60 Hz rated frequency motors and from 4.2 Hz to 50 Hz for

50 Hz rated frequency motors.

NOTE!

(*) WEG motors that can be used with the Optimal Flux function: Nema Premium Efficiency, Nema

High Efficiency, IEC Premium Efficiency, IEC Top Premium Efficiency and “Alto Rendimento Plus”.

11-7

Vector Control

When this function is activating, the motor flux is controlled in a way to reduce their electric losses on slow

speeds. That flux is dependent of the torque current filtered (P0009). The Optimal Flux function is unnecessary

in motors with independent ventilation.

11.5 TORQUE CONTROL

In vector control modes sensorless or with encoder, it is possible to use the inverter in torque control mode

instead of using it in speed control mode. In this case the speed regulator must be kept saturated and the

imposed torque value is defined by the torque limits in P0169/P0170.

Performance of the torque control:

Vector control with encoder:

Torque control range: 10 % to 180 %;

Accuracy: ± 5 % of the rated torque.

Sensorless vector control:

Torque control range: 20 % to 180 %;

Accuracy: ± 10 % of the rated torque;

Minimum operating frequency: 3 Hz.

When the speed regulator is positively saturated, i.e., forward speed direction defined in P0223/P0226, the

value for the torque current limitation is adjusted in P0169. When the speed regulator is negatively saturated,

i.e., reverse speed direction, the value for the torque current limitation is adjusted in P0170.

The torque at the motor shaft (Tmotor) in % is given by the formula:

(*) The formula described next must be used for Forward Torque. For Reverse Torque replace P0169 by

P0170.

P0401 x P0169* x K

100

(P0401) 2 - P0410 x P0178 2

100

x 100

Tmotor =

Being:

Nnom = motor synchronous speed,

N = actual motor speed

K =

1 for N ≤ P0190 x Nnom

P0400

Nnom x P0190 for N > P0190 x Nnom

N P0400 P0400

Vector Control

11-8

NOTE!

For torque control in the sensorless vector mode (P0202=3), observe:

- The torque limits (P0169/P0170) must be higher than 30 % to assure the motor starting. After the start

and with the motor rotating above 3 Hz, they can be reduced, if necessary, to values below 30 %.

- For torque control applications with frequencies until to 0 Hz, use the vector with encoder control

mode (P0202=4).

- In the vector with encoder control type set the speed regulator for the mode “optimized for torque

control” (P0160=1), besides keeping it saturated.

NOTE!

The motor rated current must be equivalent to the CFW-11 rated current, in order that the torque

control has the best possible accuracy.

Settings for the torque control:

Torque limitation:

1. Via parameters P0169, P0170 (through the keypad (HMI), Serial or Fieldbus). Refer to the section

11.8.6;

2. Through the analog inputs AI1, AI2, AI3 or AI4. Refer to the section 13.1.1, option 2 (maximum torque

current).

Speed reference:

3. Set the speed reference 10 %, or more, higher than the working speed. This assures that the speed

regulator output remains saturated at the maximum value allowed by the torque limit adjustment.

NOTE!

The torque limitation with the saturated speed regulator has also a protection (limitation) function.

E.g.: for a winder, when the material being wound brakes, the regulator leaves the saturated condition

and starts controlling the motor speed, which will be kept at the speed reference value.

11.6 OPTIMAL BRAKING

NOTE!

Only activated on the Vector with Encoder mode (P0202=3 or 4), when P0184=0, P0185 is smaller

than the standard value and P0404 < 21 (75 CV).

NOTE!

The occurrence of optimal braking may cause at the motor:

- Increase of the vibration level;

- Increase of the acoustic noise;

- Increase of the temperature.

Verify the impact of those effects in the application before using the optimal braking.

It is a function that helps the motor controlled braking, eliminating in many cases the need of additional braking

IGBT and braking resistor.

The Optimal Braking makes it possible braking the motor with a higher torque than the one obtained with

traditional methods, as for instance, the braking by the injection of direct current (DC braking). In the DC

braking case, only the losses in the motor rotor are used to dissipate the energy stored as the mechanic load

11-9

Vector Control

inertia, rejecting the total friction losses. With the Optimal Braking, in the other hand, the total losses in the

motor, as well as the total inverter losses, are used. It is possible to get a braking torque roughly 5 times greater

than with DC braking.

In the figure 11.3 the Torque x Speed curve of a typical 10 hp/7.5 kW IV pole motor is presented. The braking

torque obtained at the rated speed, for an inverter with a torque limit (P0169 and P0170) adjusted in a value equal

to the motor rated torque, is supplied by the TB1 point on the figure 11.3. The value of TB1 is on the function

of the motor efficiency, and it is defined by the following expression, being despised the attrition losses:

TB1 = 1-η

Where:

η = motor efficiency

In the 11.3 figure case, the efficiency of the motor for the rated load is η=0.84 (or 84 %), which results in

TB1=0.19 or 19 % of the motor rated torque.

The braking torque, starting from the TB1 point, varies in the inverse ratio of the speed (1/N). At low speeds,

the braking torque reaches the torque limit of the inverter. In the figure 11.3 case, the torque reaches the torque

limitation (100 %) when the speed is less than approximately 20 % of the rated speed.

It is possible to increase the braking torque by increasing the inverter current limitation during the optimal

braking (P0169) – torque in the forward speed direction or P0170 – reverse).

Generally smaller motors have lower efficiency because they present more losses. Therefore, comparatively

higher braking torque is obtained if they are compared to bigger motors.

Examples: 1 hp/0.75 kW, IV poles: η=0.76 resulting in TB1=0.32;

20 hp/15.0 kW, IV poles: η=0.86 resulting in TB1=0.16.

Tnom

Nnom

TB1

1.0

00.2 1.0 2.0

(c)

(b)

(a)

Figure 11.3 - T x N curve for Optimal Braking with a typical 10 hp/7.5 kW motor, driven by an

inverter with the torque adjusted at a value equal to the motor rated torque

Vector Control

11-10

(a) Torque generated by the motor in normal operation, driven by the inverter in the “motor mode” (load

resistant torque).

(b) Braking torque generated by the Optimal Braking use.

In order to use the Optimal Braking:

(a) Activate the optimal braking by setting P0184=0 (DC Link Regulation Mode=with losses) and set the DC

link regulation level in P0185, as presented in the section 11.8.7, with P0202=3 or 4 and P0404 smaller

than 21 (75hp).

(b) In order to enable and disable the Optimal Braking via a digital input, set one of the inputs (DIx) for “DC

Link Regulation”. (P0263…P0270=25 and P0184=2).

Results:

DIx=24 V (closed): Optimal Braking is active, equivalent to P0184=0.

DIx=0 V (open): Optimal Braking is inactive.

11.7 MOTOR DATA [43]

In this group are listed the parameters for the setting of the used motor data. Adjust them according to the

motor nameplate data (P0398 to P0406), except P0405, and by means of the self-tuning routine or with the

data existent in the motor data sheet (the other parameters). In the Vector Control mode the parameters P0399

and P0407 are not used.

P0398 – Motor Service Factor

Adjustable

Range:

1.00 to 1.50 Factory

Setting:

1.00

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

43 Motor Data

Description:

It is the continuous overload capability, i.e., a reserve of power that gives the motor the capability to withstand

working in adverse conditions.

Set it according to the value informed on the motor nameplate.

It affects the motor overload protection.

P0399 – Motor Rated Efficiency

Refer to the section 10.2 for more details.

11-11

Vector Control

P0400 – Motor Rated Voltage

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 690 V Factory

Setting:

220 V (P0296=0)

440 V (P0296=1, 2, 3 or 4)

575 V (P0296=5 or 6)

690 V (P0296=7 or 8)

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

43 Motor Data

Description:

Set it according to the motor nameplate data and to the motor cable wiring in the connection box.

This value cannot be higher than the rated voltage adjusted in P0296 (Line Rated Voltage).

NOTE!

In order to validate a new P0400 setting out of the Oriented Start-up Routine it is necessary to

cycle the power of the inverter.

P0401 – Motor Rated Current

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 1.3xInom-ND Factory

Setting:

1.0xInom-ND

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

43 Motor Data

Description:

Set it according to the used motor nameplate data, taking into consideration the motor voltage.

In the Guided Start-up routine the value adjusted in P0401 automatically modifies the parameters related to the

motor overload protection, according to the table 11.2.

P0402 – Motor Rated Speed

Adjustable 0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

1750 rpm

(1458 rpm)

Range: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

43 Motor Data

Description:

Set it according to the used motor nameplate data.

For V/f and VVW controls the setting is from 0 to 18000 rpm.

For vector control the setting is from 0 to 7200 rpm.

Vector Control

11-12

P0403 – Motor Rated Frequency

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 300 Hz Factory

Setting:

60 Hz

(50 Hz)

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

43 Motor Data

Description:

Set it according to the used motor nameplate data.

For V/f and VVW controls the setting range goes up to 300 Hz.

For vector control the setting range is from 30 Hz to 120 Hz.

P0404 – Motor Rated Power

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 58 (refer to the next table) Factory

Setting:

Motormax-ND

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

43 Motor Data

Description:

Set it according to the used motor nameplate data.

11-13

Vector Control

Table 11.1 - P0404 (Motor Rated Power) setting

P0404 Motor Rated

Power (hp) P0404 Motor Rated

Power (hp)

0 0.33 30 270.0

1 0.50 31 300.0

2 0.75 32 350.0

3 1.0 33 380.0

4 1.5 34 400.0

5 2.0 35 430.0

6 3.0 36 440.0

7 4.0 37 450.0

8 5.0 38 475.0

9 5.5 39 500.0

10 6.0 40 540.0

11 7.5 41 600.0

12 10.0 42 620.0

13 12.5 43 670.0

14 15.0 44 700.0

15 20.0 45 760.0

16 25.0 46 800.0

17 30.0 47 850.0

18 40.0 48 900.0

19 50.0 49 1000.0

20 60.0 50 1100.0

21 75.0 51 1250.0

22 100.0 52 1400.0

23 125.0 53 1500.0

24 150.0 54 1600.0

25 175.0 55 1800.0

26 180.0 56 2000.0

27 200.0 57 2300.0

28 220.0 58 2500.0

29 250.0

NOTE!

When adjusted via keypad (HMI), this parameter may change the parameter P0329 automatically.

Refer to the section 12.7.2.

P0405 – Number of Encoder Pulses

Adjustable

Range:

100 to 9999 ppr Factory

Setting:

1024 ppr

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

43 Motor Data

Description:

It sets the number of pulses per rotation (ppr) of the used incremental encoder.

Vector Control

11-14

P0406 – Motor Ventilation

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Self-Ventilated

1 = Separate Ventilation

2 = Optimal Flux

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

43 Motor Data

Description:

During the Oriented Start-up Routine, the value adjusted in P0406 changes the parameters related to the motor

overload automatically, in the following manner:

Table 11.2 - Motor overload protection modification in function of P0406

P0406 P0156 (Overl.Curr.100 %) P0157 (Overl.Curr.50 %) P0158 (Overl.Curr.5 %)

0 1.05xP0401 0.9xP0401 0.5xP0401

1 1.05xP0401 1.0xP0401 1.0xP0401

2 1.05xP0401 1.0xP0401 1.0xP0401

ATTENTION!

Refer to the section 11.4 for more details on the use of option P0406=2 (Optimal Flux).

P0407 – Motor Rated Power Factor

Refer to the section 10.2 for more details.

P0408 – Run Self-Tuning

P0409 – Motor Stator Resistance (Rs)

P0410 – Motor Magnetizing Current (Im)

P0411 – Motor Flux Leakage Inductance (σls)

P0412 – Lr/Rr Constant (Rotor Time Constant – Tr)

P0413 – Tm Constant (Mechanical Time Constant)

Self-Tuning function parameters. Refer to the section 11.8.5.

11.7.1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data

Sheet

Being in the possession of the motor equivalent circuit data, it is possible to calculate the value to be programmed

in the parameters from P0409 to P0412, instead of using the self-tuning to obtain them.

11-15

Vector Control

Input data:

Motor data sheet:

Vn = voltage used in the tests to obtain the motor parameters, in Volts;

fn = frequency used in the tests to obtain the motor parameters, in Hz;

R1= resistance of the motor stator per phase, in Ohms;

R2 = resistance of the motor rotor per phase, in Ohms;

X1 = stator inductive reactance, in Ohms;

X2 = rotor inductive reactance, in Ohms;

Xm = magnetizing inductive reactance, in Ohms;

Io = motor no load current;

ω = angular speed.

ω=2xπxfn

P0409 = P0400 x R1

P0410 = Vn x Io x 0.95

P0400

P0411 = P0400 x [X1 +(X2 x Xm)/(X2 + Xm)]

Vn x ω

P0412 = P0400 x (Xm + X2)

Vn x ω x R2

11.8 VECTOR CONTROL [29]

11.8.1 Speed Regulator [90]

The parameters related to the CFW-11 speed regulator are presented in this group.

P0160 – Speed Regulator Optimization

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Normal

1 = Saturated

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG and Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

90 Speed Regulator

Description:

Set P0160=1 (Saturated) for torque control in vector mode with encoder. For more details refer to the section 11.5

in this manual.

Vector Control

11-16

P0161 – Speed Regulator Proportional Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 63.9 Factory

Setting:

7.4

P0162 – Speed Regulator Integral Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 9.999 Factory

Setting:

0.023

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

90 Speed Regulator

Description:

The speed regulator gains are calculated automatically in function of the parameter P0413 (Tm constant).

However, these gains can be adjusted manually in order to optimize the speed dynamic response, which becomes

faster with their increase. Yet, if the speed begins to oscillate, they must be reduced.

In a general manner, one can say that the Proportional gain (P0161) stabilizes abrupt speed or reference changes,

while the Integral gain (P0162) corrects the error between the reference and the speed, and improves the torque

response at low speeds as well.

Procedure for Manual Optimization of the Speed Regulator:

1. Select the acceleration (P0100) and/or deceleration (P0101) time according to the application.

2. Adjust the speed reference for 75 % of the maximum value.

3. Configure an analog output (AOx) for Real Speed, by programming P0251, P0254, P0257 or P0260 in 2.

4. Disable the speed ramp (Run/Stop=Stop) and wait until the motor stops.

5. Enable the speed ramp (Run/Stop=Run). Observe with an oscilloscope the motor speed signal at the chosen

analog output.

6. Verify among the options of the figure 11.4, which waveform best represents the observed signal.

t (s)

b) Optimized speed

regulator

N(V) N(V) N(V)

t (s) t (s)

a) Integral Gain – P0162 small and/

or Proportional Gain – P0161 high.

c)Integral Gain – P0162 high and/or

Proportional Gain – P0161 small.

Figure 11.4 - Speed regulators response types

7. Adjust P0161 and P0162 according to the response type presented in the figure 11.4.

a) Increase the proportional gain (P0161) and/or increase the integral gain (P0162);

b) Speed regulator is optimized;

c) Reduce the proportional and/or integral gain.

11-17

Vector Control

P0163 – Local Reference Offset

P0164 – Remote Reference Offset

Adjustable

Range:

-999 to 999 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

90 Speed Regulator

Description:

It adjusts the analog inputs (AIx) speed reference offset. Refer to the figure 13.2.

P0165 – Speed Filter

Adjustable

Range:

0.012 to 1.000 s Factory

Setting:

0.012 s

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

90 Speed Regulator

Description:

It adjusts the speed filter time constant. Refer to the figure 13.2.

NOTE!

Generally, this parameter must not be changed. The increment in its value turns the system response

slower.

P0166 – Speed Regulator Differential Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.00 to 7.99 Factory

Setting:

0.00

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

90 Speed Regulator

Vector Control

11-18

Description:

The differential action may minimize the effects of the application or removal of load, in the motor speed. Refer to

the figure 11.2.

Table 11.3 - Differential gain action in the speed regulator

P0166 Differential gain actuation

0.00 Inactive

0.01 a 7.99 Active

11.8.2 Current Regulator [91]

The parameters related to the CFW-11 current regulator are presented in this group.

P0167 – Current Regulator Proportional Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.00 to 1.99 Factory

Setting:

0.50

P0168 – Current Regulator Integral Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 1.999 Factory

Setting:

0.010

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

91 Current Regulator

Description:

These parameters are adjusted automatically in function of the parameters P0411 and P0409.

NOTE!

Do not modify these parameters.

11.8.3 Flux Regulator [92]

The parameters related to the CFW-11 flux regulator are presented next.

P0175 – Flux Regulator Proportional Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 31.9 Factory

Setting:

2.0

11-19

Vector Control

P0176 – Flux Regulator Integral Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 9.999 Factory

Setting:

0.020

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

92 Flux Regulator

Description:

These parameters are adjusted automatically in function of the parameter P0412. In general, the automatic setting

is sufficient and the readjustment is not necessary.

These gains must only be readjusted manually when the flux current signal (Id*) is unstable (oscillating) and

compromising the system operation.

NOTE!

For gains in P0175>12.0 the flux current (Id*) may become unstable.

Note:

(Id*) is observed at the analog outputs AO3 and/or AO4, by setting P0257=22 and/or P0260=22.

P0178 – Rated Flux

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 120 % Factory

Setting:

100 %

P0179 – Maximum Flux

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 120 % Factory

Setting:

120 %

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

92 Flux Regulator

Description:

The parameter P0178 is the flux reference, while the parameter P0179 defines the maximum value for the flux

(magnetization) current.

NOTE!

These parameters must not be modified.

Vector Control

11-20

P0181 – Magnetization Mode

Adjustable

Range:

0 = General Enable

1 = Run/Stop

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG and Encoder

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

92 Flux Regulator

Description:

Table 11.4 - Magnetization Mode

P0181 Action

0 = General Enable Applies magnetizing current after General Enabling = ON

1 = Run/Stop Applies magnetizing current after Run/Stop = Run

In the sensorless vector control mode, the magnetizing current is permanently active. In order to disable it when

the motor is stopped, a digital input programmed for General Enabling can be used. There is also the possibility

of programming P0217 in 1 (active). Refer to the section 12.6. Besides this, a delay for disabling the magnetizing

current can be set by programming P0219 bigger than zero.

P0188 – Proportional Gain of the Maximum Output Voltage Regulator

P0189 – Integral Gain of the Maximum Output Voltage Regulator

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 7.999 Factory

Setting:

P0188=0.200

P0189=0.001

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

92 Flux Regulator

Description:

These parameters adjust the maximum output voltage regulator gains. In general the factory setting is adequate for

the majority of the applications.

P0190 – Maximum Output Voltage

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 690 V Factory

Setting:

0.95 x P0296.

Automatic setting

during the Oriented

Start-up Routine:

0.95 x P0400.

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

92 Flux Regulator

11-21

Vector Control

Description:

This parameter defines the value of the maximum output voltage. Its standard value is defined in the condition of

the nominal supply voltage.

The voltage reference used in the regulator "Maximum output voltage" (see the illustration 11.1 or 11.2) is directly

proportional to the voltage supply.

If this voltage increases, the output voltage will then be able to increase to the adjusted value in the parameter

P0400 - Nominal Motor Voltage.

If the voltage supply decreases, the maximum output voltage will decrease in the same proportion.

11.8.4 I/f Control [93]

P0182 – Speed for I/f Control Actuation

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 90 rpm Factory

Setting:

18 rpm

Proprieties: Sless

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

93 I/F Control

Description:

It defines the speed below witch the transition form the sensorless to the control I/f occurs.

The minimum recommended speed for the sensorless vector control operation is 18 rpm for 60 Hz rated frequency

IV pole motors and 15 rpm for 50 Hz rated frequency IV pole motors.

NOTE!

For P0182≤3 rpm the I/f function will be disabled and the inverter will remain always in the

sensorless vector mode.

P0183 – Current in the I/f Mode

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 9 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: Sless

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

93 I/F Control

Vector Control

11-22

Description:

It defines the current to be applied to the motor when the inverter is operating in the I/f mode, i.e., with the motor

speed below the value defined by P0182.

Table 11.5 - Current applied in the I/f mode

P0183 Current in the I/f mode as a percentage of P0410 (Im)

0 100 %

1 111 %

2 122 %

3 133 %

4 144 %

5 155 %

6 166 %

7 177 %

8 188 %

9 200 %

11.8.5 Self-Tuning [05] and [94]

In that group are the parameters that are related to the motor and can be estimated by the inverter during

the self-tuning routine.

P0408 – Run Self-Tuning

Adjustable

Range:

0 = No

1 = No Rotation

2 = Run for Im

3 = Run for Tm

4 = Estimate Tm

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG, Vector and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF-TUNING

29 Vector Control or

94 Self-tuning

Description:

By changing from the factory setting to one of the 4 available options, it is possible to estimate the value of the

parameters related to the motor being used. Refer to the next description for more details on each option.

Table 11.6 - Self-tuning options

P0408 Self-tuning Control Type Estimate Parameters

0 No - –

1 No Rotation Sensorless vector, with encoder or VVW P0409, P0410, P0411,

P0412 e P0413

2Run for ImSensorless vector or with encoder

3Run for TmVector with encoder

4Estimate TmVector with encoder P0413

P0408=1 – No rotation: The motor stands still during the self-tuning. The P0410 value is obtained from a

table, valid for WEG motors up to 12 poles.

NOTE!

ThereforeP0410mustbeequaltozerobeforeinitiatingtheself-tuning.IfP0410≠0,theself-tuning

routine will keep the existent value.

11-23

Vector Control

Note: When using another brand of motor P0410 must be adjusted with the adequate value (no load motor

current) before initiating the self-tuning.

P0408=2 Run for Im: The P0410 value is estimated with the motor rotating. It must be executed without load

coupled to the motor. P0409, P0411 to P0413 are estimated with the motor standing still.

ATTENTION!

If the option P0408=2 (Run for Im) is performed with the load coupled to the motor, an incorrect value

of P0410 (Im) may be estimated. This will implicate in estimation error for P0412 (rotor time constant

- Tr) and for P0413 (mechanic time constant – Tm). Overcurrent fault (F071) may also occur during

the inverter operation.

Note: The term “load” includes everything that might be coupled to the motor shaft, for instance,

gearbox, inertia disk, etc.

P0408=3 Run for Tm: The value of P0413 (Mechanic time constant – Tm) is estimated, with the motor

rotating. It must be done, preferably, with the load coupled to the motor. P0409 to P0412 are estimated

with the motor standing still and P0410 is estimated in the same manner as with P0408=1.

P0408=4 – Estimate Tm: it estimates only the P0413 (Mechanic time constant – Tm) value, with the

motor rotating. It must be done, preferably, with the load coupled to the motor.

NOTES!

 Every time that P0408=1 or 2:

The parameter P0413 (Mechanic time constant – Tm) will be adjusted to a value close to the motor

mechanic time constant. Therefore, the motor rotor inertia (table data valid for WEG motors), the

inverter rated voltage and current are taken into consideration.

 Vector mode with encoder (P0202=4):

When using P0408=2 (Run for Im), one must, after finishing the self-tuning routine, couple the load

to the motor and set P0408=4 (Estimate Tm) in order to estimate the value of P0413. In this case

P0413 will also consider the driven load.

 VVW mode – Voltage Vector WEG (P0202=5):

In the VVW control self-tuning routine only the value of the stator resistance (P0409) will be obtained.

Therefore, the self-tuning will always be performed without rotating the motor.

 Better self-tuning results are obtained with the motor warm.

P0409 – Motor Stator Resistance (Rs)

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 9.999 ohm Factory

Setting:

0.000 ohm

Proprieties: CFG, Vector and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF-TUNING

29 Vector Control or

94 Self-tuning

Vector Control

11-24

Description:

It is the value estimated by the self-tuning.

NOTE!

The P0409 setting determines the value of the current regulator integral gain P0168. The parameter

P0168 is recalculated every time the content of P0409 is modified via keypad (HMI).

P0410 – Motor Magnetizing Current (Im)

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 1.25 x Inom-ND Factory

Setting:

Inom-ND

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF-TUNING

29 Vector Control or

94 Self-tuning

Description:

It is the motor magnetizing current value.

It can be estimated by the self-tuning routine when P0408=2 (Run for Im) or obtained from an internal table based

in standard WEG motors, when P0408=1 (No rotation).

When a standard WEG motor is not used and it is not possible to run the self-tuning with P0408=2 (Run for Im), then

adjust P0410 with a value equal to the motor no load current, before initiating the self-tuning.

For P0202=4 (vector mode with encoder), the value P0410 determines the motor flux, therefore it must be properly

adjusted. If it is low, the motor will operate with a reduced flux compared to the rated condition, having, consequently,

its torque capability reduced.

P0411 – Motor Flux Leakage Inductance (σls)

Adjustable

Range:

0.00 to 99.99 mH Factory

Setting:

0.00 mH

Proprieties: CFG and Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF-TUNING

29 Vector Control or

94 Self-tuning

Description:

It is the value estimated by the self-tuning.

The P0411 setting determines the current regulator proportional gain.

NOTE!

When adjusted via the keypad (HMI), this parameter may change the parameter P0167 automatically.

11-25

Vector Control

P0412 – Lr/Rr Constant (Rotor Time Constant – Tr)

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 9.999 s Factory

Setting:

0.000 s

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF-TUNING

29 Vector Control or

94 Self-tuning

Description:

The P0412 setting determines the flux regulator gains (P0175 and P0176).

The value of this parameter interferes in the speed accuracy in the sensorless vector control.

Normally the self-tuning is performed with the motor cold. Depending on the motor, the P0412 value may vary

more or less with the motor temperature. Thus, for the sensorless vector control and normal operation with the

motor warm, P0412 must be adjusted until the speed of the motor with load (measured at the motor shaft with a

tachometer) stays equal to that one indicated on the keypad (HMI) (P0001).

This adjustment must be performed with half the rated speed.

For P0202=4 (vector with encoder), if P0412 is incorrect, the motor will loose torque. Thus, one must adjust P0412

so that at half the rated speed, and with stable load, the motor current (P0003) stays the lowest possible.

In the sensorless vector control mode the P0175 gain, provided by the self-tuning, will be limited in the range:

3.0≤P0175≤8.0.

Table 11.7 - Typical rotor constant (Tr) values for WEG motors

Motor Power (hp) / (kW)

Tr (s)

Number of Poles

2 (50 Hz/60 Hz) 4 (50 Hz/60 Hz) 6 (50 Hz/60 Hz) 8 (50 Hz/60 Hz)

2 / 1.5 0.19 / 0.14 0.13 / 0.14 0.1 / 0.1 0.07 / 0.07

5 / 3.7 0.29 / 0.29 0.18 / 0.12 - / 0.14 0.14 / 0.11

10 / 7.5 - / 0.38 0.32 / 0.25 0.21 / 0.15 0.13 / 0.14

15 / 11 0.52 / 0.36 0.30 / 0.25 0.20 / 0.22 0.28 / 0.22

20 / 15 0.49 / 0.51 0.27 / 0.29 0.38 / 0.2 0.21 / 0.24

30 / 22 0.70 / 0.55 0.37 / 0.34 0.35 / 0.37 - / 0.38

50 / 37 - / 0.84 0.55 / 0.54 0.62 / 0.57 0.31 / 0.32

100 / 75 1.64 / 1.08 1.32 / 0.69 0.84 / 0.64 0.70 / 0.56

150 / 110 1.33 / 1.74 1.05 / 1.01 0.71 / 0.67 - / 0.67

200 / 150 - / 1.92 - / 0.95 - / 0.65 - / 1.03

300 / 220 - / 2.97 1.96 / 2.97 1.33 / 1.30 - / -

350 / 250 - / - 1.86 / 1.85 - / 1.53 - / -

500 / 375 - / - - / 1.87 - / - - / -

NOTE!

When adjusted via the keypad (HMI), this parameter may change automatically the following

parameters: P0175, P0176, P0327 and P0328.

Vector Control

11-26

P0413 – Tm Constant (Mechanical Time Constant)

Adjustable

Range:

0.00 to 99.99 s Factory

Setting:

0.00 s

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF-TUNING

29 Vector Control or

94 Self-tuning

Description:

The P0413 setting determines the speed regulator gains (P0161 and P0162).

When P0408=1 or 2, it must be observed:

If P0413=0, the time constant Tm will be obtained in function of the inertia of the programmed motor

(table value);

If P0413>0, the value of P0413 will not be changed by the self-tuning.

Sensorless vector control (P0202=3):

When the P0413 value obtained through the self-tuning provides inadequate speed regulator gains (P0161

and P0162), it is possible to change them by setting P0413 via keypad (HMI);

The P0161 gain provided by the self-tuning or through P0413 change, will be limited to the range:

6.0≤P0161≤9.0;

The P0162 value varies in function of the P0161 value;

In case it be necessary to increase even more these gains, they must be adjusted directly at P0161 and

P0162.

Note: Values of P0161>12.0 may turn the torque current (Iq) and the motor speed unstable (oscillating).

Vector control with encoder (P0202=4):

The P0413 value is estimated by the self-tuning when P0408=3 or 4.

The measurement procedure consists in accelerating the motor up to 50% of the rated speed, applying a current

step equal to the motor rated current.

In case that it is not possible to submit the load to this type of request, adjust P0413 via keypad (HMI), refer to the

section 11.8.1.

11.8.6 Torque Current Limitation [95]

The parameters placed in this group define the torque limitation values.

P0169 – Maximum Forward Torque Current

P0170 – Maximum Reverse Torque Current

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 650.0 % Factory

Setting:

125.0 %

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

95 Torque Curr.Limit

11-27

Vector Control

Description:

These parameters limit the motor current component responsible for producing forward torque (P0169) or reverse

(P0170). The setting is expressed in percentage of the motor rated current (P0401).

In case that any Analog Input (AIx) be programmed for the option 2 (Maximum Torque Current), P0169 and P0170

become inactive and the current limitation will be specified by the AIx. In this case the limitation value can be

monitored at the parameter correspondent to the programmed AIx (P0018 … P0021).

In the torque limitation condition the motor current can be calculated by:

+ (P0410)2

P0169 or P0170* x P0401

100

Imotor=

The maximum torque developed by the motor is given by:

Tmotor(%)=

P0401 x P0169(*) or P0170 x K

100

x100

(P0401)2 - P0410 x P0178 2

100

Where:

Nnom = motor synchronous speed,

N = actual motor speed

K =

1forN≤P0190 x Nnom

P0400

Nnom x P0190 for N > P0190 x Nnom

N P0400 P0400

(*) In case that the current limitation be provided by an analog input, replace P0169 or P0170 by P0018 or

P0019, or, P0020 or P0021, according to the programmed AIx. For more details refer to the section 13.1.1.

P0171 – Maximum Forward Torque Current at Maximum Speed

P0172 – Maximum Reverse Torque Current at Maximum Speed

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 650.0 % Factory

Setting:

125.0 %

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

95 Torque Curr.Limit

Vector Control

11-28

Description:

Torque current limitation in function of the speed:

Torque current limitation

P0170/P0169

P0172/P0171

P0173 = 0

P0173 = 1

Synchronous speed x P0190

P0400

P0134 n

Figure 11.5 - Torque limitation actuation curve at maximum speed

This function stays inactive when the contents of P0171/P0172 are higher or equal to the contents of P0169/

P0170.

P0171 and P0172 do also act during optimal braking limiting the maximum output current.

P0173 – Maximum Torque Curve Type

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Ramp

1 = Step

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

95 Torque Curr.Limit

Description:

It defines how the actuation of the torque limitation curve will be at the field weakening region. Refer to the figure

11.5.

11.8.7 DC Link Regulator [96]

For the deceleration of high inertia loads with short deceleration times, the CFW-11 has available the DC Link

Regulation function, which avoids the tripping of the inverter by overvoltage in the DC link (F022).

P0184 – DC Link Regulation Mode

Adjustable

Range:

0 = With losses

1 = Without losses

2 = Enable/Disable DIx

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG and Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

96 DC Link Regulator

11-29

Vector Control

Description:

It enables or disables the Optimal Braking function (section 11.6) in the DC voltage regulation, according to the

next table.

Table 11.8 - DC link regulation modes

P0184 Action

0 = With losses

(Optimal Braking)

The Optimal Braking is active as described at P0185. This assures the minimum possible decelera-

tion time without using dynamic or regenerative braking

1 = Without losses

Automatic control of the deceleration ramp. The Optimal Braking is inactive. The deceleration

ramp is automatically adjusted in order to keep the DC link below the level adjusted in P0185.

This procedure avoids the overvoltage fault at the DC link (F022). It can also be used with eccen-

tric loads

2 = Enable/Disable via DIx

DIx = 24 V: Braking actuates as described for P0184=1

DIx = 0 V: The Without Losses Braking stays inactive. The DC link voltage will be controlled by

the parameter P0153 (Dynamic Braking)

P0185 – DC Link Voltage Regulation Level

Adjustable

Range:

339 to 400 V

585 to 800 V

809 to 1000 V

924 to 1200 V

Factory

Setting:

P0296=0: 400 V

P0296=1: 800 V

P0296=2: 800 V

P0296=3: 800 V

P0296=4: 800 V

P0296=5: 1000 V

P0296=6: 1000 V

P0296=7: 1000 V

P0296=8: 1200 V

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

96 DC Link Regulator

Description:

This parameter defines the DC link voltage regulation level during the braking. During the braking, the time of the

deceleration ramp is automatically extended, thus avoiding an overvoltage fault (F022). The setting of the DC link

regulation can be done in two manners:

1. With loss (optimal break) – set P0184=0.

1.1 - P0404 < 20 (60 hp): In this way the current flux is modulated in a way to increase the losses of the

motor, increasing the break torque. A better operation can be obtained with motors of smaller efficiency

(small motors).

1.2 - P0404>20(60 hp): the current flux will be increased up to the maximum value defined on P0169

or P0170, as the speed is reduced. The break torque in the weakness field area is small.

2. Without losses – set P0184=1. Activates only the DC link voltage regulation.

Vector Control

11-30

NOTE!

The factory setting for P0185 is adjusted at the maximum, which disables the DC link voltage

regulation. In order to activate it, set P0185 according to the table 11.9.

Table 11.9 - DC link voltage regulation recommended levels

Inversor

Vnom

200 ...

240 V 380 V 400 /

415 V

440 /

460 V 480 V 500 /

525 V

550 /

575 V 600 V 660 /

690 V

P0296 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P0185 375 V 618 V 675 V 748 V 780 V 893 V 972 V 972 V 1174 V

P0186 – DC Link Voltage Regulation Proportional Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 63.9 Factory

Setting:

18.0

P0187 – DC Link Voltage Regulation Integral Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 9.999 Factory

Setting:

0.002

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

29 Vector Control

96 DC Link Regulator

Description:

These parameters adjust the DC link voltage regulator gain.

Normally the factory settings are adequate for the majority of the applications, not being necessary to adjust

them.

11.9 START-UP IN THE VECTOR MODES SENSORLESS AND WITH ENCODER

NOTE!

Read the whole CFW-11 User Manual before installing, powering or operating the inverter.

Sequence for installation, verification, powering and start-up:

a) Install the inverter: according to the chapter 3 – Installation and Connection of the CFW-11 User Manual,

wiring all the power and control connections.

b) Prepare the inverter and apply power: according to the section 5.1 of the CFW-11 User Manual.

c) Adjust the password P0000=5: according to the section 5.3 of this manual.

d) Adjust the inverter to operate with the application line and motor: by means of the “Oriented Start-up”

Menu access P0317 and change its content to 1, which makes the inverter initiate the “Oriented Start-up”

routine.

11-31

Vector Control

The “Oriented Start-up” routine presents on the keypad (HMI) the main parameters in a logical sequence. The

setting of these parameters prepares the inverter for operation with the application line and motor. Verify the step

by step sequence in the figure 11.6.

The setting of the parameters presented in this operation mode results in the automatic modification of the content

of other inverter parameters and/or internal variables, as indicated in the figure 11.6. In this way one gets a stable

operation of the control circuit with adequate values to obtain the best motor performance.

During the “Oriented Start-up” routine the “Config” (Configuration) status will be indicated on the top left part of

the keypad (HMI).

Parameters related to the motor:

 Program the contents of parameters from P0398, P0400 to P0406 directly with the motor nameplate

data.

 Options for the setting of parameters P0409 to P0412:

- Automatic, with the inverter executing the self-tuning routine as selected in one of the P0408 options.

- From the motor data sheet supplied by its manufacturer. Refer to the procedure in the section 11.7.1

of this manual.

- Manually, copying the contents of the parameters from another CFW-11 inverter, which uses and identical

motor.

e) Setting of specific parameters and functions for the application: set the digital and analog inputs and

outputs, HMI keys, etc., according to the application needs.

For applications:

 That are simple, which can use the factory settings programming for the digital and analog inputs and

outputs, use the Menu “Basic Application”. Refer to the section 5.2.3 of the CFW-11 User Manual.

 That require only the digital and analog inputs and outputs with programming different from the factory

settings, use the Menu “I/O Configuration”.

 That need functions as Flying Start, Ride-Through, DC Braking, Dynamic Braking, etc., access and modify

those function parameters by means of the Menu “Parameter Groups”.

Vector Control

11-32

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- Monitoring Mode.

- Press “Menu”

(right "soft key").

Ready LOC 0rpm

13:48 Menu

0 rpm

0.0 A

0.0 Hz

- The group “00 ALL

PARAMETERS” is already

selected.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The group “01

PARAMETER GROUPS” is

selected.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The group “02 ORIENTED

START-UP” is then selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Select

00 ALL PARAMETERS

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

02 ORIENTED START-UP

03 CHANGED PARAMETERS

- The parameter

“Oriented Start-up

P0317: No” is already

selected.

- Press “Select”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Select

Oriented Start-up

P0317: No

- The content of “P0317 =

[000] No” is showed.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Save

P0317

Oriented Start-up

[000] No

- The content of the

parameter is changed to

“P0317 = [001] Yes”

- Press “Save”.

Ready LOC 0rpm

Return 13:48 Save

P0317

Oriented Start-up

[001] Yes

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- In this moment the

Oriented Start-up routine is

initiated and the “Config”

status is indicated at the top

left part of the keypad (HMI).

- The parameter “Language

P0201: English” is already

selected.

- If necessary, change

the language by pressing

“Select”, next

and

to select the language and

then press “Save”.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Language

P0201: English

Type of Control

P0202: V/F 60Hz

- Set the content of P0202

pressing “Select”.

-Next press until

selecting the option "[003]

Sensorless or [004]

Encoder". This change resets

the contents of P0410. Then

press “Save”.

- Note that from this moment

on the option “Reset” (left

"soft key") or are no

longer available.

-There are 3 options to leave

the Oriented Start-up:

1.Executing the Self-Tuning;

2.Setting the parameters

P0409 to P0413

manually;

3.Changing P0202 from

vector to scalar control.

Config LOC 0rpm

Reset 13:48 Select

Language

P0201: English

Type of Control

P0202: V/F 60Hz

Figure 11.6 - Vector mode Oriented Start-up

11-33

Vector Control

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- If necessary, change the

content of P0296 according

to the used line voltage.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect

P0151, P0153, P0185,

P0321, P0322, P0323 and

P0400.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Type of Control

P0202: Sensorless

Line Rated Voltage

P0296: 440 - 460 V

- If necessary, change the

content of P0298 according

to the inverter application.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect

P0156, P0157, P0158,

P0169, P0170, P0401

and P0404. The actuation

time and level of the IGBTs

overload protection will also

be affected.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Line Rated Voltage

P0296: 440 - 460 V

Application

P0298: Normal Duty

- If necessary adjust the

content of P0398 according

to the motor service factor.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect the

current value and the time

for the actuation of the

motor overload function.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Application

P0298: Normal Duty

Motor Service Factor

P0398: 1.15

If necessary, change the

content of P0400 according

to the rated motor voltage.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect

P0190.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Motor Service Factor

P0398: 1.15

Motor Rated Voltage

P0400: 440V

- If necessary, change the

content of P0401 according

to the rated motor current.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect

P0156, P0157 and P0158.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Motor Rated Voltage

P0400: 440V

Motor Rated Current

P0401: 13.5 A

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

- If necessary, change the

content of P0402 according

to the rated motor speed.

Therefore press “Select”.

This change will affect

P0122 to P0131, P0133,

P0134, P0182, P0208,

P0288 and P0289.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Motor Rated Current

P0401: 13.5A

Motor Rated Speed

P0402= 1750rpm

- If necessary, change the

content of P0403 according

to the rated motor

frequency. Therefore press

“Select”. This change will

affect P0402.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Motor Rated Speed

P0402: 1750 rpm

Motor Rated Frequency

P0403: 60Hz

- If necessary, change the

content of P0404 according

to the rated motor power.

Therefore press “Select”.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Motor Rated Frequency

P0403: 60Hz

Motor Rated Power

P0404: 7.5hp

- This parameter will only be

visible if the encoder board

ENC1 is connected to the

inverter.

- If there is an encoder

connected to the motor,

change P0405 according

to its number of pulses per

revolution. Therefore press

“Select”.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Motor Rated Power

P0404: 7.5hp

Encoder Pulses Number

P0405: 1024 ppr

- If necessary, change

the content of P0406

according to the type of

motor ventilation. Therefore

press “Select”. This change

will affect P0156, P0157,

P0158, P0399 and P0407.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Encoder Pulses Number

P0405: 1024 ppr

Motor Ventilation

P0406: Self-Vent.

Figure 11.6 - Vector mode Oriented Start-up (cont.)

Vector Control

11-34

Seq. Action/Result Display Indication

At this point, the keypad

(HMI) presents the option to

run the “Self-Tuning”.

Whenever possible the Self-

Tuning must be carried out.

- Thus, press “Select” to

access P0408 and then

to select the

desired option. Refer to the

section 11.8.5 for more

details.

- Next press “Save”.

Config LOC 0rpm

13:48 Select

Motor Ventilation

P0406: Self-Vent.

Run Self-Tuning

P0408: No

- After doing that the Self-

Tuning routine is initiated

and “SelfTun” is indicated

on the top left corner of the

keypad (HMI).

- If the chosen option had

been the option 1, 2 or

3 in P0408, the keypad

(HMI) will present “P0409:

Estimating Rs”.

SelfTun LOC 0rpm

13:48

P0409

Estimating Rs

[001] No Rotation

The keypad (HMI) will also

indicate the estimation of

the parameters P0411,

P0410 and P0412 (if the

option 1, 2 or 3 had been

chosen in P0408).

- When P0408 = 1 or

3 the keypad (HMI) will

not indicate the P0410

estimation.

- When P0408 = 3 or 4 the

keypad (HMI) will indicate

the P0413 estimation.

- Wait until the end of the

Self-Tuning routine.

SelfTun LOC 0rpm

13:48

P0411

Estimating σls

SelfTun LOC 0rpm

13:48

P0410

Estimating Im

SelfTun LOC 0rpm

13:48

P0412

Estimating Tr

SelfTun LOC 0rpm

13:48

P0413

Estimating Tm

Once the Self-Tuning

routine has finished, the

inverter returns to the

monitoring mode.

Ready LOC 0rpm

13:48 Menu

0 rpm

4.0 A

0.0 Hz

Figure 11.6 - Vector mode Oriented Start-up (cont.)

12-1

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

FUNCTIONS COMMON TO ALL THE CONTROL MODES

This section describes the functions that are common to all the CFW-11 inverter control modes (V/f, VVW,

Sensorless, and Encoder).

12.1 RAMPS [20]

The inverter RAMPS functions allow the motor to accelerate and decelerate in a faster or a slower manner.

P0100 – Acceleration Time

P0101 – Deceleration Time

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 999.0 s Factory

Setting:

20.0 s

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

20 Ramps

Description:

These parameters define the time to accelerate (P0100) lineally from 0 to the maximum speed (defined in P0134)

and decelerate (P0101) lineally from the maximum speed down to 0.

Note: The setting 0.0 s means that the ramp is disabled.

P0102 – Acceleration Time 2

P0103 – Deceleration Time 2

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 999.0 s Factory

Setting:

20.0 s

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

20 Ramps

Description:

Those parameters allow a second ramp to be configured for the motor acceleration (P0102) or deceleration

(P0103), which is activated via an external digital command (defined by P0105). Once this command is activated,

the inverter ignores the times of the first ramp (P0100 or P0101) and starts obeying the value adjusted at the second

ramp (Refer the example for external command via DIx showed next in the figure 12.1).

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-2

open

24V

Time

24V

Time

P0102

P0100

DIx -

Run/Stop

2nd ramp DIx

Motor Speed

P0103

P0101

Time

Figure 12.1 - Second ramp actuation

In this example, the commutation to the 2nd ramp (P0102 or P0103) is done by means of one of the digital inputs

from DI1 to DI8, provided that it had been programmed for 2nd ramp function (refer to the section 13.1.3 for more

details).

Note: The setting 0.0 s means that the ramp is disabled.

P0104 – S Ramp

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = 50 %

2 = 100 %

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

20 Ramps

Description:

This parameter allows that the acceleration and deceleration ramps have a nonlinear profile, similar to an “S”, as

showed in the figure 12.2 next.

Deceleration Time

(P0101/P0103)

Acceleration

Time(P0100/P0102)

t (s)

100 % S ramp

50 % S ramp

Linear

Speed

Figure 12.2 - S or linear ramp

The S ramp reduces mechanic shock during accelerations/decelerations.

12-3

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0105 – 1st/2nd Ramp Selection

Adjustable

Range:

0 = 1st Ramp

1 = 2nd Ramp

2 = DIx

3 = Serial/USB

4 = Anybus-CC

5 = CANopen/DeviceNet

6 = SoftPLC

7 = PLC11

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

20 Ramps

Description:

It defines the source of the command that will select between the Ramp 1 and the Ramp 2.

Notes:

“Ramp 1” means that the acceleration and deceleration ramps are following the values programmed in

P0100 and P0101;

“Ramp 2” means that the acceleration and deceleration ramps are following the values programmed in

P0102 and P0103;

It is possible to monitor the set of ramps being used in a defined moment at the parameter P0680 (Logical

status).

12.2 SPEED REFERENCES [21]

This parameter group makes it possible that the reference values for the motor speed and for the functions

JOG, JOG+ and JOG- be established. It is also possible to define if the reference value will be kept when the

inverter is switched off or disabled. For more details refer to the figures 13.8 and 13.9.

P0120 – Speed Reference Backup

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

21 Speed References

Description:

This parameter defines if the speed reference backup function is active or inactive.

If P0120=Off, inactive, then the inverter will not save the speed reference when it is disabled. Thus, when the

inverter is enabled again the speed reference will assume the value of the minimum speed limit (P0133).

This backup function applies to the references via keypad (HMI), E.P., Serial/USB, Anybus-CC, CANopen/DeviceNet,

SoftPLC and PID Setpoint.

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-4

P0121 – Keypad Reference

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

90 rpm

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

21 Speed References

Description:

When the and HMI keys are active (P0221 or P0222=0), this parameter sets the value of the motor

speed reference.

The value of P0121 will be kept with the last adjusted value when the inverter is disabled or powered off, provided

that the parameter P0120 is configured as Active (1).

P0122 – JOG Speed Reference

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

150 rpm

(125 rpm)

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

21 Speed References

Description:

During the JOG command the motor accelerates up to the value defined in P0122 following the adjusted acceleration

ramp.

The source of the JOG command is defined in the parameters P0225 (Local Situation) or P0228 (Remote

Situation).

If the JOG command source has been defined for the digital inputs (DI1 to DI8), one of these inputs must be

programmed as presented in the table 12.1.

Table 12.1 - JOG command via digital input selection

Digital Input Parameters

DI1 P0263=10 (JOG)

DI2 P0264=10 (JOG)

DI3 P0265=10 (JOG)

DI4 P0266=10 (JOG)

DI5 P0267=10 (JOG)

DI6 P0268=10 (JOG)

DI7 P0269=10 (JOG)

DI8 P0270=10 (JOG)

For more details refer to the figure 13.6 (h).

The speed direction is defined by the parameters P0223 or P0226.

The JOG command is effective only with the motor stopped.

For the JOG+ refer to the description below.

12-5

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0122 – JOG + Speed Reference

P0123 – JOG - Speed Reference

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

150 rpm

(125 rpm)

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

21 Speed References

Description:

The JOG+ or JOG- commands are always carried out via digital inputs.

One DIx input must be programmed for JOG+ and another for JOG- as presented in the table 12.2 next:

Table 12.2 - Selection of the JOG+ and JOG- commands via digital inputs

Digital Input Function

JOG+ JOG -

DI1 P0263=16 P0263=17

DI2 P0264=16 P0264=17

DI3 P0265=16 P0265=17

DI4 P0266=16 P0266=17

DI5 P0267=16 P0267=17

DI6 P0268=16 P0268=17

DI7 P0269=16 P0269=17

DI8 P0270=16 P0270=17

During the JOG+ or JOG- commands the values of P0122 and P0123 are, respectively, added or subtracted from

the speed reference to generate the total reference (refer to the figure 13.8).

For the JOG option refer to the previous parameter description.

12.3 SPEED LIMITS [22]

The parameters of this group have the purpose of acting as motor speed limits.

P0132 – Maximum Overspeed Level

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 100 % Factory

Setting:

10 %

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

22 Speed Limits

Description:

This parameter sets the highest speed allowed for the motor to operate, and must be adjusted as a percentage of

the maximum speed limit (P0134).

When the actual speed exceeds the value of P0134 + P0132 longer than 20 ms, the CFW-11 will disable the PWM

pulses and indicate the fault (F150).

In order to disable this function, set P0132=100 %.

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-6

P0133 – Minimum Speed Reference Limit

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

90 rpm

(75 rpm)

P0134 – Maximum Speed Reference Limit

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

1800 rpm

(1500 rpm)

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

22 Speed Limits

Description:

They define the maximum/minimum values for the motor speed reference when the inverter is enabled. They are

valid for any type of reference signal. For details on the actuation of P0133, refer to the parameter P0230 (Dead

Zone of the Analog Inputs).

-10 V

Output speed

Speed Reference

P0134

P0133

-P0133

-P0134

+10 V

P0134

P0133

0 ........................ 100 %

0 ...........................10 V

0 ........................20 mA

4 mA ....................20 mA

10 V .............................0

20 mA ..........................0

20 mA ....................4 mA

Output speed

Speed Reference

Figure 12.3 - Speed limits considering the “Dead Zone” active (P0230=1)

12.4 MULTISPEED [36]

The MULTISPEED function is used when one wishes to have up to 8 predefined fixed speeds, which are commanded

through the digital inputs (DI4, DI5 and DI6).

12-7

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0124 – Multispeed Reference 1

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

90 rpm

(75 rpm)

P0125 – Multispeed Reference 2

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

300 rpm

(250 rpm)

P0126 – Multispeed Reference 3

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

600 rpm

(500 rpm)

P0127 – Multispeed Reference 4

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

900 rpm

(750 rpm)

P0128 – Multispeed Reference 5

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

1200 rpm

(1000 rpm)

P0129 – Multispeed Reference 6

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

1500 rpm

(1250 rpm)

P0130 – Multispeed Reference 7

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

1800 rpm

(1500 rpm)

P0131 – Multispeed Reference 8

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

1650 rpm

(1375 rpm)

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

36 Multispeed

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-8

Description:

The Multispeed brings as advantages the stability of the predefined fixed references, and the immunity against

electric noises (isolated digital inputs DIx).

In order to activate the Multispeed function one must configure the parameter P0221=8 and/or P0222=8

(Reference Selection).

In order to use only 2 or 4 speeds, any combination of the DI4, DI5 and DI6 inputs can be used. Verify the Speed

Reference parameters according to the used DI’s.

The input(s) programmed for other function(s) must be considered as 0 V, as presented in the table 12.4.

Table 12.3 - Multispeed function selection via digital inputs

Enabled DIx Programming

DI4 P0266=13

DI5 P0267=13

DI6 P0268=13

Table 12.4 - Multispeed reference

8 speeds

4 speeds

2 speeds

DI6 DI5 DI4 Speed Reference

0 V 0 V 0 V P0124

0 V 0 V 24 V P0125

0 V 24 V 0 V P0126

0 V 24 V 24 V P0127

24 V 0 V 0 V P0128

24 V 0 V 24 V P0129

24 V 24 V 0 V P0130

24 V 24 V 24 V P0131

Accelerating ramp

DI6

DI5

DI4

Time

24 V

0 V (open)

24 V

0 V (open)

24 V

0 V (open)

P0124

P0125

P0126

P0127

P0128

P0129

P0130

P0131

Output speed

Figure 12.4 - Multispeed

12-9

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12.5 ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER [37]

The ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER (E.P.) function allows that the speed reference be adjusted by means of 2

digital inputs (one for incrementing it and another for decrementing it).

In order to enable this function, the speed reference must first be configured to be via E.P., by setting P0221=7

and/or P0222=7. After this function has been enabled, it is only necessary to program two of the digital inputs

(P0263 to P0270) in 11 (Increase E.P.) and 12 (Decrease E.P.).

The operation of this function can be observed in the next figure. It is important to point out that the increase

of the speed reference is done with the application of 24 V at the digital inputs, whereas the decrease is done

with the application of 0 V.

In order to reset the reference, 24 V must be applied at the "INCREASE" input and 0 V at the "DECREASE" input,

simultaneously while the CFW-11 inverter is disabled.

Time

Acceleration

Deceleration Speed Reference

Reset

Digital Inputs

Increase

Decrease

Enabling &

Minimum

speed

open

24V

open

24V

DIx Run/Stop

Output

Speed

24V

Reset

DIx Increase

DIx Decrease

Figure 12.5 - Electronic potentiometer function (E.P.)

12.6 ZERO SPEED LOGIC [35]

This function allows the configuration of a speed in which the inverter will enter a stop condition (disable

itself).

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-10

P0217 – Zero Speed Disable

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

35 Zero Speed Logic

Description:

When ON, it disables the inverter after the speed reference (N*) and the actual speed (N) become lower than the

value adjusted in the parameter P0291.

The inverter is enabled again when one of the conditions defined by the parameter P0218 is satisfied.

DANGER!

Be careful when approaching the motor while it is in the disable condition. It may get back to

operation at any moment because of the process conditions. In case you want to handle or perform

any type of maintenance, remove power from the inverter.

P0218 – Condition to Leave the Zero Speed Disable

Adjustable

Range:

0 = P0001 (N*) > P0291 or P0002 (N) > P0291

1 = P0001 (N*) > P0291

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

35 Zero Speed Logic

Description:

It specifies if the condition to leave the zero speed disable will be only the speed reference or also the actual speed.

Table 12.5 - Condition to leave the N=0 disable

P0218

(P0217=1)

Inverter leaves the condition of disable by

N=0

0 P0001 (N*) > P0291 or

P0002 (N) > P0291

1 P0001 (N*) > P0291

When the PID regulator is active (P0203=1) and in Automatic mode, for the inverter to leave the disable condition,

besides the condition programmed in P0218, it is also necessary that the PID error (the difference between the

Setpoint and the process variable) be higher than the value programmed in P0535. Refer to the section 20.6 for

more details.

12-11

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0219 – Zero Speed Time

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 999 s Factory

Setting:

0 s

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

35 Zero Speed Logic

Description:

It defines whether or not the Zero Speed Disable function will be timed.

If P0219=0, the function works without timing.

If P0219>0, the function will be configured with timing, and the counting of the time adjusted in this parameter will

be initiated after the Speed Reference and the Actual Motor Speed become lower than the value adjusted in P0291.

When the counting reaches the time defined in P0219, the inverter will be disabled. If during the time counting any

of the conditions that cause the zero speed disable ceases being fulfilled, then the time counting will be reset and

the inverter continues enabled.

P0291 – Zero Speed Zone

Refer to the section 13.1.4 for more details.

12.7 FLYING START/RIDE-THROUGH [44]

The FLYING START function allows starting a motor that is spinning freely, accelerating it from the speed it is

found.

The other function, RIDE-THROUGH, allows the recovery of the inverter, without being disabled by undervoltage,

when a failure in the voltage supply occurs.

Since these functions work in different manners depending on the used control mode (V/f or Vector), they will

be described in full detail next, for each one of the modes.

P0320 – Flying Start/Ride-Through

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = Flying Start

2 = Flying Start / Ride-Through

3 = Ride-Through

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

44 FlyStart/RideThru

Description:

The parameter P0320 selects the functions Flying Start and Ride-Through use. More details in the subsequent

sections.

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-12

12.7.1 V/f Flying Start

In the V/f mode, the inverter imposes a fixed frequency at the start, defined by the speed reference, and applies a

voltage ramp defined at the parameter P0331. The Flying Start function will be activated after the time adjusted

in P0332 elapses (to allow the motor demagnetization), every time a “Run” command is driven.

12.7.2 Vector Flying Start

12.7.2.1 P0202=3

In the Sensorless vector mode, the Flying Start initiates soon after the "Run/Stop=Run" command is applied. At

this moment the inverter initiates a sweep (search) using I/f scalar control, where I is constant and f varies from

the P0134 value down to zero. The rate of the frequency change is determined by (P0329 x P0412). When the

motor speed is found the control mode is changed from I/f to vector sensorless, and the motor is driven to the

speed reference indicated in P0001.

The used parameters are P0327 to P0329 and the not used ones are P0182, P0331 and P0332.

NOTE!

When the general enable command is activated, the motor magnetization will not occur.

NOTE!

For a better performance of the function, the activation of the braking without losses is recommended

by setting the parameter P0185 according to the table 11.9.

P0327 – F.S. Current Ramp I/f

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 1.000 s Factory

Setting:

0.070 s

Description:

It defines the time for the I/f current to change from 0 to the level used in the frequency sweep (f). It is determined

by: P0327=P0412/8.

P0328 – Flying Start Filter

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 1.000 s Factory

Setting:

0.085 s

Description:

It establishes the time of permanence in the condition that indicates that the speed of the motor was found. It is

defined by: P0328=(P0412/8 + 0.015 s).

P0329 – Frequency Ramp I/f F.S.

Adjustable

Range:

2.0 to 50.0 Factory

Setting:

6.0

Proprieties: Sless

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

44 FlyStart/RideThru

12-13

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Description:

It defines the rate of frequency variation used in the motor speed search.

P0329 is determined in function of P0404, as showed in the next table:

Table 12.6 - P0329 value in function of P0404

P0404 0...20 21...23 24...26 27...29 30...32 33...37

P0329 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0

P0404 38...40 41...44 45...48 49 50 51...58

P0329 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0

The frequency variation rate is determined by: (P0329 x P0412).

If it is wished to deactivate momentarily the Flying Start function, one can program one of the digital

inputs P0263 to P0270 as 24 (Disab.FlyStart). Refer to the section 13.1.3.

12.7.2.2 P0202=4

During the time period when the motor is being magnetized, the identification of the motor speed occurs. Once

the magnetization is finished, the motor will be operated starting from that speed until reaching the speed

reference indicated in P0001.

The parameters P0327 to P0329, P0331 and P0332 are not used.

12.7.3 V/f Ride-Through

The Ride-Through function in the V/f mode will disable the output pulses (IGBT) of the inverter as soon as the

input voltage reaches a value below the undervoltage level. The undervoltage fault (F021) does not occur and

the DC link voltage will decrease slowly until the line voltage returns.

If the line takes too long to return (more than 2 seconds), the inverter may indicate F021 (DC Link Undervoltage).

If the line voltage returns before a fault, the inverter will enable the pulses again, imposing the speed reference

instantaneously (as in the Flying Start function) and applying a voltage ramp with the time defined by P0331.

Refer to the figures 12.6(a) and (b).

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-14

DC Link Voltage

F021 Level

Output Pulses

Output Voltage

0 V

Output Speed

(P0002)

0 rpm

Line Returns

P0332 Enabled

Disabled

P0331

Disabled

Output Pulses

Time adjusted in P0332

Output Voltage

0 V

Output Speed (P0002)

0 rpm

Line Returns

Enabled

P0332

P0331

F021 Level

DC Link Voltage

a) with the line returning before the time adjusted in P0332 b) with the line returning after the time adjusted in P0332, but

before 2 s (for P0332 ≤ 1 s), or before 2 x P0332

(for P0332 > 1 s)

Figure 12.6 - Ride-Through actuation in V/f mode

The actuation of the Ride-Through function can be visualized at the outputs DO1/RL1, DO2/RL2, DO3/RL3,

DO4 and/or DO5 (P0275 to P0279), provided that they have been programmed in “24=Ride-Through”.

P0331 – Voltage Ramp

Adjustable

Range:

0.2 to 60.0 s Factory

Setting:

2.0 s

Proprieties: V/f and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

44 FlyStart/RideThru

Description:

This parameter sets the necessary time for the output voltage to reach the rated voltage value.

It is used by the Flying Start function as well as by the Ride-Through function (both in V/f mode), together with the

parameter P0332.

P0332 – Dead Time

Adjustable

Range:

0.1 to 10.0 s Factory

Setting:

1.0 s

Proprieties: V/f and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

44 FlyStart/RideThru

12-15

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Description:

The parameter P0332 sets the minimum time that the inverter will wait to activate the motor again, which is

necessary for the motor demagnetization.

In the Ride-Through function case, the time is counted starting from the line drop. However in the Flying Start

function actuation, the counting begins after the “Run/Stop=Run” command is given.

For the correct operation, this time must be adjusted to twice the motor rotor constant (refer to the table available

at P0412 in the section 11.8.5.

12.7.4 Vector Ride-Through

Different from the V/f mode, in the vector mode the Ride-Through function tries to regulate the DC link voltage

during the line failure, without interruption or fault storing. The energy necessary to keep the aggregate working

is obtained from the motor kinetic energy (inertia) by means of its deceleration. Thus, at the line return the motor

is reaccelerated to the speed defined by the reference.

After the line failure (t0), the DC link voltage (Ud) starts diminishing according to a rate depending on the motor

load condition, being able to reach the undervoltage level (t2) if the Ride-Through function is not working. The

typical necessary time for this to occur, with rated load, is from a magnitude of 5 to 15 ms.

With the Ride-Through function active, the line loss is detected when the Ud voltage reaches a value below the

”DC Link Power Loss” value (t1), defined at the parameter P0321. The inverter initiates a controlled deceleration

of the motor immediately, regenerating energy to the DC link in order to keep the motor operating with the Ud

voltage regulated at the value “DC Link Ride-Through” (P0322).

In case that the line does not return, the aggregate remains in this condition the longest possible time (depends

on the energetic balance) until undervoltage (F021 in t5) occurs. If the line returns before the undervoltage

occurrence (t3), the inverter will detect its return when the Ud voltage reaches the “DC Link Power Back” (t4)

level, defined at the parameter P0323. The motor is then reaccelerated, following the adjusted ramp, from the

actual speed value to the value defined by the speed reference (P0001) (refer to the figure 12.7).

F021

t0 t1 t2

t3 t4 t5

(t)

Nominal

Return (P0323)

Loss (P0321)

Ride-Through (P0322)

Undervoltage (75 %)

Figure 12.7 - Ride-Through function actuation in vector mode

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-16

t0 – Line loss;

t1 – Line loss detection;

t2 – Undervoltage actuation (F021 without Ride-Through);

t3 – Line return;

t4 – Line return detection;

t5 – Undervoltage actuation (F021 with Ride-Through).

If the line voltage produces an Ud voltage between the values adjusted in P0322 and P0323, the fault F0150

may occur, the values of P0321, P0322 and P0323 must be readjusted.

NOTE!

When one of the functions, Ride-Through or Flying Start, is activated, the parameter P0357 (Line

Phase Loss Time) is ignored, regardless of the adjusted time.

NOTE!

Cautions with the application:

It is mandatory the use of a line reactor to limit the inrush current when the line returns;

Use oversized Ultra-Rapid fuses or normal fuses for the same reason.

NOTE!

The Ride-Through function activation occurs when the power supply voltage is lower than the value

(P0321/1.35).

Ud=VAC x 1.35

P0321 – DC Link Power Loss

Adjustable

Range:

178 to 282 V

308 to 616 V

425 to 737 V

486 to 885 V

Factory

Setting:

P0296=0: 252 V

P0296=1: 436 V

P0296=2: 459 V

P0296=3: 505 V

P0296=4: 551 V

P0296=5: 602 V

P0296=6: 660 V

P0296=7: 689 V

P0296=8: 792 V

P0322 – DC Link Ride-Through

Adjustable

Range:

178 to 282 V

308 to 616 V

425 to 737 V

486 to 885 V

Factory

Setting:

P0296=0: 245 V

P0296=1: 423 V

P0296=2: 446 V

P0296=3: 490 V

P0296=4: 535 V

P0296=5: 585 V

P0296=6: 640 V

P0296=7: 668 V

P0296=8: 768 V

12-17

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0323 – DC Link Power Back

Adjustable

Range:

178 to 282 V

308 to 616 V

425 to 737 V

486 to 885 V

Factory

Setting:

P0296=0: 267 V

P0296=1: 462 V

P0296=2: 486 V

P0296=3: 535 V

P0296=4: 583 V

P0296=5: 638 V

P0296=6: 699 V

P0296=7: 729 V

P0296=8: 838 V

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

44 FlyStart/RideThru

Description:

- P0321 – defines the Ud voltage level under which the line loss will be detected;

- P0322 – defines the Ud voltage level that the inverter will try to keep regulated, so that the motor keeps

operating;

- P0323 – defines the Ud voltage level at which the inverter will identify the return of the line, and from where the

motor must be reaccelerated.

NOTE!

These parameters work together with the parameters P0325 and P0326 for the Ride-Through in

vector control.

P0325 – Ride-Through Proportional Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 63.9 Factory

Setting:

22.8

P0326 – Ride-Through Integral Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 9.999 Factory

Setting:

0.128

Proprieties: Vector

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

44 FlyStart/RideThru

Description:

These parameters configure the vector mode Ride-Through PI controller, which is responsible for keeping the DC

link voltage at the level set in P0322.

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-18

P0325, P0326

R.T. Regulator

Ud Ride-Through

(P0322) Figure 11.1 and 11.2

Block Diagram Input

Figure 12.8 - Ride-Through PI controller

Normally the factory settings for P0325 and P0326 are adequate for the majority of the applications. Do not

change these parameters.

12.8 DC BRAKING [47]

NOTE!

DC break on the start and/or stop will not be active if P0202=4 (Vector with Encoder mode).

NOTE!

The DC Braking at start does not act when the Flying Start function is active (P0320=1 or 2).

The DC BRAKING consists in the application of direct current to the motor, allowing its fast stopping.

Table 12.7 - Parameters related to the DC braking

Control Mode DC Braking at Starting DC Braking at Stopping

V/f scalar P0299 and P0302 P0300, P0301 and P0302

VVW P0302 and P0299 P0300, P0301 and P0302

Sensorless Vector P0299 and P0372 P0300, P0301 and P0372

P0299 - DC-Braking Start Time

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 15.0 s Factory

Setting:

0.0 s

Proprieties: V/f, VVW and Sless

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

47 DC Braking

Description:

This parameter sets the DC braking time at starting.

INJECTION OF DIRECT

CURRENT AT STARTING

Motor Speed

Time

DC Braking

Run

Stop

P0299

P0302/P0372

(V/f, VVW)/(Sensorless)

Time

Figure 12.9 - DC braking operation at starting

12-19

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0300 – DC-Braking Stop Time

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 15.0 s Factory

Setting:

0.0 s

Proprieties: V/f, VVW and Sless

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

47 DC Braking

Description:

This parameter sets the DC braking time at stopping.

The figure 12.10 presents the DC braking operation via ramp disabling (refer to P0301).

a) V/f scalar

P0300

Motor Speed

P0301

DEAD TIME

Open

Time

DIx – Run/Stop

+24 V

Figure 12.10 (a) - DC braking operation at the ramp disabling (via ramp disable)

b) VVW and Sensorless Vector

P0300

Open

DIx – Run/Stop

DC Current

Injection

Time

+24 V

P0301

Motor Speed

Figure 12.10 (b) - DC braking operation at the ramp disabling (via ramp disable) (cont.)

The figure 12.11 presents the DC braking operation via general disabling. This condition does only work in the

V/f scalar mode.

P0300

Time

+24 V

Motor Speed

Dead

Time

Open

DIx - General

Enable

Figure 12.11 - DC braking operation via general disabling – V/f mode

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-20

For the V/f scalar control mode there is a “dead time” (motor rotates free), before starting the DC braking. This time

is necessary to the demagnetization of the motor and it is proportional to its speed.

During the DC braking the inverter indicates the “DCbreak” status at the keypad (HMI) top left corner.

During the braking process, if the inverter is enabled, the braking is interrupted and the inverter will operate normally

again.

ATTENTION!

The DC Braking may continue active after the motor has already stopped. Be careful with the motor

thermal sizing for short period cyclic braking.

P0301 – DC-Braking Speed

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 450 rpm Factory

Setting:

30 rpm

Proprieties: V/f, VVW and Sless

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

47 DC Braking

Description:

This parameter establishes the beginning point for the DC braking application at stopping. Refer to the figures

12.10 (a) and (b).

P0302 – DC-Braking Voltage

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 10.0 % Factory

Setting:

2.0 %

Proprieties: V/f and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

47 DC Braking

Description:

This parameter adjusts the DC voltage (braking torque) applied to the motor during the braking.

The adjustment must be done by increasing gradually the P0302 value, which varies from 0 to 10 % of the rated

voltage, until getting the desired braking.

This parameter works only for the V/f scalar and VVW control modes.

P0372 – DC-Braking Current for Sensorless

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 90.0 % Factory

Setting:

40.0 %

Proprieties: Sless

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

47 DC Braking

12-21

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Description:

This parameter adjusts the current level (DC braking torque) applied to the motor during the braking.

The programmed current level is a percentage of the inverter rated current.

This parameter works only in the Sensorless Vector control mode.

12.9 SKIP SPEED [48]

The parameters of this group prevent the motor from operating permanently at speed values where, for instance,

the mechanic system enters in resonance (causing exaggerated vibration or noise).

P0303 – Skip Speed 1

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

600 rpm

P0304 – Skip Speed 2

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

900 rpm

P0305 – Skip Speed 3

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

1200 rpm

P0306 – Skip Band

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 750 rpm Factory

Setting:

0 rpm

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

48 Skip Speed

Description:

This actuation of these parameters occurs as presented in the figure 12.12 next.

The passage through the avoided speed range (2 x P0306) takes place by means of the acceleration/deceleration

ramps.

The function does not operate properly if two bands of “Skip Speed” overlap.

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-22

2 x P0306

P0303

P0304

P0305

P0303

P0304

P0305

2 x P0306

Speed Reference

Motor speed

Figure 12.12 - “Skip Speed” actuation curve

12.10 SEARCH OF ZERO OF THE ENCODER

The zero search function attempts to synchronize the minimum counting or the maximum counting visualized in

the parameter P0039. Accountant of the Pulses of Encoder, with the pulse of zero of the encoder.

The function is activated by setting P0191 =1. It will just be executed once, when happening the first zero pulse

after the activation of the function.

Among the actions accomplished are: the parameter P0039 is reduced to zero (or fitting with the value of

4xP0405), and the parameter P0192 starts to indicate P0192= Completed.

P0191 – Encoder Zero Search

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

00 ALL PARAMETERS

Description:

On the inverter initialization, the parameter P0191 starts on zero. By setting to one, it activates the operation of the

zero search function, while the parameter P0192 stays on zero (Inactive).

P0192 – Status Encoder Zero Search

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = Finished

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

00 ALL PARAMETERS

12-23

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Description:

On the inverter initialization, this parameter starts on zero.

When the value is changed to 1 (Concluded), it indicates that the zero search function was executed, and this

function returns to the state of Inactive, although P0191 continues equal to one (Active).

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12-24

13-1

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

DIGITAL AND ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

This section presents the parameters for the configuration of the CFW-11 inputs and outputs, as well as the

parameters for the command of the inverter in the Local or Remote Situations.

13.1 I/O CONFIGURATION [07]

13.1.1 Analog Inputs [38]

In the standard CFW-11 configuration 2 analog inputs are available (AI1 and AI2), and as accessories other 2

more inputs can be added (AI3 and AI4). AI4 is available on the IOA-01 accessory and AI3 on the IOB-01.

With those inputs it is possible, for instance, the use of an external speed reference or the connection of a

sensor for the temperature measurement (PTC). The details for those configurations are described in the

following parameters.

P0018 – AI1 Value

P0019 – AI2 Value

P0020 – AI3 Value

P0021 – AI4 Value

Adjustable

Range:

-100.00 to 100.00 % Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

38 Analog Inputs 38 Analog Inputs

Description:

These read only parameters indicate the value of the analog inputs AI1 to AI4, as a percentage of the full scale.

The indicated values are the ones obtained after the offset action and the multiplication by the gain. Refer to the

description of the parameters P0230 to P0250.

P0230 – Analog Input Dead Zone

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

38 Analog Inputs 38 Analog Inputs

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-2

Description:

This parameter acts only for the analog inputs (AIx) programmed as speed reference, and it defines if the Dead Zone

at those inputs is On (1) or Off (0).

If the parameter is configured as Off (P0230=0), the signal at the analog input will work on the Speed Reference

starting from the minimum value (0 V / 0 mA / 4 mA or 10 V / 20 mA), and will be directly related to the minimum

speed programmed at P0133. Refer to the figure 13.1 (a).

If the parameter is configured as On (P0230=1), the signal at the analog inputs will have a Dead Zone, where the

Speed Reference remains in the minimum value (P0133), even with the variation of the input signal. Refer to the

figure 13.1 (b).

P0134

Reference

0AIx Signal

P0133

0 ................................... 10 V

0 ..................................20 mA

4 mA ..............................20 mA

10 V .................................. 0

20 mA ............................... 0

20 mA .............................4 mA

AIx Signal

Reference

P0134

P0133

0 ................................... 10 V

0 ..................................20 mA

4 mA ..............................20 mA

10 V .................................. 0

20 mA ............................... 0

20 mA .............................4 mA

Figure 13.1 (a) - Analog input actuation with

Dead Zone Off

Figure 13.1 (b) - Analog input actuation with

Dead Zone On

In case that the analog inputs AI2 and AI4 are programmed for -10 V to +10 V (P0238 and P0248 configured in 4),

there will be curves identical to those of the figure 13.1 above; only when AI2 or AI4 is negative the speed direction

will be inverted.

P0231 – AI1 Signal Function

P0236 – AI2 Signal Function

P0241 – AI3 Signal Function

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Speed Reference

1 = No Ramp Reference

2 = Maximum Torque Current

3 = Process Variable

4 = PTC

5 = Not Used

6 = Not Used

7 = PLC Use

Factory

Setting:

13-3

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

P0246 – AI4 Signal Function

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Speed Reference

1 = No Ramp Reference

2 = Maximum Torque Current

3 = Process Variable

4 = Not Used

5 = Not Used

6 = Not Used

7 = PLC Use

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

38 Analog Inputs 38 Analog Inputs

Description:

The functions of the analog inputs are defined in those parameters.

When the option 0 (Speed Reference) is selected, the analog inputs are able to supply the reference for the motor,

subject to the specified limits (P0133 and P0134) and to the ramp action (P0100 to P0103). Therefore, it is also

necessary to configure the parameters P0221 and/or P0222, selecting the use of the desired analog input (For more

details refer to the description of those parameters in the section 13.3 and to the figure 13.8 in this manual).

The option 1 (No Ramp Reference – valid only for the vector mode) is used generally as an additional

reference signal, for instance in applications using a dancer (Refer to the figure 13.8, option without acceleration

and deceleration ramp).

The option 2 (Maximum Torque Current) makes it possible that the forward and reverse torque current limit

control be done by means of the selected analog input. In this case P0169 and P0170 are not used.

The adjustment done at the analog input AI1, AI2, AI3 or AI4 can be monitored via parameters P0018, P0019,

P0020 or P0021 respectively, The value presented at this parameter will be the maximum torque current expressed

as a percentage of the motor rated current (P0401). The indication range will be from 0 to 200 %. When the analog

input is equal to 10 V (maximum), the corresponding monitoring parameter will show 200 %, and the value of the

maximum forward and reverse torque current will be 200 %.

In order that the expressions which determine the total current and the maximum torque developed by the motor

(sections 11.5 and 11.8.6) remain valid, replace P0169, P0170 by P0018 to P0021.

The option 3 (Process Variable) defines the analog input as the PID Regulator feedback signal (E.g.: pressure sensor,

temperature, etc.). Therefore it is also necessary to configure the parameter P0524 (PID Feedback Selection).

When the analog input is at its maximum limit (P0018 to P0021 indicating 100 %), the process variable will also

be at the maximum value (100 %).

The option 4 (PTC – not available for the AI4 input) configures the input for motor temperature monitoring

by means of a PTC type sensor, when it is present in the motor. Therefore it is also necessary to configure one

analog output (AO) as a current source for feeding the PTC. More details of this function are described in the

section 15.2 – Motor Overtemperature Protection.

The option 7 (PLC use) configures the signal at the input to be used by the PLC11 board.

P0232 – AI1 Gain

P0237 – AI2 Gain

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-4

P0242 – AI3 Gain

P0247 – AI4 Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 9.999 Factory

Setting:

1.000

P0234 – AI1 Offset

P0239 – AI2 Offset

P0244 – AI3 Offset

P0249 – AI4 Offset

Adjustable

Range:

-100.00 to 100.00 % Factory

Setting:

0.00 %

P0235 – AI1 Filter

P0240 – AI2 Filter

P0245 – AI3 Filter

P0250 – AI4 Filter

Adjustable

Range:

0.00 to 16.00 s Factory

Setting:

0.00 s

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

38 Analog Inputs 38 Analog Inputs

Description:

OFFSET

GAIN

FILTER

AI2’ - P0019

AI1 - P0231

AI2 - P0236

AI3 - P0241

AI4 - P0246

AI1 - P0232

AI2 - P0237

AI3 - P0242

AI4 - P0247

AI1 - P0234

AI2 - P0239

AI3 - P0244

AI4 - P0249

AI1 - P0235

AI2 - P0240

AI3 - P0245

AI4 - P0250

AI1’ - P0018

AI3’ - P0020

AI4’ - P0021

AIx'

Figure 13.2 - Analog input block diagram

13-5

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

The AIx’ internal value is the result of the following equation:

Alx' = Alx + OFFSET x 10 V x Gain

100

For instance: AIx=5 V, OFFSET=-70 % and Gain=1.000:

Alx' = 5 + (-70) x 10 V x1 = –2 V

100

AIx’=-2 V means that the motor will rotate in the reverse direction with a reference in module equal to 2 V, provided

that the AIx function is “Speed Reference”. For the AIx function “Maximum Torque Current”, negative values are

clipped at 0.0 %.

For the filter parameters (P0235, P0240, P0245 and P0250), the adjusted value corresponds to the RC constant

used for filtering the signal read at the input.

P0233 – AI1 Signal Type

P0243 – AI3 Signal Type

Adjustable

Range:

0 = 0 to 10 V/20 mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 10 V/20 mA to 0

3 = 20 to 4 mA

Factory

Setting:

P0238 – AI2 Signal Type

P0248 – AI4 Signal Type

Adjustable

Range:

0 = 0 to 10 V/20 mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 10 V/20 mA to 0

3 = 20 to 4 mA

4 = –10 V to +10 V

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

38 Analog Inputs 38 Analog Inputs

Description:

These parameters configure the signal type (if it is current or voltage) that will be read at each analog input, as well

as its range. Refer to the tables 13.1 and 13.2 for more details on this configuration.

Table 13.1 - DIP Switches related to the analog inputs

Parameter Input Switch Location

P0233 AI1 S1.4 Control Board

P0238 AI2 S1.3

P0243 AI3 S3.1 IOB

P0248 AI4 S3.1 IOA

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-6

Table 13.2 - Configuration of the analog input signals

P0233, P0243 P0238, P0248 Input Signal Switch Position

0 0 (0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA Off/On

1 1 (4 to 20) mA On

2 2 (10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA Off/On

3 3 (20 to 4) mA On

– 4 (-10 to +10) V Off

When current signals are used at the input, the switch corresponding to the desired input must be set in the “ON”

position.

Inverse reference is obtained with the options 2 and 3, i.e., maximum speed is obtained with minimum reference.

13.1.2 Analog Outputs [39]

In the CFW-11 standard configuration are available 2 analog outputs (AO1 and AO2), and 2 more (AO3 and

AO4) can be added with the IOA-01 accessory. The parameters related to those outputs are described next.

P0014 – AO1 Value

P0015 – AO2 Value

Adjustable

Range:

0.00 to 100.00 % Factory

Setting:

P0016 – AO3 Value

P0017 – AO4 Value

Adjustable

Range:

-100.00 to 100.00 % Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

39 Analog Outputs 39 Analog Outputs

Description:

Those read only parameters indicate the value of the analog outputs AO1 to AO4, as a percentage of the full

scale. The indicated values are those obtained after the multiplication by the gain. Refer to the description of the

parameters P0251 to P0261.

P0251 – AO1 Function

13-7

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

P0254 – AO2 Function

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Speed Reference

1 = Total Reference

2 = Real Speed

3 = Torque Current Reference

4 = Torque Current

5 = Output Current

6 = Process Variable

7 = Active Current

8 = Output Power

9 = PID Setpoint

10 = Torque Current > 0

11 = Motor Torque

12 = SoftPLC

13 = PTC

14 = Not Used

15 = Not Used

16 = Motor Ixt

17 = Encoder Speed

18 = P0696 Value

19 = P0697 Value

20 = P0698 Value

21 = P0699 Value

22 = PLC11

23 = Id* Current

Factory

Setting:

P0251=2

P0254=5

P0257 – AO3 Function

P0260 – AO4 Function

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Speed Reference

1 = Total Reference

2 = Real Speed

3 = Torque Current Reference

4 = Torque Current

5 = Output Current

6 = Process Variable

7 = Active Current

8 = Output Power

9 = PID Setpoint

10 = Torque Current > 0

11 = Motor Torque

12 = SoftPLC

13 = Not Used

14 = Not Used

15 = Not Used

16 = Motor Ixt

17 = Encoder Speed

18 = P0696 Value

19 = P0697 Value

20 = P0698 Value

21 = P0699 Value

22 = Not Used

23 = Id* Current

24 to 71 = Exclusive WEG Use

Factory

Setting:

P0257=2

P0260=5

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

39 Analog Outputs 39 Analog Outputs

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-8

Description:

These parameters set the functions of the analog outputs, according to the table 13.3.

Table 13.3 - Analog output functions

Functions P0251

(AO1)

P0254

(AO2)

P0257

(AO3)

P0260

(AO4)

Speed Reference 0 0 0 0

Total Reference 1 1 1 1

Real Speed 2* 2 2* 2

Torque Current Reference (Vector Mode) 3 3 3 3

Torque Current (Vector Mode) 4 4 4 4

Output Current (with a 0.3 second filter) 5 5* 5 5*

PID Process Variable 6 6 6 6

Active Current (V/f or VVW Mode, with a 0.1 second filter) 7 7 7 7

Output Power (with a 0.5 second filter) 8 8 8 8

PID Setpoint 9 9 9 9

Torque Current > 0 (Vector Mode) 10 10 10 10

Motor Torque 11 11 11 11

SoftPLC 12 12 12 12

PTC 13 13 - -

Not Used 14 and 15 14 and 15 13, 14, 15

and 22

13, 14, 15

and 22

Motor Ixt 16 16 16 16

Encoder Speed 17 17 17 17

P0696 Value 18 18 18 18

P0697 Value 19 19 19 19

P0698 Value 20 20 20 20

P0699 Value 21 21 21 21

PLC11 22 22 - -

Id* Current 23 23 23 23

Exclusive WEG Use - - 24 to 71 24 to 71

* Factory Setting

P0252 – AO1 Gain

P0255 – AO2 Gain

P0258 – AO3 Gain

P0261 – AO4 Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 9.999 Factory

Setting:

1.000

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

39 Analog Outputs 39 Analog Outputs

Description:

They adjust the analog output gains. Refer to the figure 13.3.

13-9

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Function

AO1 - P0251

AO2 - P0254

AO3 - P0257

AO4 - P0260

AOx

Output Power

Active Current

Output Current

Torque Current

Torque Current Reference

Real Speed

Total Reference

Speed Reference

Process Variable (PID)

PID Setpoint

Torque Current > 0

Motor Torque

PTC

SoftPLC

Gain

AO1 - P0252

AO2 - P0255

AO3 - P0258

AO4 - P0261

Signal

AO1 - P0253

AO2 - P0256

AO3 - P0259

AO4 - P0262

Value

AO1 - P0014

AO2 - P0015

AO3 - P0016

AO4 - P0017

P0699 Value

PLC11

P0697 Value

P0696 Value

Encoder Speed

Motor Ixt

Not Used

P0698 Value

Figure 13.3 - Analog output block diagram

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-10

Table 13.4 - Full scale

SCALE OF THE ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATIONS

Variable Full Scale (*)

Speed Reference

P0134

Total Reference

Real Speed

Encoder Speed

Torque Current Reference

2.0 x InomHD

Torque Current

Torque Current > 0

Motor Torque 2.0 x Inom

Output Current 1.5 x InomHD

Active Current

PID Process Variable P0528

PID Setpoint

Output Power 1.5 x √3 x P0295 x P0296

Motor Ixt 100 %

SoftPLC

32767

P0696 Value

P0697 Value

P0698 Value

P0699 Value

(*) When the signal is inverse (10 to 0 V, 20 to 0 mA or 20 to 4 mA) the values

in the table become the beginning of the scale.

P0253 – AO1 Signal Type

P0256 – AO2 Signal Type

Adjustable

Range:

0 = 0 to 10 V/20 mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 10 V/20 mA to 0

3 = 20 to 4 mA

Factory

Setting:

P0259 – AO3 Signal Type

P0262 – AO4 Signal Type

Adjustable

Range:

0 = 0 to 20 mA

1 = 4 to 20 mA

2 = 20 mA to 0

3 = 20 to 4 mA

4 = 0 to 10 V

5 = 10 to 0 V

6 = -10 to +10 V

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

39 Analog Outputs 39 Analog Outputs

Description:

These parameters configure if the analog output signal will be in current or voltage, with direct or inverse reference.

In order to adjust these parameters, it is also necessary to set the “DIP switches” of the control board or of the IOA

Accessory Board, according to the tables 13.5, 13.6 and 13.7.

13-11

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Table 13.5 - DIP switches related to the analog outputs

Parameter Output Switch Location

P0253 AO1 S1.1 Control Board

P0256 AO2 S1.2

P0259 AO3 S2.1 IOA

P0262 AO4 S2.2

Table 13.6 - Configuration of the analog outputs AO1 and AO2 signals

P0253, P0256 Output Signal Switch Position

0 (0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA Off / On

1 (4 to 20) mA On

2 (10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA Off / On

3 (20 to 4) mA On

Table 13.7 - Configuration of the analog outputs AO3 and AO4 signals

P0259, P0262 Output Signal Switch Position

0 0 to 20 mA Off

1 4 to 20 mA Off

2 20 to 0 mA Off

3 20 to 4 mA Off

4 0 to 10 V Off

5 10 to 0 V Off

6 -10 to +10 V On

For AO1 and AO2, when current signals are used, the switch corresponding to the desired output must be set in the

“ON” position.

For AO3 and AO4, when current signals are used, the outputs AO3 (I) and AO4 (I) must be used. For voltage signals

use the outputs AO3 (V) and AO4 (V). The switch corresponding to the desired output must be set in “ON” only in

order to use range from -10 V to +10 V .

13.1.3 Digital Inputs [40]

The CFW-11 has 6 digital inputs in the standard version, and 2 more can be added with the IOA-01 and

IOB-01 accessories. The parameters that configure those inputs are presented next.

P0012 – DI8 to DI1 Status

Adjustable

Range:

Bit 0 = DI1

Bit 1 = DI2

Bit 2 = DI3

Bit 3 = DI4

Bit 4 = DI5

Bit 5 = DI6

Bit 6 = DI7

Bit 7 = DI8

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

40 Digital Inputs 40 Digital Inputs

Description:

By means of this parameter it is possible to visualize the status of the 6 control board digital inputs (DI1 to DI6) and

of the 2 accessory digital inputs (DI7 and DI8) as well.

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-12

The indication is done by means of the numbers 1 and 0, representing respectively the “Active” and “Inactive” states

of the inputs. The state of each input is considered as one digit in the sequence where DI1 represents the least

significant digit.

Example: In case the sequence 10100010 is presented on the keypad (HMI), it will correspond to the following

status of the DIs:

Table 13.8 - Digital inputs status

DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1

Active

(+24 V)

Inactive

(0 V)

Active

(+24 V)

Inactive

(0 V)

Inactive

(0 V)

Inactive

(0 V)

Active

(+24 V)

Inactive

(0 V)

P0263 – DI1 Function

P0264 – DI2 Function

P0265 – DI3 Function

P0266 – DI4 Function

P0267 – DI5 Function

P0268 – DI6 Function

P0269 – DI7 Function

P0270 - DI8 Function

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 31 Factory

Setting:

P0263=1

P0264=8

P0265=0

P0266=0

P0267=10

P0268=14

P0269=0

P0270=0

Table 13.9 - Digital input functions

Functions P0263

(DI1)

P0264

(DI2)

P0265

(DI3)

P0266

(DI4)

P0267

(DI5)

P0268

(DI6)

P0269

(DI7)

P0270

(DI8)

Not used 0, 13 and 23 0, 13 and 23 0*, 13 and 23 0* and 23 0 and 23 0 and 23 0*, 13 and 23 0*, 13 and 23

Run/Stop 1* 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

General Enable 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Fast Stop 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

FWD Run 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

REV Run 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

3-Wire Start 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

3-Wire Stop 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

FWD/REV 8 8* 8 8 8 8 8 8

LOC/REM 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

JOG 10 10 10 10 10* 10 10 10

Increase E.P. 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

Decrease E.P. 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

Multispeed - - - 13 13 13 - -

Ramp 2 14 14 14 14 14 14* 14 14

13-13

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Functions P0263

(DI1)

P0264

(DI2)

P0265

(DI3)

P0266

(DI4)

P0267

(DI5)

P0268

(DI6)

P0269

(DI7)

P0270

(DI8)

Speed/Torque 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15

JOG+ 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16

JOG- 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17

No Ext. Alarm 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

No Ext. Fault 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19

Reset 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

PLC Use 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21

Manual/Auto 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22

Disable FlyStart 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24

DC Link Regul. 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

Program. Off 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26

Load User 1/2 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27

Load User 3 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28

DO2 Timer 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29

DO3 Timer 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30

Trace Function 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31

* Factory setting

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

40 Digital Input 40 Digital Input

Description:

Those parameters make it possible to configure the functions of the digital inputs, according to the listed range.

Some notes regarding the Digital Input functions are presented next.

- Run/Stop: In order to assure the correct operation of this function, it is necessary to program P0224 and/or

P0227 in 1.

- Increase E.P. and Decrease E.P. (Electronic Potentiometer): They are active when +24 V is applied (for Increasing

E.P.) or 0 V (for Decreasing E.P.) at the respective input programmed for that function. It is also necessary to

program P0221 and/or P0222 in 7. Refer to the section 12.5.

- Local/Remote: When programmed, this function activates “Local” when 0 V is applied to the input, and “Remote”

when +24 V are applied. It is also necessary to program P0220=4 (DIx).

- Speed/Torque: This function is valid for P0202=3 or 4 (Sensorless Vector Control or Vector with Encoder), and

“Speed” is selected with 0 V applied to the input, whereas “Torque” by applying 24 V.

When Torque is selected, the speed regulator parameters P0161 and P0162 become inactive (*). Thus the Total

Reference becomes the Torque Regulator input. Refer to the figures 11.1 and 11.2.

(*) The speed regulator of the PID type is converted into a P type, with proportional gain 1.00 and a null integral

gain.

When Speed is selected, the gains of the speed regulator become again defined by P0161 and P0162. In the

applications with torque control it is recommended to follow the method described at the parameter P0160.

- DC Link Regulation: it must be used when P0184=2. For more details, refer to this parameter description in

the section 11.8.7 of this manual.

- JOG+ and JOG-: those are functions valid only for P0202=3 or 4.

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-14

- Disables Flying-Start: itisvalidforP0202≠4.Byapplying+24Vtothedigitalinputprogrammedforthis

purpose, the Flying-Start function is disabled. By applying 0 V, the Flying-Start function is enabled again,

provided that P0320 be equal to 1 or 2. Refer to the section 12.7.

- Load User 1/2: this function allows the selection of the user memory 1 or 2, in a similar process than

P0204=7 or 8, with the difference that the user memory is loaded from a transition of the DIx programmed for

this function.

When the state of the DIx changes from low level to high level (transition from 0 V to 24 V), the user memory

1 is loaded, provided that the contents of the inverter actual parameters had been previously transferred to the

parameter memory 1 (P0204=10).

When the sate of the DIx changes from high level to low level (transition from 24 V to 0 V), the user memory 2

is loaded, provided that the contents of the inverter actual parameters had been previously transferred to the

parameter memory 2 (P0204=11).

Inverter

Parameters

User 1

User 2

P0204=8

P0204=7

P0263 to P0270

(DIx)=27

DIx=0 V

P0263 to P0270 (DIx)=27

DIx=24 V DIx=0 V

DIx=24 V

Figure 13.4 - Details on the working of the Load User 1/2 function

- Load User 3: this function allows the selection of the user memory 3, in a similar process than P0204=9, with

the difference that the user memory is loaded from a transition of the DIx programmed for this function.

When the DIx state changes from low level to high level (transition from 0 V to 24 V), the user memory 3 is loaded,

provided that the contents of the inverter actual parameters had been previously transferred to the parameter

memory 3 (P0204=12).

NOTES!

Make sure that when using those functions the parameter sets (user memory 1, 2 or 3) be totally

compatible with the application (motors, Run/Stop commands, etc.).

It will not be possible to load the user memory with the inverter enabled.

If two or three parameter sets from different motors were saved in the user memories 1, 2 and/or

3, the correct current values must be adjusted at the parameters P0156, P0157 and P0158 for

each user memory.

- Programming Off: when this function is programmed and the digital input is with +24 V, parameter changes

will not be allowed, regardless of the values set at P0000 and P0200. When the DIx input is with 0 V, the

parameter changes will be conditioned to the P0000 and P0200 settings.

- DO2 and DO3 Timer: this function acts as a timer to activate and deactivate the relays 2 and 3 (DO2 and

DO3).

When the timer function for the relay 2 or 3 is programmed at any DIx, and a transition from 0 V to +24 V occurs,

the programmed relay will be activated with the delay set in P0283 (DO2) or P0285 (DO3). When a transition from

+24 V to 0 V occurs, the programmed relay will be deactivated with the delay adjusted in P0284 (DO2) or P0286

(DO3).

13-15

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

After the transition of the DIx, either for activating or deactivating the programmed relay, it is necessary that the DIx

remains in ON or OFF during at least the time set in P0283/P0285 or P0284/P0286. Otherwise the timer will be

reset. Refer to the figure 13.5.

Note: In order to enable that function it is also necessary to program P0276 and/or P0277=29 (Timer).

+24 V

0 V

DIx

DO2 (RL2)

DO3 (RL3)

OFF

P0283/P0285 P0284/P0286 P0283/P0285 P0284/P0286

Figure 13.5 - Operation of the timer function DO2 (RL2) and DO3 (RL3)

- Multispeed: the setting of the parameters P0266 and/or P0267 and/or P0268=13 requires that the parameters

P0221 and/or P0222 be programmed in 8. Refer to the description of the parameters P0124 to P0131 in the

section 12.4.

- Trace Function: it triggers the data acquisition at the channels selected with that function, when the three

following conditions were fulfilled:

- If the DIx is with 24 V;

- Trigger condition set in P0552=6 “DIx”;

- Function waiting for the trigger, P0576=1 “Waiting”.

For more details refer to the section 19, Trace Function.

- No External Alarm: This function will indicate “External Alarm” (A090) on the keypad (HMI) display when the

programmed digital input is open (0 V). If +24 V is applied to the input, the alarm message will disappear

automatically from the keypad (HMI) display. The motor keeps working normally, regardless of the state of that

input.

- Manual/Automatic: it allows selecting the CFW-11 speed reference between the reference defined by

P0221/P0222 (Manual mode – DIx open) and the reference defined by the PID regulator (Automatic mode

– DIx with 24 V). Refer to the section 20 – PID Regulator, for more details.

- PLC use: When this option is selected it will not take any action for the CFW-11. It can be used as a remote

input for the PLC11 board or for communication networks.

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-16

Figure 13.6 a) to g) - Details on the operation of the digital input functions

DIx

24 V

Motor speed

Deceleration

ramp

DIx Open

Time

Motor speed

Motor runs free (coasts)

Time

Time 24 V

Open

24 V

Time

DIx

Open

24 V

Time

Motor

speed

DIx

Forward

Open

24 V

Time

24 V

Time

P0102

P0100

DIx -

Run/Stop

DIx – ramp 2

e) RAMP 2

Open

Time

Motor speed

24 V

DIx – Fast Stop

Motor decelerates

with ramp zero

Acceleration ramp Acceleration ramp

Motor speed

Open

Reverse

f) FAST STOP

d) FWD/REV

c) NO EXTERNAL FAULT

a) RUN/STOP b) GENERAL ENABLE

Motor runs free (coasts)

P0103

P0101

Note: All the digital inputs programmed for General Enable,

Fast Stop, Forward Run or Reverse Run must be in the ON

state, so that the CFW-11 operates as described above.

g) LOAD USER VIA DIx

Time

Load user 1

Load user 2

DIx Open

24 V

DIx

Note: All the digital inputs programmed for Run/Stop, Fast

Stop, Forward Run or Reverse Run must be in the ON state,

so that the CFW-11 operates as described above.

Open

24 V

Open

Time

Load user 3

Motor speed

13-17

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Figure 13.6 h) to j) - Details on the operation of the digital input functions (cont.)

Time

Motor speed

24 V

Run/Stop

JOG Speed (P0122)

Deceleration ramp

24 V

DIx - JOG

General enable

Open

Acceleration ramp

h) JOG

With Fault

24 V

General enable

Run/Stop

Time

24 V

Time

24 V

Without fault

Reset

DIx - Reset Open

Motor speed

Inverter

status (*)

JOG+ (P0122), JOG- (P0123) Speed

Time

(*) The condition that caused the error persists

24 V

Open

DIx - JOG ±

j) RESET

Run/Stop

General enable

i) JOG + and JOG -

Open

Open Open

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-18

Time

24 V

Motor speed

Open

Time

24 V

Time

24 V

Open

DIx - Reverse

DIx - Forward

Motor speed Forward

Figure 13.6 k) to m) - Details on the operation of the digital input functions (cont.)

Time

Motor

speed

24 V

Open

24 V

DIx - Run/Stop

Acceleration

Deceleration Speed Reference

Reset to

zero

Decrease

Increase

24 V

Open

Reverse

Enabling

Minimum

speed

Reset

l) FWD Run / REV Run

m) ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER (E.P.)

Digital Inputs

Decrease

DIx Increase

DIx - Stop

DIx - Start

k) 3-WIRE START / STOP

Time

24 V

Open

Time

13-19

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13.1.4 Digital Outputs / Relays [41]

The CFW-11 has 3 relay digital outputs as standard on its control board, and 2 more digital outputs of the

open collector type that can be added with the accessories IOA-01 or IOB-01. The next parameters configure

the functions related to those outputs.

P0013 – DO5 to DO1 Status

Adjustable

Range:

Bit 0 = DO1

Bit 1 = DO2

Bit 2 = DO3

Bit 3 = DO4

Bit 4 = DO5

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

By means of this parameter it is possible to visualize the status of the control board 3 digital outputs (DO1 to DO3)

and the 2 digital outputs of the optional board (DO4 and DO5).

The indication is done by means of the numbers "1" and "0", representing respectively the “Active” and “Inactive”

states of the outputs. The state of each output is considered as one digit in the sequence where DO1 represents the

least significant digit.

Example: In case the sequence 00010010 is presented on the keypad (HMI), it will correspond to the following

status of the DOs:

Table 13.10 - Digital outputs status

DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1

Active

(+24 V)

Inactive

(0 V)

Inactive

(0 V)

Active

(+24 V)

Inactive

(0 V)

P0275 – DO1 Function (RL1)

P0276 – DO2 Function (RL2)

P0277 – DO3 Function (RL3)

P0278 – DO4 Function

P0279 – DO5 Function

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 37 Factory

Setting:

P0275=13

P0276=2

P0277=1

P0278=0

P0279=0

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-20

Table 13.11 - Digital output functions

Functions P0275

(DO1)

P0276

(DO2)

P0277

(DO3)

P0278

(DO4)

P0279

(DO5)

Not Used 0 and 29 0 0 0*, 29 and 37 0*, 29 and 37

N* > Nx 1 1 1* 1 1

N > Nx 2 2* 2 2 2

N < Ny 3 3 3 3 3

N = N* 4 4 4 4 4

Zero Speed 5 5 5 5 5

Is > Ix 6 6 6 6 6

Is < Ix 7 7 7 7 7

Torque > Tx 8 8 8 8 8

Torque < Tx 9 9 9 9 9

Remote 10 10 10 10 10

Run 11 11 11 11 11

Ready 12 12 12 12 12

No Fault 13* 13 13 13 13

No F070 14 14 14 14 14

No F071 15 15 15 15 15

No F006/021/022 16 16 16 16 16

No F051/054/057 17 17 17 17 17

No F072 18 18 18 18 18

4-20mA Ok 19 19 19 19 19

Value P0695 20 20 20 20 20

Forward 21 21 21 21 21

Process V. > PVx 22 22 22 22 22

Process V. < PVy 23 23 23 23 23

Ride-Through 24 24 24 24 24

Pre-Charge OK 25 25 25 25 25

Fault 26 26 26 26 26

Time Enabled > Hx 27 27 27 27 27

SoftPLC 28 28 28 28 28

Timer - 29 29 - -

N>Nx and Nt>Nx 30 30 30 30 30

F>Fx(1) 31 31 31 31 31

F>Fx(2) 32 32 32 32 32

STO 33 33 33 33 33

No F160 34 34 34 34 34

No Alarm 35 35 35 35 35

No Fault and No Alarm 36 36 36 36 36

PLC11 37 37 37 - -

(*) Factory setting

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

They program the functions of the digital outputs, according to the options presented previously.

When the condition declared by the function is true, the digital output will be activated.

Example: Is>Ix function – when Is>Ix then DOx=saturated transistor and/or relay with the coil energized, and when

Is≤IxthenDOx=opentransistorand/orrelaywiththecoilnotenergized.

Some notes regarding the Digital Outputs are presented next.

- Not Used: it means that the digital outputs will remain always in a resting state, i.e., DOx=open transistor and/

or relay with the coil not energized.

13-21

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

- Zero Speed: it means that the motor speed is below the value adjusted in P0291 (Zero Speed Zone).

- Torque > Tx and Torque < Tx: they are valid only for P0203=3 or 4 (Vector Control). In those functions

“Torque” corresponds to the motor torque as indicated at parameter P0009.

- Remote: it means that the inverter is operating in Remote situation.

- Run: it corresponds to enabled inverter. In this moment the IGBTs are commutating, and the motor may be at any

speed, inclusive zero.

- Ready: it corresponds to the inverter disabled, without fault and without undervoltage.

- No Fault: it means that the inverter is not disabled by any type of fault.

- No F070: it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F070 fault (Overcurrent or Short-circuit).

- No F071: it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F071 fault (Output Overcurrent).

- No F006+F021+F022: it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F006 fault (Line unbalance or phase

loss), neither by F021 (DC Link Undervoltage), nor by F022 (DC Link Overvoltage).

- No F051+F054+F057: it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F051 fault (Overtemperature U Phase

IGBTs), neither by F054 (Overtemperature V Phase IGBTs), nor by F057 (Overtemperature W Phase IGBTs).

- No F072: it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F072 fault (Motor Overload).

- 4 - 20 mA OK: it means that the current reference (4 to 20 mA) at the analog inputs AIx is inside the 4 to 20 mA

range.

- P0695 Value: it means that the state of the digital output will be controlled by P0695, which is written via the

network. Refer to the CFW-11 Serial Communication Manual for more details on this parameter.

- Forward: it means that when the motor is rotating in the forward direction the DOx=saturated transistor and/

or relay with the coil energized, and when the motor is rotating in the reverse direction, the DOx=open transistor

and/or relay with the coil not energized.

- Ride-Through: it means that the inverter is executing the Ride-Through function.

- Pre-charge OK: It means that the DC Link voltage is above the pre-charge voltage level.

- Fault: it means that the inverter is disabled by any type of fault.

- Timer: those timers activate or deactivate the relay outputs 2 and 3 (Refer to the parameters P0283 to P0286 next).

- N > Nx and Nt > Nx: (valid only for P0202=4 – Vector with Encoder) it means that both the conditions must be

satisfied so that DOx=saturated transistor and/or relay with the coil energized. In other words, it is enough that the

condition N>Nx be not satisfied (regardless of the Nt>Nx condition) so that DOx=open transistor and/or relay

with the coil not energized.

- SoftPLC: it means that the digital output state will be controlled by the programming done in the memory area

reserved to the SoftPLC function. Refer to the SoftPLC manual for more details.

- STO: it signalizes the STO state (Safety Stop active).

- No F160: It signalizes that the inverter is not disabled by F160 fault (Safety Stop Relay);

- No Alarm: it means that the inverter in not in the alarm condition.

- No Fault and No Alarm: it means that the inverter is not disabled by any type of fault and it is not in alarm

condition.

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-22

- PLC11: This option configures the signal at the DO1 (RL1), DO2 (RL2) and DO3 (RL3) outputs to be used by the

PLC11.

Definitions of the symbols used in the function:

N = P0002 (Motor Speed);

N* = P0001 (Speed Reference);

Nx = P0288 (Nx Speed) – It is a reference point of the speed selected by the user;

Ny = P0289 (Ny Speed) – It is a reference point of the speed selected by the user;

Ix = P0290 (Ix Current) – It is a reference point of the current selected by the user;

Is = P0003 (Motor Current);

Torque = P0009 (Motor Torque);

Tx = P0293 (Tx Torque) – It is a reference point of the torque selected by the user;

PVx = P0533 (PVx Process Variable) – It is a reference point selected by the user;

PVy = P0534 (PVy Process Variable) – It is a reference point selected by the user;

Nt = Total Reference (refer to the figure 13.8);

Hx = P0294 (Hx Time);

F = P0005 (Motor Frequency);

Fx = P0281 (Fx Frequency) – It is a reference point of the motor frequency selected by the user;

PLC = Refer to the PLC accessory manual.

OFF OFF

Relay/

Transistor

Time

d) N = N*

Relay/

Transistor OFF

b) N > Nx

OFF

Time

Nx (P0288)

P0287

Time

OFF

c) N < Ny

Ny (P0289)

Relay/

Transistor ON

P0287

Relay/

Transistor

OFF

Nx (P0288)

a) N* > Nx

Time

Figure 13.7 a) to d) - Details on the operation of the digital output functions

13-23

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Relay/

Transistor OFF

OFF

Time

f) Is > Ix

Ix (P0290)

Relay/

Transistor

OFF

Fault

Time

No fault

j (b)) Fault

Relay/

Transistor

OFF

g) Is < Ix

Ix (P0290)

Time

Relay/

Transistor

No fault

OFF

Time

Fault

j (a)) No fault

Motor torque

(P0009)

Relay/

Transistor

OFF

Tx (P0293)

Time

i) Torque < Tx

OFF

Relay/

Transistor

Motor Torque

(P0009) Tx (P0293)

Time

h) Torque > Tx

P0291

Relay/

Transistor

OFF OFF

Speed

e) N = 0 (Zero) Speed

Relay/

Transistor

ON ON

OFF

Time

2 mA

k) 4-20 mA Reference OK

Reference

Figure 13.7 e) to k) - Details on the operation of the digital output functions (cont.)

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-24

m) Process Variable < PVy

Time

OFF

VPy (P0534)

Relay/

Transistor

Process

Variable

l) Process Variable > PVx

OFF

Time

VPx (P0533)

Process

Variable

Relay/

Transistor

OFF

Relay/

Transistor

ON ON

OFF

Time

Pre-charge

Level

DC Link

n) Pre-Charge Ok

q) F > Fx (1)

P0281 + P0282

P0281 - P0282

Fx (P0281)

OFF

Relay

p) N > Nx and Nt > Nx

Nt N

Relay/Transistor

OFF

Time

Nx (P0288)

Enabled

Hours.

(P0043)

6553 h

Relay/

Transistor

OFFOFF

Hx (P0294)

Time

o) Time enabled > Hx

r) F > Fx (2)

P0281 - P0282

Fx (P0281)

OFF

Relay/

Transistor OFF

s) No Alarm

Relay/Transistor

No Alarm

OFF

Time

Alarm

Figure 13.7 l) to s) - Details on the operation of the digital output functions (cont.)

13-25

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

P0281 – Fx Frequency

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 300.0 Hz Factory

Setting:

4.0 Hz

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

It is used in the digital output and relay functions:

F>Fx(1) and F>Fx(2)

P0282 – Fx Hysteresis

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 15.0 Hz Factory

Setting:

2.0 Hz

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

It is used in the digital output and relay functions:

F > Fx(1) and F>Fx(2)

P0283 – DO2 On Time

P0284 – DO2 Off Time

P0285 – DO3 On Time

P0286 – DO3 Off Time

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 300.0 s Factory

Setting:

0.0 s

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

Those parameters are used in relay outputs 2 and 3 Timer functions, they adjust the time for the activation or

deactivation of the relay after a transition of the digital input programmed for this function, as detailed in the

parameters of the previous section.

Thus, after a DIx transition for activating or deactivating the programmed relay, it is necessary that this DIx remains

in On/Off for at least the time adjusted in the parameters P0283/P0285 and P0284/P0286. Otherwise the timer

will be reset. Refer to the figure 13.5.

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-26

P0287 – Hysteresis for Nx and Ny

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 900 rpm Factory

Setting:

18 rpm

(15 rpm)

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

It is used in the N > Nx and N < Ny functions of the digital and relay outputs.

P0288 – Nx Speed

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

120 rpm

(100 rpm)

P0289 – Ny Speed

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

1800 rpm

(1500 rpm)

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

They are used in the N* > Nx, N > Nx, and N < Ny functions of the digital and relay outputs.

P0290 – Ix Current

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 2 x Inom-ND Factory

Setting:

1.0 x Inom-ND

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

It is used in the Is > Ix and Ix < Ix functions of the digital and relay outputs.

P0291 – Zero Speed Zone

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

18 rpm

(15 rpm)

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

35 Zero Speed Logic 41 Digital Outputs

13-27

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Description:

It specifies the value in rpm where the Actual Speed will be considered null for the actuation of the Zero Speed Disable

function.

This parameter is also used for the functions: Digital and relay outputs, and by the PID regulator.

P0292 – N = N* Band

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

18 rpm

(15 rpm)

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

It is used in the N = N* function of the digital and relay outputs.

P0293 – Tx Torque

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 200 % Factory

Setting:

100 %

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

It is used in the Torque > Tx and Torque < Tx functions of the digital and relay outputs.

In those functions the motor torque indicated in P0009 is compared with the value adjusted in P0293.

The setting of this parameter is expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current (P0401=100 %).

P0294 – Hx Time

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 6553 h Factory

Setting:

4320 h

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs

Description:

It is used in the Enabled Hours > Hx function of the digital and relay outputs.

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-28

13.2 LOCAL COMMAND [31]

13.3 REMOTE COMMAND [32]

In those parameter groups one can configure the origin of the main inverter commands when in the LOCAL or

in the REMOTE situation, as the Speed Reference, Speed Direction, Run/Stop and JOG.

P0220 – LOCAL/REMOTE Selection Source

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Always LOCAL

1 = Always REMOTE

2 = Local/Remote Key LOCAL

3 = Local/Remote Key REMOTE

4 = DIx

5 = Serial/USB LOCAL

6 = Serial/USB REMOTE

7 = Anybus-CC LOCAL

8 = Anybus-CC REMOTE

9 = CANopen/DeviceNet LOCAL

10 = CANopen/DeviceNet REMOTE

11 = SoftPLC LOCAL

12 = SoftPLC REMOTE

13 = PLC11 LOCAL

14 = PLC11 REMOTE

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

31 Local Command 32 Remote Command

Description:

It defines the origin of the command that will select between the LOCAL situation and the REMOTE situation,

where:

LOCAL: Means Local Default situation.

REMOTE: Means Remote Default situation.

DIx: Refer to the section 13.1.3.

P0221 – Speed Reference Selection – LOCAL Situation

P0222 – Speed Reference Selection – REMOTE Situation

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Keypad

1 = AI1

2 = AI2

3 = AI3

4 = AI4

5 = AI1 + AI2 > 0 (Sum AIs > 0)

6 = AI1 + AI2 (Sum AIs)

7 = E.P.

8 = Multispeed

9 = Serial/USB

10 = Anybus-CC

11 = CANopen/DeviceNet

12 = SoftPLC

13 = PLC11

Factory

Setting:

P0221=0

P0222=1

13-29

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

31 Local Command 32 Local Command

Description:

They define the origin of the Speed Reference in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation.

Some notes about the options for those parameters:

The AIx’ designation refers to the analog signal obtained after the addition of the AIx input to the offset and its

multiplication by the applied gain (refer to the section 13.1.1).

The value of the reference adjusted with the and is contained in the parameter P0121.

When the option 7 is selected (E.P.), one of the digital inputs must be programmed at 11 (Increase E.P.) and

another at 12 (Decrease E.P.). Refer to the section 12.5 for more details.

When the option 8 is selected, P0266 and/or P0267 and/or P0268 must be programmed at 13 (Multispeed).

Refer to the section 12.4.

When P0203=1 (PID Regulator), do not use the reference via E.P.

When P0203=1, the value programmed in P0221/P022 becomes the PID Setpoint.

P0223 – FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - LOCAL Situation

P0226 – FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - REMOTE Situation

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Always FORWARD

1 = Always REVERSE

2 = Forward/Reverse Key (FWD)

3 = Forward/Reverse Key (REV)

4 = DIx

5 = Serial/USB (FWD)

6 = Serial/USB (REV)

7 = Anybus-CC (FWD)

8 = Anybus-CC (REV)

9 = CANopen/DeviceNet (FWD)

10 = CANopen/DeviceNet (REV)

11 = AI4 Polarity

12 = SoftPLC (FWD)

13 = SoftPLC (REV)

14 = AI2 Polarity

15 = PLC11 FORWARD

16 = PLC11 REVERSE

Factory

Setting:

P0223=2

P0226=4

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

31 Local Command 32 Remote Command

Description:

They define the origin of the “Speed Direction” command in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation,

where:

FWD: Means Forward Default situation.

REV: Means Reverse Default situation.

DIx: Refer to the section 13.1.3.

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-30

P0224 – Run/Stop Selection – LOCAL Situation

P0227 – Run/Stop Selection - REMOTE Situation

Adjustable

Range: 0 = Keys ,

1 = DIx

2 = Serial/USB

3 = Anybus-CC

4 = CANopen/DeviceNet

5 = SoftPLC

6 = PLC11

Factory

Setting:

P0224=0

P0227=1

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

31 Local Command 32 Remote Command

Description:

They define the origin of the Run/Stop command in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation.

P0225 – JOG Selection – LOCAL Situation

P0228 – JOG Selection - REMOTE Situation

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Disabled

1 = JOG Key

2 = DIx

3 = Serial/USB

4 = Anybus-CC

5 = CANopen/DeviceNet

6 = SoftPLC

7 = PLC11

Factory

Setting:

P0225=1

P0228=2

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

31 Local Command 32 Remote Command

Description:

They define the origin of the JOG command in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation.

P0229 – Stop Mode Selection

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Ramp to Stop

1 = Coast to Stop

2 = Fast Stop

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

31 Local Command 32 Remote Command

13-31

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Description:

It defines the motor stop mode when the inverter receives the “Stop” command. The table 13.12 describes the

options of this parameter.

Table 13.12 - Stop mode selection

P0229 Description

0 = Ramp to Stop The inverter will apply the ramp programmed in P0101 and/or P0103.

1 = Coast to Stop The motor will run free until stopping

2 = Fast Stop The inverter will apply a null ramp (time = 0.0 second), in order to stop the motor in

the shortest possible time

NOTE!

When the control modes V/f or VVW are selected, the use of the option 2 (Fast Stop) is not

recommended.

NOTE!

When the Coast to Stop, stop mode, is programmed and the Flying-Start function is not enabled,

then start the motor again only if it is standing still.

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-32

AI2

AI3

AI4

AI1

P0239

P0234

P0244

P0249

P0237

P0232

P0242

P0247

P0019

P0020

P0021

P0018

P0236 = 1 Ref. after Ramp (P0236 = No Ramp Reference)(*)

P0231 = 1 - Ref. after Ramp (P0231 = No Ramp Reference)(*)

P0241 = 1 Ref. after Ramp (P0241 = No Ramp Reference)(*)

P0246 = 1 - Ref. after Ramp (P0246 = No Ramp Reference)(*)

JOG+ (*)

Command via digital inputs (DIx)

JOG- (*)

JOG

-1

FWD/REV

(Speed direction)

Run/Stop

JOG

Reference Limits

P0134

P0133

P0134

Total

Reference

Commands and

Reference.

Refer to the

figure 13.9

P0122

OFFSET

P0163 – LOCAL

P0164 – REMOTE

P0001

P0134 = Maximum

Reference

P0133 = Minimum

Reference

P0123

P0122

P0102-Acceleration

P0103-Deceleration

Acceleration/

Deceleration Time 2

P0100-Acceleration

P0101-Deceleration

Fast Stop

Acceleration/

Deceleration Time

(*) Valid only for P0202=3 and 4.

Reference

Figure 13.8 - Speed Reference block diagram

13-33

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

LOCAL

REFERENCE (P0221)

LOCAL

REFERENCE

REMOTE

REFERENCE

LOCAL

COMMANDS

REMOTE

COMMANDS

(P0220)

LOCAL/REMOTE Selection

REFERENCE

COMMANDS

REFERENCE

FORWARD/REVERSE

(P0223)

JOG (P0225)

RUN/STOP (P0224)

REMOTE

REFERENCE (P0222)

FORWARD/REVERSE

(P0226)

JOG (P0228)

RUN/STOP (P0227)

Figure 13.9 - Local/Remote situation block diagram

13.4 3-WIRE COMMAND [33]

The group defined as “3-Wire Command” refers to the function Run/Stop programmed via digital inputs.

With this function it is possible to activate or deactivate the motor by means of pulses at the digital inputs

configured as Run (DIx=6) and Stop (DIx=7). It is important to notice that the Stop pulse is inverted, i.e., a

transition from +24 V to 0 V.

For a better understanding of this function it is recommended to verify the figure 13.6 (k).

13.5 FORWARD RUN/REVERSE RUN COMMANDS [34]

The FWD Run/REV Run function can be used to command the motor in the forward direction and in the reverse

direction by means of digital inputs.

With the application of +24 V to the input programmed for FWD Run (DIx=4), the motor accelerates in the forward

direction until reaching the speed reference. Once the FWD Run input has been released (0 V) and +24 V has

been applied at the input programmed for REV Run (DIx=5), the CFW-11 will activate the motor in the reverse

direction until it reaches the speed reference. Refer to the figure 13.6 (l).

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13-34

14-1

Dynamic Braking

DYNAMIC BRAKING

The braking torque that can be obtained through the application of frequency inverters without dynamic braking

resistors varies from 10 % to 35 % of the motor rated torque.

In order to obtain higher braking torques, resistors for dynamic braking are used. In this case the regenerated

energy is dissipated on the resistor mounted externally to the inverter.

This type of braking is used in the cases when short deceleration times are wished or when high inertia loads

are driven.

For the vector control mode there is the possibility of the use of the “Optimal Braking”, eliminating in many

cases the need of the dynamic braking.

14.1 DYNAMIC BRAKING [28]

The Dynamic Braking function can only be used if a braking resistor has been connected to the CFW-11, and

if the parameters related to it have been adjusted properly.

See next the description of the parameters in order to know how to program each one.

P0153 – Dynamic Braking Level

Adjustable

Range:

339 to 400 V

585 to 800 V

809 to 1000 V

924 to 1200 V

Factory

Setting:

P0296=0: 375 V

P0296=1: 618 V

P0296=2: 675 V

P0296=3: 748 V

P0296=4: 780 V

P0296=5: 893 V

P0296=6: 972 V

P0296=7: 972 V

P0296=8: 1174 V

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

28 Dynamic Braking

Description:

The parameter P0153 defines the voltage level for the braking IGBT actuation, and it must be compatible with the

power supply voltage.

If P0153 is adjusted at a level very close to the overvoltage (F022) actuation level, the fault may occur before the

Braking resistor is able to dissipate the regenerated energy.

Dynamic Braking

14-2

The next table presents the overvoltage trip level.

Table 14.1 - Overvoltage (F022) trip levels

Inverter Vnom P0296 F022

220/230 V 0 > 400 V

380 V 1

> 800 V

400/415 V 2

440/460 V 3

480 V 4

500/525 V 5

> 1000 V550/575 V 6

600 V 7

660/690 V 8 > 1200 V

F022 - Overvoltage

Dynamic braking actuation

Time

Braking Resistor

Voltage (DB)

P0153

Rated Ud

DC Link Voltage (Ud) (P0004)

Figure 14.1 - Dynamic Braking actuation curve

Steps to enable the dynamic braking:

Connect the braking resistor (Refer to the section 3.2.3.2 of the User Manual);

Set P0154 and P0155 according to the used braking resistor;

Set P0151 at the maximum value: 400 V (P0296=0), 800 V (P0296=1, 2, 3 or 4), 1000 V (P0296=5,

6 or 7) or 1200 V (P0296=8), according to the case, in order to prevent the activation of the DC voltage

regulation before the dynamic braking.

P0154 – Dynamic Braking Resistor

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 500.0 ohm Factory

Setting:

0.0 ohm

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

28 Dynamic Braking

Description:

Adjust this parameter with the ohmic value of the used braking resistor.

If P0154=0, the braking resistor overload protection is disabled. It must be programmed in zero if no braking

resistor is used.

14-3

Dynamic Braking

P0155 – Dynamic Braking Resistor Power

Adjustable

Range:

0.02 to 650.00 kW Factory

Setting:

2.60 kW

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

28 Dynamic Braking

Description:

This parameter adjusts the trip level of the braking resistor overload protection.

It must be set according to the used braking resistor rated power (in kW).

Operation: if the average power dissipated on the braking resistor exceeds the value adjusted in P0155 for 2

minutes, the inverter will be disabled with F077 – DB Resistor Overload.

In order to get more details on the selection of the braking resistor, refer to the section 3.2.3.2 of the User

Manual.

Dynamic Braking

14-4

15-1

Faults and Alarms

FAULTS AND ALARMS

The troubleshooting structure of the inverter is based on the indication of faults and alarms.

In a fault event the IGBTs firing pulses are disabled and the motor coasts to stop.

The alarm works as a warning to the user that critical operation conditions are occurring and a fault may occur

if the situation does not change.

Refer to the CFW-11 User Manual chapter 6 and chapter 0 - Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

of this manual to obtain more information regarding the Faults and Alarms.

15.1 MOTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION

The Motor Overload protection is based on the use of curves that simulate the heating and cooling of the motor

in overload events, according to IEC 60947-4-2 and UL 508C standards. The fault and alarm codes for the

motor overload protection are F072 and A046, respectively.

The motor overload is given in function of the reference value In x SF (motor rated current multiplied by the

service factor), which is the maximum value at which the protection must not actuate because the motor is able

to operate indefinitely with this current value without suffering damages.

However, for that protection to act in an appropriate manner, the thermal image of the motor, which corresponds

to the heating up and cooling down times of the motor, is estimated.

The thermal image, in its turn, depends on the motor thermal constant, which is estimated based on the motor

power and number of poles.

The thermal image is important to allow that a derating in the fault actuation time be given, so that shorter

actuation times be obtained when the motor is hot.

This function applies a derating in the fault actuation time depending on the output frequency supplied to the

motor, because for the self-ventilated ones there will be less ventilation on the frame at lower speeds, and the

motor will be subject to more heating. Thus, it becomes necessary to reduce the fault actuation time in order

to prevent the motor from burning.

In order to assure more protection in case of restart, this function keeps the information regarding the motor

thermal image in the CFW-11 nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). Therefore, after the inverter restart, the function

will use the value saved in the thermal memory to perform a new overload evaluation.

The parameter P0348 configures the desired protection level for the motor overload function. The possible

options are: Fault and Alarm, only Fault, only Alarm, and disabled motor overload protection. The actuation

level for the motor overload alarm (A046) is adjusted via P0349.

In order to get more information, refer to the parameters P0156, P0159, P0348 and P0349 in the section

15.3.

Faults and Alarms

15-2

NOTE!

In order to assure the conformity of the CFW-11 motor overload protection with the UL508C standard,

observe the following:

“Trip” current equal to 1.25 times the motor nominal current (P0401) adjusted in the “Guided

Start-up” menu.

The maximum allowed value for the parameter P0159 (Motor Trip Class) is 3 (Trip Class 20).

The maximum allowed value for P0398 (Motor Service Factor) is 1.15.

15.2 MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE PROTECTION

ATTENTION!

The PTC must have a reinforced insulation against the live parts of the motor and of the

installation.

This protection performs the motor overtemperature protection by means of the alarm (A110) and the fault

(F078) indication.

The motor must have a PTC type temperature sensor.

An analog output supplies constant current for the PTC (2 mA), while an inverter analog input reads the voltage

across the PTC and compares it with the limit values for fault and alarm. Refer to the table 15.1. When those

values are exceeded, the alarm or fault indication occurs.

The analog outputs AO1 and AO2 of the control module, as well as the analog outputs existent on the accessory

modules AO1-B and AO2-B (IOB) can be used to supply the constant current for the PTC. Therefore it is necessary

to configure the DIP switches of the output for current and to set the output function parameter for 13=PTC.

The analog inputs AI1 and AI2 of the control module, as well as the analog inputs existent on the accessory

modules AI3 (IOB) and AI4 (IOA) can be used to read the PTC voltage. Therefore it is necessary to configure

the input DIP switch for voltage and to set the input function parameter for 4=PTC. Refer to the parameter

P0351 on the section 15.3.

NOTE!

In order that this function works properly, it is important to keep gains and offset of the analog input

and output in the default values.

Table 15.1 - A110 and F078 trip levels

Action PTC AI voltage

A110 occurs during the temperature increase RPTC>3.51 kΩVAI>7.0 V

F078 trips during the temperature increase RPTC>3.9 kΩVAI>7.8 V

Resets A110 alarm 150 Ω < RPTC<1.6 kΩ0.3<VAI<3.2 V

Allows the reset of the F078 fault 150 Ω < RPTC<1.6 kΩ0.3<VAI<3.2 V

F078 trips (minimum resistance detection) RPTC<100 Ω<0.2 V

15-3

Faults and Alarms

PTC

XC1:

AI1

AO1 CC11

(a) AO1, AI1

PTC

AI2

AO2

(b) AO2, AI2

PTC

XC3:

AI3

AO1-B

I/OB

Figure 15.1 (a) to (c) - PTC connection examples

Faults and Alarms

15-4

PTC

XC3:

AI3

AO2-B

I/OB

(d) AO2-B, Al3

Figure 15.1 (d) - PTC connection examples (cont.)

15.3 PROTECTIONS [45]

The parameters related to motor and inverter protections are found in this group.

P0030 – U Arm IGBT Temperature

P0031 – V Arm IGBT Temperature

P0032 – W Arm IGBT Temperature

P0033 – Rectifier Temperature

P0034 – Internal Air Temperature

Adjustable

Range:

-20.0 to 150.0 °C Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

These parameters present, in Celsius degrees, the heatsink temperature on the U, V and W arms (P0030, P0031

and P0032), of the rectifier (P0033), and also of the internal air (P0034).

They are useful to monitor the temperature on the main inverter sections in case of an occasional inverter

overheating.

P0156 – Motor Overload Current at 100% of its Rated Speed

P0157 – Motor Overload Current at 50% of its Rated Speed

15-5

Faults and Alarms

P0158 – Motor Overload Current at 5% of its Rated Speed

Adjustable

Range:

0.1 to 1.5 x Inom-ND Factory

Setting:

P0156=1.05x Inom-ND

P0157=0.9x Inom-ND

P0158=0.5x Inom-ND

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

These parameters are used for the motor overload protection (I x t – F072).

The motor overload current (P0156, P0157 and P0158) is the value from which the inverter starts considering that

the motor is operating with overload.

The bigger the difference between the motor current and the overload current, the faster F072 trip will occur.

The parameter P0156 (Motor Overload Current at 100 % of its Rated Speed) must be adjusted 5 % higher than the

motor rated current (P0401).

The overload current is given as a function of the speed being applied to the motor, according to the overload

curve. The parameter P0156, P0157 and P0158 are the three points used to form the motor overload curve, as

presented in the figure 15.2.

% Rated Speed

% P0401

P0156

0 5 50 100

110

105

100

P0157

Curve for a motor with separated ventilation

Curve for a Self-ventilated motor

Increased Protection curve

P0158

Figure 15.2 - Overload protection levels

With the setting of the overload current curve, it is possible to set an overload value that varies according to the

operation speed of the motor (factory setting), improving the protection for self-ventilated motors, or a constant

overload level for any speed applied to the motor (motors with separated ventilation).

This curve is adjusted automatically when P0406 (Motor Ventilation Type) is set during the “Oriented Start-up” routine

(refer to this parameter description in the section 11.7).

Faults and Alarms

15-6

P0159 – Motor Thermal Class

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Class 5

1 = Class 10

2 = Class 15

3 = Class 20

4 = Class 25

5 = Class 30

6 = Class 35

7 = Class 40

8 = Class 45

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

This parameter sets the motor thermal class, and the time for the correct actuation of the F072 fault depends on it.

The higher the thermal class, the longer the fault actuation time will be.

ATTENTION!

The incorrect selection of the thermal class may cause the burning of the motor.

ATTENTION!

In order that the CFW-11 motor overload protection be in conformity with the UL508C standard, use

atrippingclass≤20(P0159≤3).

The necessary data for choosing the thermal class are the following:

- Motor rated current (In);

- Blocked rotor current (Ip);

- Blocked rotor time (TBR)*;

- Service factor (SF).

* Note.: It must be verified if the given blocked rotor time is for hot or cold motor, so that the correspondent thermal

class curves be used.

With those values, the overload current and the overload time must be calculated using the following equations:

Overload Current = Ip x 100 (%)

In x SF

Overload Time = TBR (s)

These equations provide the limit conditions for the error actuation, i.e., the motor cannot work with a longer fault

actuation time than this one, because of burning risk. Thus, a thermal class immediately inferior must be chosen so

that the motor protection is assured.

15-7

Faults and Alarms

Example: For a motor with the following characteristics,

In = 10.8 A

TBR = 4 s (hot motor blocked rotor time)

Ip / In = 7.8 ⇒ Ip = 7.8 x 10.8 A= 84.2 A

SF = 1.15

one gets,

Overload Current = Ip = 84.2 x 100 = 678 %

In x SF 10.8 x 1.15

Overload Time = TBR = 4 s

After this, it is only necessary to plot the calculated values on the motor overload graph (figures 15.3 (a) or 15.3 (b),

and to select the thermal class curve immediately below the calculated point.

Figure 15.3 (a) - Cold motor overload curves for loads of the HD and ND types

Faults and Alarms

15-8

Figure 15.3 (b) - Hot motor overload curves for loads of the HD and ND types

For the previous example, by plotting the 678 % value (x axis) of the Overload Current with the 4 seconds (y axis) of

the Overload Time in the graph of the figure 15.3 (b) (hot motor), the thermal class to be selected will be the class

15 (t15).

P0340 – Auto-Reset Time

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 255 s Factory

Setting:

0 s

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

When a fault occurs (except F067 – Incorrect Encoder/Motor Wiring and F099 – Invalid Current Offset), the inverter

can reset itself automatically after the time set in P0340 has elapsed.

NOTE!

The faults F051, F078, F156, F301, F304, F307, F310, F313, F316, F319, F322, F325, F328,

F331, F334, F337, F340 and F343 allow a conditional Reset, i.e., the Reset will only occur if the

temperature gets back to the normal operation range.

15-9

Faults and Alarms

If after Auto-Reset, the same fault is repeated three times consecutively, the Auto-Reset function will be disabled. A fault

is considered consecutive if it happens again within 30 seconds after the Auto-Reset.

Therefore, if a fault occurs four consecutive times, the inverter will remain disabled (general disable) and the fault will

remain being indicated.

If P0340 ≤ 2, auto-reset will not occur.

P0342 – Motor Unbalanced Current Detection

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

This parameter enables the motor unbalanced current detection, which will be responsible for the F076 fault

actuation.

This function will be enabled to actuate when the conditions below were fulfilled simultaneously for longer than 2

seconds.

1. P0342=On;

2. Enabled inverter;

3. Speed reference higher than 3 %;

4. |Iu - Iv| or |Iu - Iw| or |Iv - Iw| > 0.125 x P0401.

P0343 – Ground Fault Detection

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

This parameter enables the Ground Fault Detection, which will be responsible for the F074 (Ground Fault)

actuation.

Thus if wished, it is possible to inhibit the Ground Fault (F074) occurrence by setting P0343=Off.

P0348 – Motor Overload Protection

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = Fault/Alarm

2 = Fault

3 = Alarm

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Faults and Alarms

15-10

Description:

This parameter allows the desired protection level for the motor overload function to be configured. Refer to the

table below for details on the actuation of each one of the available options.

Table 15.2 - Actions for the parameter P0348 options

P0348 Action

0 = Off The overload protection is disabled. Faults or alarms will not be generated for the motor operation

in overload conditions

1 = Fault/Alarm

The inverter will show an alarm (A046) when the motor reaches the level programmed in P0349,

and a fault (F072) when the motor reaches the overload actuation value. Once the fault is

generated, the inverter will be disabled

2 = Fault Only the fault (F072) will be generated when the motor reaches the overload protection trip level,

and the inverter will be disabled

3 = Alarm Only the alarm (A046) will be generated when the motor reaches the level programmed in P0349,

and the motor continues operating

The trip level of the overload protection is calculated internally by the CFW-11, taking into account the motor

current, its thermal class and its service factor. Refer to the parameter P0159 in this section.

P0349 – Motor Overload Alarm Level

Adjustable

Range:

70 to 100 % Factory

Setting:

85 %

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

This parameter defines the level for the motor overload protection alarm actuation (A046), it is expressed as a

percentage of the trip level of the overload integrator.

It will only be effective if P0348 is programmed in 1 (Fault/Alarm) or 3 (Alarm).

P0350 – Inverter Overload Protection (IGBTs)

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Fault is active, with switching frequency reduction

1 = Fault and alarm are active, with switching frequency

reduction

2 = Fault is active, without switching frequency reduction

3 = Fault and alarm are active, without switching frequency

reduction

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

The inverter overload function operates separately from the motor overload protection, and it has the purpose

of protecting the IGBTs and rectifiers in case of overload, avoiding that damage due to overtemperature at their

junctions occurs.

Thus, the parameter P0350 allows configuring the desired protection level for this function, even with the automatic

reduction of the switching frequency, in order to avoid the fault occurrence. The next table describes each of the

available options.

15-11

Faults and Alarms

Table 15.3 - Actions for the parameter P0350 options

P0350 Action

0It enables F048 – IGBT Overload Fault. In order to avoid the occurrence of the fault, the switching frequency is redu-

ced automatically to 2.5 kHz (*)

1It enables the fault F048 and the alarm A047 – IGBT Overload Alarm. In order to avoid the occurrence of the fault,

the switching frequency is reduced automatically to 2.5 kHz (*)

2 It enables F048. Without the reduction of the switching frequency

3 It enables the alarm A047 and the fault F048. Without the reduction of the switching frequency

(*) It reduces the switching frequency when:

- The output current exceeds 1.5 x InomHD (1.1 x InomND); or

- The temperature at the IGBT case is less than 10°C from the maximum temperature; and

- P0297=2 (5 kHz).

P0351 – Motor Overtemperature Protection

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = Fault/Alarm

2 = Fault

3 = Alarm

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

This parameter is useful when the motor is equipped with PTC type temperature sensors, allowing the configuration

of the protection level for the motor overtemperature function. The details on the actuation of the available options

are in the table 15.4. Refer also to the section 15.2.

Table 15.4 - Actions for the parameter P0351 options

P0351 Action

0 = Off The overtemperature protection is disabled. Faults or alarms for the motor operation in the

overtemperature condition will not be generated

1 = Fault / Alarm The inverter will show an alarm (A110) and will generate a fault (F078) when the motor reaches

the overtemperature actuation values. Once a fault is generated, the inverter will be disabled

2 = Fault Only the fault (F078) will be generated when the motor reaches the overtemperature protection

trip level, and the inverter will be disabled

3 = Alarm Only the alarm (A110) will be generated when the motor reaches the protection actuation level,

and the inverter remains operating

Faults and Alarms

15-12

P0352 – Fan Control

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Heatsink fan and internal fan are OFF

1 = Heatsink fan and internal fan are ON

2 = Heatsink fan and internal fan are controlled via software

3 = Heatsink fan is controlled via software and internal fan is OFF

4 = Heatsink fan is controlled via software and internal fan is ON

5 = Heatsink fan is ON and internal fan is OFF

6 = Heatsink fan is ON and internal fan is controlled via software

7 = Heatsink fan is OFF and internal fan is ON

8 = Heatsink fan is OFF and internal fan is controlled via software

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

The CFW-11 is equipped with two fans: an internal fan and a heatsink fan, and the activation of both will be

controlled via software by means of the inverter programming.

The options available for the setting of this parameter are the following:

Table 15.5 - Options of the parameter P0352

P0352 Action

0 = HS-OFF, Int-OFF Heatsink fan is always OFF.

Internal fan is always OFF.

1 = HS-ON, Int-ON Heatsink fan is always ON.

Internal fan is always ON.

2 = HS-CT, Int-CT Heatsink fan is controlled via software.

Internal fan is controlled via software.

3 = HS-CT, Int-OFF Heatsink fan is controlled via software.

Internal fan is always OFF.

4 = HS-CT, Int-ON Heatsink fan is controlled via software.

Internal fan is always ON.

5 = HS-ON, Int-OFF Heatsink fan is always ON.

Internal fan is always OFF.

6 = HS-ON, Int-CT Heatsink fan is always ON.

Internal fan is controlled via software.

7 = HS-OFF, Int-ON Heatsink fan is always OFF.

Internal fan is always ON.

8 = HS-OFF, Int-CT Heatsink fan is always OFF.

Internal fan is controlled via software.

15-13

Faults and Alarms

P0353 – IGBTs and Internal Air Overtemperature Protection

Adjustable

Range:

0 = IGBTs: fault and alarm, Internal air: fault and alarm

1 = IGBTs: fault and alarm, Internal air: fault

2 = IGBTs: fault, Internal air: fault and alarm

3 = IGBTs: fault, Internal air: fault

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

The overtemperature protection is carried out by means of the measurement of the temperature with the IGBTs and

power board internal air NTCs, being able to generate alarms and faults.

In order to configure the desired protection, set P0353 according to the table below.

Table 15.6 - Options of the parameter P0353

P0353 Action

0 = HS-F/A, Air-F/A

Enables fault (F051) – IGBT Overtemperature and alarm (A050) – IGBT High Temperature

Enables fault (F153) – Internal Air Overtemperature and alarm (A152) – Internal Air High

Temperature

1 = HS-F/A, Air-F Enables fault (F051) and alarm (A050) for IGBTs overtemperature

Enables only fault (F153) for internal air overtemperature

2 = HS-F, Air-F/A Enables only fault (F051)for IGBT overtemperature

Enables fault (F153) and alarm (A152) for internal air overtemperature

3 = HS-F, Air-F Enables only fault (F051)for IGBT overtemperature

Enables only fault (F153) for internal air overtemperature

P0354 – Heatsink Fan Protection

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = Fault

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

When the heatsink fan speed reaches a value below ¼ of the rated speed the fault F179 (Heatsink Fan Speed Fault)

will be generated. This parameter makes it possible that the generation of this fault be disabled, as presented in

the next table.

Table 15.7 - Actions for the parameter P0354 options

P0354 Action

0 = Off The heatsink fan speed fault protection is disabled.

1 = Fault It enables the fault (F179). The inverter will be disabled if the fault occurs.

P0356 – Dead Time Compensation

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Faults and Alarms

15-14

Description:

This parameter must be kept always in 1 (On). Only in special maintenance cases the value 0 (Off) can be used.

P0357 – Line Phase Loss Time

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 60 s Factory

Setting:

3 s

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

It configures the time for the line phase loss indication (F006).

If P0357=0, the function remains disabled.

P0359 – Motor Current Stabilization

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: V/f and VVW

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections

Description:

The parameter P0359 allows enabling the motor current stabilizing function.

This function eliminates oscillations in the motor current caused by operation at low speeds with little load.

P0800 - Phase U Book 1 Temperature

P0801 - Phase V Book 1 Temperature

P0802 - Phase W Book 1 Temperature

P0803 - Phase U Book 2 Temperature

P0804 - Phase V Book 2 Temperature

P0805 - Phase W Book 2 Temperature

P0806 - Phase U Book 3 Temperature

P0807 - Phase V Book 3 Temperature

P0808 - Phase W Book 3 Temperature

15-15

Faults and Alarms

P0809 - Phase U Book 4 Temperature

P0810 - Phase V Book 4 Temperature

P0811 - Phase W Book 4 Temperature

P0812 - Phase U Book 5 Temperature

P0813 - Phase V Book 5 Temperature

P0814 - Phase W Book 5 Temperature

Adjustable

Range:

-20.0 °C to 150.0 °C Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

45 Protections

Description:

These read only parameters indicate, in Celsius degrees (°C), the internal temperature of the IGBTs of each phase of

each book. The indication resolution is 0.1 °C. Refer to the CFW-11M User Manual to obtain more information.

P0832 - Digital Input DIM1 Function

P0833 - Digital Input DIM2 Function

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Not Used

1 = External Fault

2 = Refrigeration Fault

3 = Braking Resistor Overtemperature

4 = Rectifier Overtemperature

5 = Rectifier High Temperature

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS

45 Protections 40 Digital Inputs

Description:

These parameters allow configuring the digital inputs DIM1 and DIM2 with the type of fault (0 to 4) or alarm (5) that

must be recognized by the control, signalized on the keypad (HMI), and for the options 0 to 4, cause the disabling

of the inverter.

Faults and Alarms

15-16

P0834 - DIM1 and DIM2 Status

Adjustable

Range:

Bit 0 = DIM1

Bit 1 = DIM2

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

40 Digital Inputs

Description:

Through this parameter it is possible to visualize the status of the 2 digital inputs of the Modular Drive interface

board.

The indication is done by means of the numbers 1 and 0, representing respectively the states No Fault/Alarm or

With Fault/Alarm at the inputs.

The state of each input is considered as one digit in the sequence where DIM1 represents the least significant

digit.

Refer to the CFW-11M User Manual to obtain more information.

16-1

Read Only Parameters [09]

READ ONLY PARAMETERS [09]

In order to facilitate the visualization of the main reading variables of the inverter, the group [09] - “Read Only

Parameters” can be accessed directly.

It is important to point out that all the parameters of that group can only be visualized on the keypad (HMI)

display, and that they do not allow changes by the user.

P0001 – Speed Reference

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

This parameter presents, regardless of the origin source, the value of the speed reference in rpm (factory setting).

The indication unit can be modified from rpm to another unit through P0209, P0210 and P0211, as well as the

scale by means of P0208 and P0212.

It is also possible to change the speed reference (P0121) through this parameter, when P0221 or P0222=0.

P0002 – Motor Speed

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

This parameter indicates the motor actual speed value in rpm (factory setting), with a 0.5 second filter.

The indication unit can be modified from rpm to another unit through P0209, P0210 and P0211, as well as the

scale by means of P0208 and P0212.

It is also possible to change the speed reference (P0121) through this parameter, when P0221 or P0222=0

Read Only Parameters [09]

16-2

P0003 – Motor Current

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 4500.0 A Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the inverter output current in Amps (A).

P0004 – DC Link Voltage (Ud)

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 2000 V Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the DC Link actual dc voltage in volts (V).

P0005 – Motor Frequency

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 300.0 Hz Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the inverter output frequency in Hertz (Hz).

P0006 – Inverter Status

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Ready

1 = Run

2 = Undervoltage

3 = Fault

4 = Self-Tuning

5 = Configuration

6 = DC-Braking

7 = STO

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

16-3

Read Only Parameters [09]

Description:

It indicates one of the 8 possible inverter states. The description of each state is presented in the next table.

In order to facilitate the visualization, the inverter status is also showed on the top left corner of the keypad (HMI)

(figure 5.3 – section 5.6). The states 2 to 6 are presented in an abbreviated form, as follows:

Table 16.1 - Description of the inverter status

State Abbreviated form on the

keypad (HMI) top left corner Description

Ready Ready It indicates that the inverter is ready to be enabled

Run Run It indicates that the inverter is enabled

Undervoltage Sub It indicates that the inverter is with insufficient line voltage for operation

(undervoltage), and does not accept enabling commands

Fault Fxxx, where xxx is the number

of the occurred fault It indicates that the inverter is in the fault state

Self-Tuning SelfTun It indicates that the inverter is executing the self-tuning routine

Configuration Config

It indicates that the inverter is in the Oriented Start-up routine or with

incompatible parameter programming. Refer to the parameter incompa-

tibility table (attachment)

DC-Braking DCbreak It indicates that the inverter is applying DC braking to stop the motor

STO STO It indicates that the Safety Stop is active (the 24Vdc voltage from the

safety relays coils has been removed)

P0007 – Motor Voltage

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 2000 V Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the output line voltage, in Volts (V).

P0009 – Motor Torque

Adjustable

Range:

-1000.0 to 1000.0 % Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the torque developed by the motor, calculated as follows:

Read Only Parameters [09]

16-4

P0009 = Tm x 100 x Y

ITM

ITM = P04012 - P0410 x P0178 2 1/2

100

Y = 1 for N ≤ P0190 x Nnom

P0400

Y = Nnom x P0190 for N > P0190 x Nnom

N P0400 P0400

Where:

Nnom = Motor synchronous speed;

N = Motor actual speed;

Tm = Motor torque current;

ITM = Rated motor torque current.

P0010 – Output Power

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 6553.5 kW Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the inverter instantaneous output power, in kilowatt (kW).

NOTE!

The value indicated in this parameter is calculated indirectly, and must not be used to measure the

energy consumption.

P0012 – DI8 to DI1 Status

Refer to the section 13.1.3

P0013 – DO5 to DO1 Status

Refer to the section 13.1.4

P0014 – AO1 Value

P0015 – AO2 Value

P0016 – AO3 Value

P0017 – AO4 Value

Refer to the section 13.1.2.

16-5

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0018 – AI1 Value

P0019 – AI2 Value

P0020 – AI3 Value

P0021 – AI4 Value

Refer to the section 13.1.1.

P0023 – Software Version

Refer to the section 6.1 for more details.

P0027 – Accessories Configuration 1

P0028 – Accessories Configuration 2

P0029 – Power Hardware Configuration

Refer to the section 6.1.

P0030 – U Arm IGBT Temperature

P0031 – V Arm IGBT Temperature

P0032 – W Arm IGBT Temperature

P0033 – Rectifier Temperature

P0034 – Internal Air Temperature

Refer to the section 15.3.

P0036 – Heatsink Fan Speed

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 15000 rpm Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the fan actual speed, in revolutions per minute (rpm).

P0037 – Motor Overload Status

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 100 % Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Read Only Parameters [09]

16-6

Description:

It indicates the actual overload percentage of the motor. When this parameter reaches 100% the fault “Motor

Overload” (F072) will occur.

P0038 – Encoder Speed

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 65535 rpm Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the encoder actual speed, in revolutions per minute (rpm), through a 0.5 second filter.

P0039 – Encoder Pulses Count

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 40000 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

This parameter shows the counting of the pulses of the encoder. The counting can be increased from 0 to 40000

(Hourly turn) or decreased from 40000 to 0 (rotate Counterclockwise). This parameter can be visualized in the

analogical exits when P0257=49 or P0260 =49. Consult section 12 -10.

P0040 – PID Process Variable

P0041 – PID Setpoint Value

Refer to the section 20.6.

P0042 – Time Powered

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 65535 h Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the total number of hours that the inverter remained powered.

This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter.

16-7

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0043 – Time Enabled

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 6553.5 h Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the total number of hours that the inverter remained enabled.

It indicates up to 6553.5 hours, and then it gets back to zero.

By setting P0204=3, the value of the parameter P0043 is reset to zero.

This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter.

P0044 – kWh Counter

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 65535 kWh Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

It indicates the energy consumed by the motor.

It indicates up to 65535 kWh, and then it gets back to zero.

By setting P0204=4, the value of the parameter P0044 is reset to zero.

This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter.

NOTE!

The value indicated in this parameter is calculated indirectly, and must not be used to measure the

energy consumption.

P0045 – Fan Enabled Time

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 65535 h Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Read Only Parameters [09]

16-8

Description:

It indicates the total number of hours that the heatsink fan remained enabled.

It indicates up to 65535 hours, and then it gets back to zero.

By setting P0204=2, the value of the parameter P0045 is reset to zero.

This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter.

P0048 – Present Alarm

P0049 – Present Fault

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 999 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

They indicate the alarm (P0048) or fault (P0049) number that occasionally be present at the inverter.

In order to understand the meaning of the codes used for faults and alarms, refer to the section 15 in this manual

and the chapter 6 of the User Manual.

16.1 FAULT HISTORY [08]

In this group are described the parameters that record the last faults occurred in the inverter, together with other

relevant information for the fault interpretation, as date, hour, motor speed, etc.

NOTE!

If the fault occurs simultaneously with the CFW-11 power up or reset, the parameters regarding this

fault, as date, hour, motor speed, etc., may contain invalid information.

P0050 – Last Fault

P0054 – Second Fault

P0058 – Third Fault

P0062 – Fourth Fault

P0066 – Fifth Fault

P0070 – Sixth Fault

P0074 – Seventh Fault

P0078 – Eighth Fault

16-9

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0082 – Ninth Fault

P0086 – Tenth Fault

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 999 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

They indicate the codes from the last to the tenth fault that have occurred.

The recording system is the following:

Fxxx → P0050 → P0054 → P0058 → P0062 → P0066 → P0070 → P0074 → P0078 → P0082 → P0086

P0051 – Last Fault Day/Month

P0055 – Second Fault Day/Month

P0059 – Third Fault Day/Month

P0063 – Fourth Fault Day/Month

P0067 – Fifth Fault Day/Month

P0071 – Sixth Fault Day/Month

P0075 – Seventh Fault Day/Month

P0079 – Eighth Fault Day/Month

P0083 – Ninth Fault Day/Month

P0087 – Tenth Fault Day/Month

Adjustable

Range:

00/00 to 31/12 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

They indicate the day and the month of the last to the tenth fault occurrence.

Read Only Parameters [09]

16-10

P0052 – Last Fault Year

P0056 – Second Fault Year

P0060 – Third Fault Year

P0064 – Fourth Fault Year

P0068 – Fifth Fault Year

P0072 – Sixth Fault Year

P0076 – Seventh Fault Year

P0080 – Eighth Fault Year

P0084 – Ninth Fault Year

P0088 – Tenth Fault Year

Adjustable

Range:

00 to 99 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

They indicate the year of the last to the tenth fault occurrence.

P0053 – Last Fault Time

P0057 – Second Fault Time

P0061 – Third Fault Time

P0065 – Fourth Fault Time

P0069 – Fifth Fault Time

P0073 – Sixth Fault Time

P0077 – Seventh Fault Time

P0081 – Eighth Fault Time

P0085 – Ninth Fault Time

16-11

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0089 – Tenth Fault Time

Adjustable

Range:

00:00 to 23:59 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

They indicate the time of the last to the tenth fault occurrence.

P0090 – Current at the Moment of the Last Fault

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 4000.0 A Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

It is the record of the current supplied by the inverter at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

P0091 – DC Link Voltage at the Moment of the Last Fault

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 2000 V Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

It is the record of the inverter DC link voltage at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

P0092 – Speed at the Moment of the Last Fault

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

It is the record of the motor speed at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

Read Only Parameters [09]

16-12

P0093 – Reference at the Moment of the Last Fault

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 18000 rpm Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

It is the record of the speed reference at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

P0094 – Frequency at the Moment of the Last Fault

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 300.0 Hz Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

It is the record of the inverter output frequency at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

P0095 – Motor Voltage at the Moment of the Last Fault

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 2000 V Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

It is the record of the motor voltage at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

P0096 – DIx Status at the Moment of the Last Fault

Adjustable

Range:

Bit 0 = DI1

Bit 1 = DI2

Bit 2 = DI3

Bit 3 = DI4

Bit 4 = DI5

Bit 5 = DI6

Bit 6 = DI7

Bit 7 = DI8

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

16-13

Read Only Parameters [09]

Description:

It indicates the state of the digital inputs at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

The indication is done by means of an hexadecimal code, which when converted to binary will indicate the states

“active” and “inactive” of the inputs through numbers 1 and 0.

Example: If the code presented for the parameter P0096 on the keypad (HMI) is 00A5, it will correspond to the

sequence 10100101, indicating that the inputs 8, 6, 3 and 1 were active at the moment of the last fault

occurrence.

Table 16.2 - Example of correspondence between the P0096 hexadecimal code and the DIx states

0 0 A 5

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

No relation with the DIx

(always zero)

DI8

Active

(+24 V)

DI7

Inactive

(0 V)

DI6

Active

(+24 V)

DI5

Inactive

(0 V)

DI4

Inactive

(0 V)

DI3

Active

(+24 V)

DI2

Inactive

(0 V)

DI1

Active

(+24 V)

P0097 – DOx Status at the Moment of the Last Fault

Adjustable

Range:

Bit 0 = DO1

Bit 1 = DO2

Bit 2 = DO3

Bit 3 = DO4

Bit 4 = DO5

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:

It indicates the state of the digital outputs at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

The indication is done by means of an hexadecimal code, which when converted to binary will indicate the states

“active” and “inactive” of the outputs through numbers 1 and 0.

Example: If the code presented for the parameter P0097 on the keypad (HMI) is 001C, it will correspond to the

sequence 00011100, indicating that the outputs 5, 4, and 3 were active at the moment of the last fault

occurrence.

Table 16.3 - Example of correspondence between the P0097 hexadecimal code and the DOx states

0 0 1 C

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

No relation with the DOx

(always zero)

No relation with the DOx

(always zero)

DO5

Active

(+24 V)

DO4

Active

(+24 V)

DO3

Active

(+24 V)

DO2

Inactive

(0 V)

DO1

Inactive

(0 V)

P0800 - Phase U Book 1 Temperature

P0801 - Phase V Book 1 Temperature

P0802 - Phase W Book 1 Temperature

P0803 - Phase U Book 2 Temperature

Read Only Parameters [09]

16-14

P0804 - Phase V Book 2 Temperature

P0805 - Phase W Book 2 Temperature

P0806 - Phase U Book 3 Temperature

P0807 - Phase V Book 3 Temperature

P0808 - Phase W Book 3 Temperature

P0809 - Phase U Book 4 Temperature

P0810 - Phase V Book 4 Temperature

P0811 - Phase W Book 4 Temperature

P0812 - Phase U Book 5 Temperature

P0813 - Phase V Book 5 Temperature

P0814 - Phase W Book 5 Temperature

P0834 - DIM1 and DIM2 Status

Refer to the section 15.3 for more details.

17-1

Communication [49]

COMMUNICATION [49]

For the exchange of information through communication networks, the CFW-11 has several standardized

communication protocols, like MODBUS, CANopen, DeviceNet, and Ethernet/IP.

For more details regarding the inverter configuration for operating with those protocols, refer to the CFW-11

Communication Manuals. The parameters regarding the communication are explained next.

17.1 RS-232 AND RS-485 SERIAL INTERFACE

P0308 – Serial Address

P0310 – Serial Baud Rate

P0311 – Serial Interface Byte Configuration

P0312 – Serial Protocol

P0314 – Serial Watchdog

P0316 – Serial Interface Status

P0682 – Serial / USB Control Word

P0683 – Serial / USB Speed Reference

Those are parameters for the configuration and operation of the RS-232 and RS-485 serial interfaces. For a detailed

description, refer to the RS-232/RS-485 Communication Manual, supplied in electronic format on the CD-ROM that

comes with the product.

17.2 CAN INTERFACE – CANOPEN/DEVICENET

P0684 – CANopen/DeviceNet Control Word

P0685 – CANopen/DeviceNet Speed Reference

P0700 – CAN Protocol

P0701 – CAN Address

P0702 – CAN Baud Rate

P0703 – Bus Off Reset

P0705 – CAN Controller Status

P0706 – Received CAN Telegram Counter

Communication [49]

17-2

P0707 – Transmitted CAN Telegram Counter

P0708 – Buss Off Error Counter

P0709 – Lost CAN Message Counter

P0710 – DeviceNet I/O Instances

P0711 – DeviceNet Reading Word #3

P0712 – DeviceNet Reading Word #4

P0713 – DeviceNet Reading Word #5

P0714 – DeviceNet Reading Word #6

P0715 – DeviceNet Writing Word #3

P0716 – DeviceNet Writing Word #4

P0717 – DeviceNet Writing Word #5

P0718 – DeviceNet Writing Word #6

P0719 – DeviceNet Network Status

P0720 – DeviceNet Master Status

P0721 – CANopen Communication Status

P0722 – CANopen Node Status

Those are parameters for the configuration and operation of the CAN interface. For a detailed description, refer to

the CANopen Communication Manual or to the DeviceNet Communication Manual, supplied in electronic format on

the CD-ROM that comes with the product.

17.3 ANYBUS-CC INTERFACE

P0686 – Anybus-CC Control Word

P0687 – Anybus-CC Speed Reference

P0723 – Anybus Identification

P0724 – Anybus Communication Status

P0725 – Anybus Address

P0726 – Anybus Baud Rate

17-3

Communication [49]

P0727 – Anybus I/O Words

P0728 – Anybus Reading Word #3

P0729 – Anybus Reading Word #4

P0730 – Anybus Reading Word #5

P0731 – Anybus Reading Word #6

P0732 – Anybus Reading Word #7

P0733 – Anybus Reading Word #8

P0734 – Anybus Writing Word #3

P0735 – Anybus Writing Word #4

P0736 – Anybus Writing Word #5

P0737 –Anybus Writing Word #6

P0738 – Anybus Writing Word #7

P0739 – Anybus Writing Word #8

Those are parameters for the configuration and operation of the Anybus-CC interface. For a detailed description, refer to

the Anybus-CC Communication Manual, supplied in electronic format on the CD-ROM that comes with the product.

17.4 COMMUNICATION STATES AND COMMANDS

P0313 – Communication Error Action

P0680 – Logical Status

P0681 – Motor Speed in 13 bits

P0692 – Operation Mode Status

P0693 – Operation Mode Commands

P0695 – Digital Output Setting

P0696 – Analog Outputs Value 1

P0697 – Analog Outputs Value 2

P0698 – Analog Outputs Value 3

Communication [49]

17-4

P0699 – Analog Outputs Value 4

Those parameters are used for monitoring and controlling the CFW-11 inverter by means of communication interfaces.

For a detailed description, refer to the Communication Manual of the used interface. These manuals are supplied in

electronic format on the CD-ROM that comes with the product.

18-1

SoftPLC [50]

SOFTPLC [50]

18.1 SOFTPLC

The SoftPLC function allows the frequency inverter to assume PLC (Programmable Logical Controller) functions.

For more details regarding the programming of those functions in the CFW-11, refer to the CFW-11 SoftPLC

Manual. The parameters related to the SoftPLC are described next.

P1000 – SoftPLC Status

P1001 – SoftPLC Command

P1002 – Scan Cycle Time

P1010 to P1049 – SoftPLC Parameters

SoftPLC [50]

18-2

19-1

Trace Function [52]

TRACE FUNCTION [52]

19.1 TRACE FUNTION

The trace function is used to record variables of interest from the CFW-11 (as current, voltage, speed) when a

particular event occurs in the system (e.g.: alarm/fault, high current, etc.). This system event, for starting the data

recording process, is called "trigger". The stored variables can be visualized as graphs through the SuperDrive

G2 executed by a PC connected via USB or Serial to the CFW-11.

The parameters related to this function are presented next.

P0550 – Trigger Signal Source

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Not selected

1 = Speed Reference

2 = Motor Speed

3 = Motor Current

4 = DC Link Voltage

5 = Motor Frequency

6 = Motor Voltage

7 = Motor Torque

8 = Process Variable

9 = PID Setpoint

10 = AI1

11 = AI2

12 = AI3

13 = AI4

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Description:

It selects the variable that will be used as the trigger source for the Trace Function.

This parameter has no effect when P0552=“Alarm”, “Fault” or “DIx”.

Those same variables can also be used as signals to be acquired, through the parameters from P0561 up to

P0564.

P0551 – Trigger Level for Trace

Adjustable

Range:

-100.0 to 340.0 % Factory

Setting:

0.0 %

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Trace Function [52]

19-2

Description:

It defines the value for comparison with the variable selected in P0550.

The full range of the variables selectable as trigger is presented in the next table.

Table 19.1 - Full scale of the variables selectable as trigger

Variable Full Scale

Speed Reference 100 % = P0134

Motor Speed 100 % = P0134

Motor Current 200 % = 2.0 x InomHD

DC Link Voltage 100 % = Max. Lim. P0151

Motor Frequency 340 % = 3.4 x P0403

Motor Voltage 100 % =1.0 x P0400

Motor Torque 200 % = 2.0 x Inom Motor

Process Variable 100 % = 1.0 x P0528

PID Setpoint 100 % = 1.0 x P0528

AI1 100 % = 10 V/20 mA

AI2 100 % = 10 V/20 mA

AI3 100 % = 10 V/20 mA

AI4 100 % = 10 V/20 mA

This parameter has no effect when P0552=“Alarm”, “Fault” or “DIx”.

P0552 – Trigger Condition for Trace

Adjustable

Range:

0: P0550* = P0551

1: P0550* ≠ P0551

2: P0550* > P0551

3: P0550* < P0551

4: Alarm

5: Fault

6: DIx

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Description:

It defines the condition for starting the signal acquisition. The table 19.2 details the available options.

Table 19.2 - Parameter P0552 option description

P0552 Options Description

P0550* = P0551 The variable selected in P0550 is equal to the value adjusted in P0551

P0550*≠P0551 The variable selected in P0550 is different from the value adjusted in P0551

P0550* > P0551 The variable selected in P0550 is bigger than the value adjusted in P0551

P0550* < P0551 The variable selected in P0550 is smaller than the value adjusted in P0551

Alarm Inverter with an active alarm

Fault Inverter in fault state

DIx Digital input (selected via P0263 – P0270)

For P0552=6 (“DIx” option), it is necessary to select the option “Trace Function” at one of the parameters from P0263

to P0270. For more details, refer to the section 13.1.3.

19-3

Trace Function [52]

Notes:

- If P0552=6 and no DI is configured for “Trace Function”, the trigger will not occur;

- If P0552=6 and several DIs were configured for “Trace Function”, only one has to be active for the trigger

occurrence;

- If P0552≠6 and any DI is configured for “Trace Function”, the trigger will never occur as a result of the DI

activation;

- These three programming options do not prevent the inverter from being enabled.

P0553 – Trace Sampling Period

Adjustable

Range:

1 to 65535 Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Description:

It defines the sampling period (time between two sampling points) as a 200 µs multiple.

For P0297=1.25 kHz, it defines the sampling period as a 400 µs multiple

P0554 – Trace Pre-Trigger

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 100 % Factory

Setting:

0 %

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Description:

It is the data percentage that will be recorded before the occurrence of the trigger event.

P0559 – Trace Maximum Memory

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 100 % Factory

Setting:

0 %

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Description:

It defines the maximum of memory that the user wished to reserve for the Trace Function points. The setting range,

from 0 to 100 %, corresponds to a reserve request of 0 to 15 KB for the Trace Function.

Each point stored by the Trace Function takes 2 bytes of memory. This parameter defines indirectly the number of

points that the user wishes to store with the Trace Function.

Trace Function [52]

19-4

The memory area used by the Trace Function is shared with the memory for the SoftPLC applicative. When there is a

SoftPLC applicative in the inverter, the amount of memory actually available for the Trace Function may be smaller

than the value adjusted in P0559. The indication of the memory amount actually available is done by the read only

parameter P0560. For more details refer to the parameter P0560 description.

As the factory setting, P0559=0 %. In this case, there is no memory available for the Trace Function, because the

available 15 KB are reserved for the SoftPLC applicative.

P0560 – Trace Available Memory

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 100 % Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Description:

It shows the amount of memory available for storing Trace Function points. The range from 0 to 100 % indicates that

from 0 to 15 KB are available for the Trace Function.

Sharing of memory with the SoftPLC:

The memory for the Trace Function is shared with the memory for the SoftPLC applicative.

- If P1000=0 (there is no SoftPLC applicative), it is possible to use all the memory area for the Trace Function. In

this case, P0559=P0560.

- If P1000>0 (there is SoftPLC applicative in the inverter), P0560 will show the smallest value between P0559 and

0the actual available memory (that will be 100 % minus the memory used by the SoftPLC applicative).

In order to be able to use the Trace Function, the user must adjust P0559 to a value different from 0 %, and verify if

the value indicated in P0560 is enough. If P0559 > P0560 and the user wishes to use more memory for the Trace

Function, then the SoftPLC applicative must be erased by means of the parameter P1001.

P0561 – CH1: Trace channel 1

P0562 – CH2: Trace channel 2

P0563 – CH3: Trace channel 3

P0564 – CH4: Trace channel 4

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Not selected

1 = Speed Reference

2 = Motor Speed

3 = Motor Current

4 = DC Link Voltage

5 = Motor Frequency

6 = Motor Voltage

7 = Motor Torque

8 = Process Variable

9 = PID Setpoint

10 = AI1

11 = AI2

12 = AI3

13 = AI4

Factory

Setting:

P0561=1

P0562=2

P0563=3

P0564=0

19-5

Trace Function [52]

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Description:

They select the signals that will be recorded at the channels 1 to 4 of the Trace Function.

The options are the same that are available at P0550. By selecting the “Not Selected” option, the total memory

available for the Trace function is distributed between the active channels.

P0571 – Start Trace Function

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Description:

It initiates the waiting for the Trace Function trigger.

Since it is a parameter that can be changed with the motor running, it is not necessary to press “Save” on the keypad

(HMI) for the “trigger” waiting to initiate.

This parameter does not have effect if there is no active channel or if there is no memory available for the Trace

Function (P0560 = 0).

P0571 returns automatically to 0, for safety reasons, if any of the parameters between P0550 and P0564 is

changed.

P0572 – Day/Month Trace Triggered

Adjustable

Range:

00/00 to 31/12 Factory

Setting:

P0573 – Year Trace Triggered

Adjustable

Range:

00 to 99 Factory

Setting:

P0574 – Hour Trace Triggered

Adjustable

Range:

00:00 to 23:59 Factory

Setting:

P0575 – Second Trace Triggered

Adjustable

Range:

00 to 59 Factory

Setting:

Trace Function [52]

19-6

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Description:

P0572 to P0575 record the date and hour of the trigger occurrence. These parameters and the points acquired by

the Trace Function are not saved when the inverter is powered off.

There are two possibilities for P0572 to P0575 being null:

- No acquisition was performed after the inverter power on, or

- Trace happened without keypad (HMI) connected to the inverter (no RTC).

P0576 – Trace Function Status

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = Waiting

2 = Triggered

3 = Concluded

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

52 Trace Function

Description:

It indicates if the Trace function has been initiated, if there has been already a trigger and if the signals have already

been completely acquired.

20-1

PID Regulator [46]

PID REGULATOR [46]

20.1 DESCRIPTION AND DEFINITIONS

The CFW-11 has the special function PID REGULATOR, which can be used to control a closed loop process.

This function places a proportional, integral and derivative regulator, superposed to the normal CFW-11 speed

control. Refer to the block diagram in the figure 20.1.

The process control is done by means of the motor speed variation, keeping the value of the process variable

(the one to be controlled) at the desired value.

Application examples: the control of flow or pressure in a piping, of the temperature in a furnace or in a

greenhouse, or of the chemicals dosage in tanks.

In order to define the terms used by a PID control, we are going to use a simple example.

An electro-pump is used in a water pumping system where the pressure in the pump output pipe has to be

controlled. A pressure transducer is installed in the pipe and supplies an analog feedback signal to the

CFW-11, which is proportional to the water pressure. This signal is called the process variable, and can be

visualized at the parameter P0040. A setpoint is programmed in the CFW-11 via the keypad (HMI) (P0525)

or adjusted through an analog input (as a 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal). The setpoint is the desired water

pressure value that the pump is supposed to produce, regardless of the consumption variations at the pump

output at any time.

The CFW-11 will compare the setpoint with the process variable and control the motor speed trying to eliminate

any error and keeping the process variable equal to the setpoint. The setting of the P, I and D gains determines

how fast the inverter will respond to eliminate this error.

PID Regulator [46]

20-2

Setpoint Definition

(reference of the process variable)

P0525

Setpoint Reference

(Refer to the figure 13.8)

P0221 / P0222=0

Enable

Feedback P0524

(Refer to the figures 13.1 and 13.2)

P0526

P0040

Academic

PID

P0133, P0134

P0527

0 = Direct

1 = Reverse

PID Regulator

Action Type

Manual

(Open DIx)

DI3

(P0265=22)

Academic

PID P0522

P0521

Speed

Reference

(Refer to the

figure 13.8)

P0520

Enable

Reference

(Refer to the figure 13.8)

P0523

P0221 / P0222>0

P0524=0

P0524=3

P0528

P0529

AI4'

P0524=2

P0524=1

AI2'

AI3'

AI1'

Automatic

(Closed DIx)

Figure 20.1 - PID Regulator function block diagram

20-3

PID Regulator [46]

20.2 COMMISSIONING

Before doing a detailed description of the parameters related to this function, a step by step guide for putting

the PID into operation will be presented.

NOTE!

In order that the PID function works properly, it is fundamental to verify if the inverter is configured

correctly to drive the motor at the desired speed. Therefore, verify the following settings:

Torque boost (P0136 and P0137) and slip compensation (P0138), if it were in the V/f control

mode;

Having run the self-tuning if it were in the vector mode;

Acceleration and deceleration ramps (P0100 to P0103) and current limit (P0135 for V/f and VVW

control, or P0169/P0170 for vector control).

Configuring the PID Function

1) To select the especial function: PID Regulator (P0203=1)

When the PID function is enabled, by setting P0203=1, the following parameters are changed automatically:

P0205=10 (Reading Parameter Selection 1: Setpoint PID #);

P0206=9 (Reading Parameter Selection 2: Process Var. #);

P0207=2 (Reading Parameter Selection 3: Motor Speed #);

P0223=0 (FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - LOCAL Situation: Always FORWARD);

P0225=0 (JOG Selection – LOCAL Situation: Disabled);

P0226=0 (FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - REMOTE Situation: Always FORWARD);

P0228=0 (JOG Selection - REMOTE Situation: Disabled);

P0236=3 (AI2 Signal Function: Process Variable);

P0265=22 (DI3 Function: Manual/Automatic).

The DI3 function, defined by the parameter P0265, works in the following manner:

Table 20.1 - DI3 operation mode for P0265=22

DI3 Operation

0 (0 V) Manual

1 (24 V) Automatic

2) To define the type of PID action that the process requires: direct or reverse. The control action must be

direct (P0527=0) when it is necessary that the speed increases for the process variable to increase. Otherwise,

select reverse (P0527=1).

Examples:

a) Direct: A pump driven by an inverter filling up a reservoir, with the PID controlling its level. In order that the

level (process variable) increases, it is necessary that the flow increases, which is obtained with the increase

of the motor speed.

b) Reverse: A fan driven by an inverter doing the refrigeration of a cooling tower, with the PID controlling its

temperature. In order that the temperature (process variable) increases, it is necessary that the ventilation be

reduced, by means of the reduction of the motor speed.

PID Regulator [46]

20-4

3) To define the feedback input: the feedback (process variable measurement) is always done via one of

the analog inputs (selected at P0524). In order to make this guide easier, the AI2 input will be selected

(P0524=1).

4) To adjust the process variable scale: the transducer (sensor) to be used for the process variable feedback

must have a full scale of at least 1.1 times the highest value to be controlled.

Example: If a 20 bar pressure has to be controlled, a sensor with a full scale of at least 22 bar (1.1 x 20) must

be chosen.

Once the sensor has been defined, the type of signal to be read at the input (if current or voltage) must be

selected and the corresponding switch (S1 or S2) be set for that selection.

In this guide it will be assumed that the sensor signal will be 4 to 20 mA (configuring P0238 = 1 and

S1.3=ON).

Afterwards, the gain (P0237) and the offset (P0239) of the feedback signal can be adjusted so that the process

variable be read at the analog input with the highest possible resolution without saturation. In this case, adjust

the parameters P0237 and P0239, according to the following example.

NOTE!

In order to avoid the saturation of the feedback analog input during regulation overshoots, the signal

must range from 0 to 90 % (0 to 9 V / 4 to 18 mA). This adaptation can be done by changing the

gain of the analog input selected as feedback.

Example:

- Full scale of the transducer (maximum output value)=25 bar (FS = 25);

- Operation range (range of interest) = 0 to 15 bar (OR = 15).

Opting to maintain P0237 = 1.000 and P0239 = 0 (factory setting), which is the most common for most

of the applications:

- P0525 = 50 % (Keypad PID setpoint) will be equivalent to the used sensor full scale value, i.e., 0.5 x FS =

12.5 bar. Thus, the operation range (0 to 15 bar) represents 60 % of the setpoint.

If it is necessary to adjust P0237:

- Considering a gap of 10 % for the process variable measurement range (MR = 1.1 x OR = 16.5), it must

be adjusted at 0 to 16.5 bar. Therefore, the parameter P0237 must be set:

P0237 = FS = 25 = 1.52

MR 16.5

Thus, a setpoint of 100 % represents 16.5 bar, i.e., the operation range in percentage stays from 0 to 90.9 %

(OR=15/16.5).

If offset adjustment is necessary, the parameter P0239 must be configured according to the detailed description

of the section 13.1.1.

20-5

PID Regulator [46]

If it is wished to change the indication of the process variable on the keypad (HMI), the parameters P0528 and

P0529 must be adjusted according to the transducer full scale and to the defined P0237 value (Refer to the

description of those parameters at the section 20.6). The parameters P0530 to P0532 can be configured to

set the process variable engineering unit.

Example: If a reading of “25.0 bar” is wished for the motor maximum speed, set:

– P0528=250;

– P0529=1 (wxy.z);

– P0530=“b”;

– P0531=“a”;

– P0532=“r”.

5) To set the reference (setpoint): to define the operation mode (local/remote) at the parameter P0220 and

the reference source at parameters P0221 and P0222, according to the desired situation.

In case the setpoint is defined via keypad (HMI), set P0525 according to the equation below:

Setpoint (%) = Desired value (process variable) x feedback

Sensor full scale value gain x 100 %

Example: Given a pressure transducer with a 4 to 20 mA output and a full scale of 25 bar (i.e., 4 mA=0 bar

and 20 mA=25 bar) and P0237=2.000. If it is wished to control 10 bar, the following setpoint must

be entered:

Setpoint (%) = 10 x 2 x 100 % = 80 %

In case the setpoint is defined via analog input (AI1 for instance), P0231 must be configured=0 (AI1 Signal

Function: Speed reference) and P0233 (AI1 Signal Type) according to the type of signal to be read by the input

(if current or voltage).

Do not program P0221 and/or P0222=7 (E.P.).

6) To set the speed limits: Adjust P0133 and P0134 according to the application.

The readings exhibited automatically when the inverter is powered are:

- Reading 1 – P0041 “PID Setpoint”;

- Reading 2 – P0040 “Process Variable”;

- Reading 3 – P0002 “Motor Speed”.

7) Indication: Refer to the section 5 in this manual.

Those variables can also be visualized at the analog outputs (AOx), provided that the parameters that define

the function of those outputs be programmed accordingly.

PID Regulator [46]

20-6

Starting up

1) Manual Operation (open DI3): keeping the DI3 open (Manual), check the process variable indication on the

keypad (HMI) (P0040) based on an external measurement of the feedback signal value (transducer) at AI2.

Next, vary the speed reference until reaching the desired value of the process variable. Only then pass it to

the automatic mode.

NOTE!

If the setpoint is defined by P0525, the inverter will set P0525 automatically with the instantaneous

value of P0040 when the mode is changed from manual to automatic (provided that P0536=1).

In this case, the commutation from manual to automatic is smooth (there is no abrupt speed

change).

2) Automatic Operation (closed DI3): close DI3 and perform the PID regulator dynamic adjustment, i.e., of

the proportional (P0520), integral (P0521) and differential (P0522), verifying if the regulation is being done

correctly. Therefore, it is only necessary to compare the setpoint to the process variable checking if the values

are close. Observe also how fast the motor responds to oscillations in the process variable.

It is important to point out that the PID gain setting is a step that requires attempt and error in order to

get the desired response time. If the system responds rapidly and oscillates close to the setpoint, then the

proportional gain is too high. If the system responds slowly and takes time to reach the setpoint, then the

proportional gain is too low and must be increased. And in case that the process variable does not reach

the required value (setpoint), then the integral gain must be adjusted.

As a summary of this guide, a schematic of the connections of the CFW-11 for the PID regulator application,

as well as the setting of the parameters used in this example, are presented next.

DI1

DI3

DI4

COM

24VCC

DGND

+REF

AI1+

AI1-

-REF

AI2+

AI2-

Setpoint

via keypad

CFW-11 OFF ON

2S1

XC1

PE R S T U V W PE

Shield

PE UVW

DI1 – Run /Stop

DI3 – Manual / Automatic

DI4 – General Enable

Process

Pressure

Transducer

0-25 bar

4-20 mA

Setpoint

via AI1

≥5kΩ

Line Isolating switch Fuses

Figure 20.2 - Example of a CFW-11 application as a PID regulator

20-7

PID Regulator [46]

Table 20.2 - Parameter setting for the presented example

Parameter Description

P0203=1 Selection of the PID regulator function

P0527=0(1) PID action type (Direct)

P0524=1(1) AI2 feedback input

P0238=1 AI2 signal type (4 to 20 mA)

P0237=1.000(1) AI2 input gain

P0239=0(1) AI2 input offset

P0528=250 Process variable scale factor

P0529=1(1) Process variable decimal point (wxy.z)

P0220=1 Operation in remote situation

P0222=0 Reference selection (HMI)

P0525=80% PID Setpoint

P0230=1 Dead zone (On)

P0205=10(2) Reading Parameter Selection 1 (Process variable)

P0206=9(2) Reading Parameter Selection 2 (PID setpoint)

P0207=2(2) Reading Parameter Selection 3 (Motor Speed)

P0536=1(1) P0525 automatic setting (On)

P0227=1(1) Remote Run/Stop selection (DIx)

P0263=1(1) DI1 function (Run/Stop)

P0265=22(2) DI3 function: Manual/Automatic

P0266=2 DI4 function (General Enable)

P0236=3(2) AI2 input function (Process Variable)

P0520=1.000(1) PID proportional gain

P0521=1.000 PID integral gain

P0522=0.000(1) PID differential gain

(1) Parameters already in the factory default.

(2) Parameter configured automatically by the inverter.

20.3 SLEEP MODE

The sleep mode is a useful resource for saving energy when using the PID regulator.

In many PID applications energy is wasted by keeping the motor turning at the minimum speed when, for

instance, the pressure or the tank level keeps increasing.

The sleep mode works together with the zero speed disable function.

In order to activate the sleep mode, enable the zero speed disable by programming P0217=1 (On). The disable

condition is the same as for the zero speed disable without PID. Refer to the section 12.6.

For leaving the zero speed disable mode, when in the automatic PID mode, besides the condition programmed

in P0218, it is also necessary that the PID error (the difference between the setpoint and the process variable)

be higher than the value programmed in P0535.

DANGER!

While in the sleep mode, the motor may turn at any moment because of the process conditions. If

it is wished to handle the motor or to perform any type of maintenance, remove the power from the

inverter.

20.4 MONITORING MODE SCREENS

When the PID regulator is used, the monitoring mode screen can be configured to show the main variables in

a numerical form or as a bar graph, with the respective engineering units.

PID Regulator [46]

20-8

An example of the keypad (HMI) with that configuration can be seen in the figure 20.3, where the process

variable and the setpoint, both in BAR, and the motor speed in rpm are showed. Refer to the section 5.

Run LOC 90rpm

16:54 Menu

5.0 bar

990 rpm

Run LOC 90rpm

16:56 Menu

bar

rpm

15%

45%

Figure 20.3 - Example of the keypad (HMI) in the monitoring mode for the PID Regulator function

20.5 CONNECTION OF A 2-WIRE TRANSDUCER

In the 2-wire configuration the transducer signal and its supply share the same wires. The figure 20.5 illustrates

this type of connection.

DI1

DI3

DI4

COM

24VCC

DGND

+REF

AI1+

AI1-

-REF

AI2+

AI2-

Setpoint

via keypad

CFW-11 OFF ON

2S1

PE R S T U V W PE

Pressure

Transducer

Process

Figure 20.4 - Connection of a 2-wire transducer to the CFW-11

20.6 PARAMETERS

The parameters related to the PID Regulator [46] are now described in a detail form.

P0040 – PID Process Variable

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 100.0 % Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

Description:

It is a read only parameter that presents, in percentage, the PID Regulator process variable value.

P0041 – PID Setpoint Value

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 100.0 % Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: RO

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

20-9

PID Regulator [46]

Description:

It is a read only parameter that presents, in percentage, the value of the PID Regulator setpoint (reference).

P0203 – Special Function Selection

Adjustable

Range:

0 = None

1 = PID Regulator

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 Regulador PID

Description:

It enables the use of the PID Regulator special function, when set to 1.

When P0203 is changed to 1, the following parameters are changed automatically:

P0205=10 (Reading Parameter Selection 1);

P0206=9 (Reading Parameter Selection 2);

P0207=2 (Reading Parameter Selection 3);

P0223=0 (FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - LOCAL Situation: Always FORWARD);

P0225=0 (JOG Selection – LOCAL Situation: Disabled);

P0226=0 (FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - REMOTE Situation: Always FORWARD);

P0228=0 (JOG Selection – REMOTE Situation: Disabled);

P0236=3 (AI2 Signal Function: Process Variable);

- P0265=22 (DI3 Function: Manual/Automatic).

Once the PID Regulator function is enabled, the JOG and FWD/REV functions become inactive. The enabling and

Run/Stop commands are defined at P0220, P0224 and P0227.

P0520 – PID Proportional Gain

P0521 – PID Integral Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 7.999 Factory

Setting:

P0520=1.000

P0521=0.043

P0522 – PID Differential Gain

Adjustable

Range:

0.000 to 3.499 Factory

Setting:

0.000

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

Description:

These parameters define the gains of the PID Regulator function, and must be adjusted according to the application

that is being controlled.

Examples of initial settings for some applications are presented in the table 20.3

PID Regulator [46]

20-10

Table 20.3 - Suggestions for PID regulator gain settings

Quantity

Gains

Proportional

P0520

Integral

P0521

Differential

P0522

Pneumatic system pressure 1 0.043 0.000

Pneumatic system flow 1 0.037 0.000

Hydraulic system pressure 1 0.043 0.000

Hydraulic system flow 1 0.037 0.000

Temperature 2 0.004 0.000

Level 1 See note 0.000

NOTE!

In the level control case, the setting of the integral gain will depend on the time that it takes for

the reservoir to pass from the minimum acceptable level to the desired level, in the following

conditions:

1. For the direct action the time must be measured with the maximum input flow and the minimum

output flow;

2. For the reverse action the time must be measured with the minimum input flow and the maximum

output flow.

A formula for calculating the P0521 initial value in function of the system response time is presented next:

P0521=0.02 / t

Where t=time (in seconds).

P0523 – PID Ramp Time

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 999.0 s Factory

Setting:

3.0 s

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

Description:

This parameter adjusts the ramp time used by the PID regulator function, which will act when it is necessary to

correct the difference between the process variable and the setpoint.

The factory setting time (3.0 s) is normally adequate for the majority of the applications, as those listed in the table

20.3.

P0524 – PID Feedback Selection

Adjustable

Range:

0 = AI1

1 = AI2

2 = AI3

3 = AI4

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

20-11

PID Regulator [46]

Description:

It selects the regulator feedback input (process variable).

After choosing the feedback input, the function of the selected input must be programmed at P0231 (for AI1),

P0236 (for AI2), P0241 (for AI3) or P0246 (for AI4).

P0525 – Keypad PID Setpoint

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 100.0 % Factory

Setting:

0.0 %

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

Description:

This parameter allows the setting of the PID Regulator setpoint through the HMI keys, provided that P0221=0

or P0222=0, and if it is operating in Automatic mode. In case it is operating in Manual mode, the reference via

keypad (HMI) is adjusted at the parameter P0121.

The value of P0525 is kept at the last adjusted value (backup) even disabling or removing power from the inverter

(with P0120=1 – Active).

P0527 – PID Action Type

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Direct

1 = Reverse

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

Description:

The type of PID action must be selected as “Direct” when it is necessary that the motor speed be increased so that

the process variable be increased. Otherwise, “Reverse” must be selected.

Table 20.4 - PID action selection

Motor Speed Process Variable Select

Increases Increases Direct

Diminishes Reverse

That characteristic varies according to the process, but the direct action is more used.

In temperature or level control processes, the setting of the type of action will depend on the configuration. For

instance: at the level control, if the inverter acts on the motor that extracts fluid from the reservoir, the action will be

reverse, because when the level increases, the inverter must increase the motor speed so that it diminishes. In case the

inverter acts on the motor that puts fluid into the reservoir, the action will be direct.

P0528 – Process Variable Scale Factor

Adjustable

Range:

1 to 9999 Factory

Setting:

1000

PID Regulator [46]

20-12

P0529 – Process Variable Decimal Point

Adjustable

Range:

0 = wxyz

1 = wxy.z

2 = wx.yz

3 = w.xyz

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

Description:

Those parameters define how the process variable (P0040) and the PID Setpoint (P0041) will be shown.

The parameter P0529 defines the number of decimal places after the dot.

However the parameter P0528 must be adjusted in the following manner:

P0528 = Process V. FS Indication x (10)P0529

Analog input Gain

Where: Process V. F. S. Indication = Process Variable Full Scale value, which corresponds to 10 V/20 mA at the

analog input used as feedback.

Example 1 (0 to 25 bar Pressure Transducer – 4 to 20 mA output):

- Desired indication: 0 to 25 bar (F.S.);

- Feedback input: AI3;

- AI3 gain: P0242=1.000;

- AI3 signal: P0243=1 (4 to 20 mA);

- P0529=0 (without decimal place after the dot).

P0528 = 25 x (10)0

= 25

1.000

Example 2 (Factory settings):

- Desired indication: 0.0 % to 100.0 % (F.S.);

- Feedback input: AI2;

- AI2 gain: P0237=1.000;

- P0529=1 (one decimal place after the dot).

P0528 = 100.0 x (10)1

= 1000

1.000

P0530 – Process Variable Engineering Unit 1

Adjustable

Range:

32 to 127 Factory

Setting:

P0531 – Process Variable Engineering Unit 2

20-13

PID Regulator [46]

P0532 – Process Variable Engineering Unit 3

Adjustable

Range:

32 to 127 Factory

Setting:

P0531=32

P0532=32

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

Description:

The process variable engineering unit is composed of three characters, which will be applied to the indication of

the parameters P0040 and P0041. The parameter P0530 defines the left most character, P0531 the center and

P0532 the right most.

The characters that can be chosen correspond to the ASCII code 32 to 127.

Examples:

A, B, ..., Y, Z, a, b, ..., y, z, 0, 1, ..., 9, #, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...

−Toindicate“bar”: −Toindicate“%”:

P0530=”b” (98) P0530=”%” (37)

P0531=”a” (97) P0531=” ” (32)

P0532=”r” (114) P0532=” ” (32)

P0533 – PVx Process Variable

P0534 – PVy Process Variable

Adjustable

Range:

0.0 to 100.0 % Factory

Setting:

P0533=90.0 %

P0534=10.0 %

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

Description:

Those parameters are used in the functions of the digital/relay outputs, with the purpose of signalizing/alarm, and

they will indicate:

Process Variable > VPx and

Process Variable < VPy

The values are in percentage of the process variable full scale:

P0040 = (10)P0529

x 100 %

P0528

P0535 – Wake Up Band

Adjustable

Range:

0 to 100 % Factory

Setting:

0 %

PID Regulator [46]

20-14

Proprieties:

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

Description:

The parameter P0535 works together with the parameter P0218 (Condition to Leave the Zero Speed Disable),

giving the additional condition for leaving the Zero Speed Disable. Therefore, it is necessary that the PID error (the

difference between the setpoint and the process variable) be higher than the value programmed in P0535 so that

the inverter runs the motor again.

P0536 – P0525 Automatic Setting

Adjustable

Range:

0 = Off

1 = On

Factory

Setting:

Proprieties: CFG

Access groups

via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

46 PID Regulator

Description:

When the PID regulator setpoint is via keypad (HMI) (P0221/P0222=0) and P0536=1 (On), by commutating from

manual to automatic the value of the process variable (P0040) will be loaded into P0525. Therefore PID oscillations

during the commutation from manual to automatic are avoided.

20.7 ACADEMIC PID

The controller implemented in the CFW-11 is of the academic type. The equations that characterize the Academic

PID, which is the base of this function algorithm, are presented next.

The transfer function in the Academic PID regulator frequency dominion is:

y(s) = Kp x e(s) x [ 1 + 1 + sTd]

sTi

By replacing the integrator by a sum and the derivative by the incremental quotient, one gets an approximation for

the discrete transfer equation (recursive) presented next:

y(kTa) = y(k-1)Ta + Kp[(e(KTa) - e(k-1)Ta) + Kie(k-1)Ta + Kd(e(kTa) - 2e(k-1)Ta + e(k-2)Ta)]

Being:

Kp (Proportional gain): Kp = P0520 x 4096;

Ki (Integral gain): Ki = P0521 x 4096 = [Ta/Ti x 4096];

Kd (Differential gain): Kd = P0522 x 4096 = [Td/Ta x 4096];

Ta = 0.02sec (PID regulator sampling time);

SP*: reference, it has 13 bits (0 to 8191) maximum;

X: process variable (or controlled), read by means of one of the analog inputs (AIx), it has 13 bits maximum;

y(kTa): PID actual output, it has 13 bits maximum;

y(k-1)Ta: PID previous output;

e(kTa): actual error [SP*(k) – X(k)];

e(k-1)Ta: previous error [SP*(k-1) – X(k-1)];

e(k-2)Ta: error two samples before [SP*(k-2) – X(k-2)].

103146 3 Weg Variable Frequency Drive Programming Manual User

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation